DR232/DR242 Hybrid Recorder (Expandable Type) YOKOGAWA/YOKOGAWA DR232 And DR242 Instruction YOKOGAWA

User Manual: YOKOGAWA/YOKOGAWA DR232 and DR242 Instruction

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 292 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Instruction

Manual DR232/DR242

Hybrid Recorder

(Expandable Type)

IM DR232-01E

8th Edition

IM DR232-01E

Foreword

Thank you for purchasing the YOKOGAWA Hybrid Recorder DR232 or DR242.

This User’s Manual contains useful information regarding the instrument’s functions and

operating procedures, as well as precautions that should be observed during use. To ensure proper

use of the instrument, please read this manual thoroughly before operating the instrument.

Keep the manual in a safe place for quick reference whenever a question arises.

The following manual is provided with the instrument in addition to this manual.

Manual Name Manual No.

DR231/DR232/DR241/DR242 Communication Interface IMDR231-11E

Notes

• DARWIN is a system comprising a number of data-acquisition equipment components. In the

course of system growth, new models, software, various input/output modules and optional

features are added to the family to enhance the systems expandability and flexibility. You can

check the versions of your equipment and software by referring to the style number (Sn) and

release number (Rn) respectively which are shown on the nameplate of the main unit.

When configuring a system, you must confirm that the style number of each component unit and

software meets the following requirements:

1 the style number of each input/output module must be the same as or lower than that of the

main unit or subunit to which the module is connected.

2 the release number of a dedicated software package must be the same or higher than the style

number of the main unit or subunit where the package is installed and where it performs

control.

Any equipment/software not meeting these requirements might have incompatible areas with

your system configuration.

In this manual, equipment of style S8 is explained.

For unsupported functions as classified by the style number, see the next page.

• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of

improvements in the instrument’s performance and functions.

• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of its

contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please contact your

nearest YOKOGAWA representative as listed on the back cover of this manual.

• Copying or reproduction of all or any part of the contents of this manual without

YOKOGAWA’s permission is strictly prohibited.

Trademarks

DOS and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.

IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.

Revisions

1st Edition: January 1996

2nd Edition: February 1996

3rd Edition: June 1996

4th Edition: November 1996

5th Edition: March 1997

6th Edition: November 1997

7th Edition: November 1998

8th Edition: June 2000

Disk No. RE04

8th Edition: June 2000 (YK)

2IM DR232-01E

Unsupported Functions As Classified by the Style Number

The following functions are not available for style number S1

• Computation function (including remote RJC)

• Saving and reading of measured data, computated data and set-up data (FDD function)

• Summer/Winter time

• RS-422-A/RS-485 cs£munication module

• Pulse input module

• mA, Strain and AC input module

• Extender module and Extender base

• Report function

• Ethernet module

• Digital input module

• Flag and group reset functions (for /M1 option)

• The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module.

The following functions are not available for style number S2

• Summer/Winter time

• RS-422-A/RS-485 communication module

• Pulse input nodule

• mA, Strain and AC input module

• Extender module and Extender base

• Report function

• Ethernet module

• Digital input module

• Flag and group reset functions (for /M1 option)

• The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module.

The following functions are not available for style number S3

• Pulse input module

• mA, Strain and AC input module

• Extender module and Extender base

• Report function

• Ethernet module

• Digital input module

• Flag and group reset functions (for /M1 option)

• The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module.

The following functions are not available for style number S4 and S5

• mA, Strain and AC input module

• Extender module and Extender base

• Report function

• Ethernet module

• Digital input module

• Flag and group reset functions (for /M1 option)

• The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module.

Products with style number S6 is not sold.

The following functions are not available for style number S7

• Ethernet module

• Digital input module

• Flag and group reset functions (for /M1 option)

• The measuring of active power and apparent power on CH3 to CH6 for power monitor module.

IM DR232-01E

Checking the Contents of the Package

Unpack the box and check the contents before operating the instrument. In case the wrong

instrument or accessories have been delivered, or if some accessories are not present, or if they

seem abnormal, contact the dealer from which you purchased them. Furthermore, please contact a

Yokogawa representative to order any of parts as follows.

Main Unit DR232/DR242

Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order.

Model and Suffix Codes

Model Suffix Code Description

DR232 ....................... Hybrid recorder, desktop type

DR242 ....................... Hybrid recorder, panel-mount type

Memory -0 .................... No memory

-1 .................... 3.5inch Floppy disk drive

Software 0.................. Without data acquisition software

2.................. With data acquisition software

Input Type -00 ............ Always “-00”

Power Supply -1 ......... 100-240VAC

Power Cord D ......... 3-pin inlet w/UL, CSA cable* (Part No. A1006WD)

F ......... 3-pin inlet w/VDE cable* (Part No. A1009WD)

R ......... 3-pin inlet w/SAA cable* (Part No. A1024WD)

S ......... 3-pin inlet w/BS cable* (Part No. A1023WD)

W ........ 3-pin inlet with screw conversion terminal**

* For DR232 only

**For DR242 only

Options /M1 . Mathematical Func.

/M3 . Report Func.

/H1.. Internal illumination

/D2.. deg F Display

NO. (Instrument Number), Style number (equipment) and Release number

(software package)

Please refer to these numbers when contacting the dealer.

Subunit DS400/DS600

Check that the model and suffix code given on the name plate are according to your order.

Model and Suffix Codes

Model Suffix Code Description

DS400 ....................... 4-module connection subunit

DS600 ....................... 6-module connection subunit

Type 00 ................... always 00

Power Supply -1............. 100-240VAC

-2............. 12-28V DC

Power Cord D ......... 3-pin inlet w/UL, CSA cable (Part No. A1006WD)

F ......... 3-pin inlet w/VDE cable (Part No. A1009WD)

R ......... 3-pin inlet w/SAA cable (Part No. A1024WD)

S ......... 3-pin inlet w/BS cable (Part No. A1023WD)

W ........ 3-pin inlet with screw conversion terminal (when power supply suffix code is

-1)

Y ......... 2-pin inlet with round-type connector (when power supply suffix code is -2)

NO. (Instrument Number) and Style number (equipment)

Please quote these numbers when contacting the dealer.

4IM DR232-01E

Input Modules

Check that the model code given on the name plate is according to your order.

Model Codes

Model Description

DU100-11 10-channel universal input module, screw type terminal

DU100-21 20-channel universal input module, screw type terminal

DU100-31 30-channel universal input module, screw type terminal

DU100-12 10-channel universal input module, clamp type terminal

DU100-22 20-channel universal input module, clamp type terminal

DU100-32 30-channel universal input module, clamp type terminal

DU200-11 10-channel DCV/TC/DI input module, screw type terminal

DU200-21 20-channel DCV/TC/DI input module, screw type terminal

DU200-31 30-channel DCV/TC/DI input module, screw type terminal

DU200-12 10-channel DCV/TC/DI input module, clamp type terminal

DU200-22 20-channel DCV/TC/DI input module, clamp type terminal

DU200-32 30-channel DCV/TC/DI input module, clamp type terminal

DU300-11 10-channel, mA-input module with screw terminals

DU300-12 10-channel, mA-input module with clamp terminals

DU400-12 Power monitor module for single-phase use

DU400-22 Power monitor module for three-phase use

DU500-12 10-channel, strain input module with 120-Ω bridge resistors

DU500-22 10-channel, strain input module with 350-Ω bridge resistors

DU500-32 10-channel, strain input module with NDIS terminals

DU600-11 10-channel, pulse input module with screw terminals

DU700-11 10-channel, digital input module with screw terminal

NO. (Instrument Number)

Please quote this instrument number when contacting the dealer.

I/O Terminal Modules

Check that model code given on the name plate is according to your order.

Model Codes

Model Description

DT100-11 DI/DO module, screw type terminal

DT200-11 Alarm module (4 transfer contacts), screw type terminal

DT200-21 Alarm module (10 make contacts), screw type terminal

DT300-11 GP-IB module

DT300-21 RS-232-C module, D-sub terminal

DT300-31 RS-422-A/RS-485 module

DT300-41 Ethernet module

NO. (Instrument Number) and Style number (equipment)

Please quote these numbers when contacting the dealer.

Checking the Contents of the Package

IM DR232-01E

Standard Accessories

Name Part No. Q’ty Description

1. Power cord see page 2, 3 1

2. Fuse A1350EF 1 Timelag 2.5A 250V, for DR232/242, in case of

DR232 located in fuse holder

3. DC power supply A1105JC 1 Only for the subunit models whose power supply

terminal connector code is “-2”

4. Ribbon cassette B9627AZ 1 10 colors (for DR232/242)

5. Chart paper B9627AY 1 Length: 30m, 25mm grid (for DR232/DR242)

6. Mounting brackets B9900CW 1 x 2 for DR242

7. Clamp filter A1197MN 1 When power supply code is -1

8. User’s Manual IMDR232-01E 1 this manual (for DR232/242)

9. User’s Manual IMDR231-11E 1 Communication Interface manual (for DR232/242)

10.

Data acquisition software

DP120-13 Only for models whose software code is “-2”

1.One of these power cord types is supplied according

to the instrument's suffix code

DSR

2. 4.3. 5. 6. 7.

10.

Checking the Contents of the Package

6IM DR232-01E

Optional Accessories

Name Model Description

Extender module DV100-011

Extender base DV100-012

Extension cable DV200-000 Length: 0.5m

Extension cable DV200-001 Length: 1m

Extension cable DV200-002 Length: 2m

Extension cable DV200-005 Length: 5m

Extension cable DV200-010 Length: 10m

Extension cable DV200-020 Length: 20m

Extension cable DV200-050 Length: 50m

Extension cable DV200-100 Length: 100m

Extension cable DV200-200 Length: 200m

Extension cable DV200-300 Length: 300m

Extension cable DV200-400 Length: 400m

Extension cable DV200-500 Length: 500m

Shunt resistance DV300-011 10Ω, for screw

Shunt resistance DV300-012 10Ω, for clamp

Shunt resistance DV300-101 100Ω, for screw

Shunt resistance DV300-102 100Ω, for clamp

Shunt resistance DV300-251 250Ω, for screw

Shunt resistance DV300-252 250Ω, for clamp

Rack mount kit DV400-011 for DS400/600

Rack mount kit DV400-013 for DR232

Power cable DV400-051 between DR232/242 and DS400/600

Strain conversion cable DV450-001

Cable adapter DV250-001 For expanding cable

AC adapter DV500-001 2-pin inlet w/UL, CSA cable (Part No. B9988YA) for

DC100/DA100/DS400/DS600 DC power supply model

AC adapter DV500-002 2-pin inlet w/VDE cable (Part No. B9988YB) for

DC100/DA100/DS400/DS600 DC power supply model

AC adapter DV500-003 2-pin inlet w/SAA cable (Part No. B9988YC) for

DC100/DA100/DS400/DS600 DC power supply model

AC adapter DV500-004 2-pin inlet w/BS cable (Part No. B9988YD) for

DC100/DA100/DS400/DS600 DC power supply model

Optional Software

Name Model Description

DAQ 32 DP120-13 Windows 95/98 and Windows NT

DAQ 32 Plus DP320-13 Windows 95/98 and Windows NT

Spares

Name Part No. Min. Q’ty Description

Ribbon cassette B9627AZ 1 10 colors

Chart paper B9627RY 10 Length 30 m, grid 10mm

B9627AY 10 Length 30 m, grid 25mm

Checking the Contents of the Package

IM DR232-01E

Safety Precautions

This instrument is an IEC safety class I instrument (provided with terminal for protective

grounding).

The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation, service

and repair of this instrument. If this instrument is used in a manner not sepecified in this manual,

the protection provided by this instrument may be impaired. Also, YOKOGAWA Electric

Corporation assumes no liability for the customer’s failure to comply with these requirements.

The following symbols are used on this instrument.

To avoid injury, death of personnel

or damage to the instrument, the

operator must refer to an explanation

in the User’s Manual or Service

Manual.

Protective grounding terminal.

Function grounding terminal. This

terminal should not be used as a

“Protective grounding terminal”.

Alternating current.

ON(power).

OFF(power).

Make sure to comply with the following safety precautions. Not complying might

result in injury, death of personnel or damage to the instrument.

WARNING

Power Supply

Ensure the source voltage matches the voltage of the power supply

before turning ON the power.

Power Cord and Plug

To prevent an electric shock or fire, be sure to use the power cord

supplied by YOKOGAWA. The main power plug must be plugged in an

outlet with protective grounding terminal. Do not invalidate protection by

using an extension cord without protective grounding.

Protective Grounding

Make sure to connect the protective grounding to prevent an electric

shock before turning ON the power.

Necessity of Protective Grounding

Never cut off the internal or external protective grounding wire or

disconnect the wiring of protective grounding terminal. Doing so poses a

potential shock hazard.

Defect of Protective Grounding and Fuse

Do not operate the instrument when protective grounding or fuse might be

defective.

Do not Operate in an Explosive Atmosphere

Do not operate the instrument in the presence of flammable liquids or

vapors. Operation of any electrical instrument in such an environment

constitutes a safety hazard.

Fuse

To prevent a fire, make sure to use fuses with specified standard(current,

voltage, type). Before replacing the fuse, turn OFF the power and

disconnect the power source. Do not use a different fuse or short-circuit

the fuse holder.

Do not Remove any Covers

There are some areas with high voltages. Do not remove any cover if the

power supply is connected. The cover should be removed by qualified

personnel only.

External Connection

To ground securely, connect the protective grounding before connecting

to measurement or control unit.

8IM DR232-01E

How to Use this Manual

This User’s Manual consists of the following twelve chapters and Index.

Chapter Title Description

Chapter 1 System Configuration Explains the position of the DR within DARWIN, its

configuration, etc..

Chapter 2 Functions Explains the functions of the DR. Operating

procedures are not explained here.

Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring Describes cautions for use, explains how to install and

wire the DR, the power cord, how to switch ON/OFF

the DR, how to set the date/time, explains the noise

filter, etc..

Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Explains the display in the monitor mode.

Display

Chapter 5 Setting the Input Type/ Explains the operations when setting the input type,

Recording Span/ recording span and linear scaling function.

Linear Scaling

Chapter 6 Setting the Recording Explains the operations when setting recording

Conditions conditions such as the recording mode, channels,

recording interval, chart speed, recording span, and

recording format.

Chapter 7 Executing Recording Explains how to start and stop recording.

Chapter 8 Setting, Displaying and Explains how to set an alarm and what to do when an

Recording Alarms alarm occurs.

Chapter 9 Event/Action Function and Explains how to operate the event/action function,.

Other Functions how to copy recording information, how to reset

alarms, how to reset the timer, how to use the key-

lock, and how to use the external in-/output function.

Chapter 10 Basic Settings (SET UP) Explains functions which usually do not need to be

changed, and how to set

Chapter 11 Saving/Reading Measured, Explains how to save measured data, computed data

Computed and Set-up Data and set-up data to the internal RAM disk or floppy

disk and read them into the instrument.

Chapter 12 Executing Computation Explains the computation function (optional).

(Available with the /M1 Model)

Chapter 13 Trouble-Shooting and Explains maintenance procedures, error messages and

Maintenance calibration procedures.

Chapter 14 Specifications Explains specifications for all features of DR.

Index Gives the index in main menu and alphabetic order.

IM DR232-01E

Conventions Used in this Manual

Used Symbols

The following symbol marks are used to attract the operator’s attention.

Affixed to the DR232/242, indicating that for safety, the operator should

refer to the appropriate User’s Manual. For a list of the User’s Manuals,

refer to page 1.

Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent the danger of

injury or death to the user.

Describes precautions that should be observed to prevent damage to the

DR232/242.

Note

Provides information that is important for proper operation of the DR232/

242.

Indicates the relevant panel keys and indicators to carry out

the operation.

The procedure is explained by a flow diagram. For the

meaning of each operation, refer to the example below. The

operating procedures are given with the assumption that you

are not familiar with the operation. Thus, it may not be

necessary to carry out all the steps when changing settings.

Describes settings and restrictions relating to the operation.

10 IM DR232-01E

Contents

Foreword ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1

Checking the Contents of the Package......................................................................................................... 3

Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................................................. 7

How to Use this Manual..................................................................................................................................... 8

Conventions Used in this Manual................................................................................................................... 9

List of Menus and Set-up Data .......................................................................................................................13

Chapter 1 System Configuration

1.1 About DARWIN ...................................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 Product Overview .................................................................................................................................1-2

1.3 Names of Parts ......................................................................................................................................1-4

1.4 Floppy Disk ........................................................................................................................................ 1-11

Chapter 2 Functions

2.1 Display Functions .................................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 Measurement Input Functions ..............................................................................................................2-3

2.3 Recording Functions ............................................................................................................................. 2-5

2.4 Alarm Function ................................................................................................................................... 2-13

2.5 Standard Computation Functions ....................................................................................................... 2-16

2.6 Other Functions .................................................................................................................................. 2-17

Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring

3.1 General Precautions for Installation .....................................................................................................3-1

3.2 How to Install .......................................................................................................................................3-2

3.3 How to Connect the Input/Output Modules ......................................................................................... 3-7

3.4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette .............................................................................................3-9

3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables .........................................................................................................3-14

3.6 Connecting the Extension Cables .......................................................................................................3-19

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines ...............................................................................................................3-20

3.8 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases ....................................................................... 3-27

3.9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON/OFF ........................................................... 3-29

3.10 Setting the Date and Time ..................................................................................................................3-34

3.11 Countering Noise ................................................................................................................................3-35

Chapter 4 Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.1 Using the AUTO Display .....................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 Using the MANUAL Display ...............................................................................................................4-4

4.3 Using the PAGE Display ......................................................................................................................4-6

4.4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display .................................................................................................4-7

4.5 Using the BARGRAPH Display........................................................................................................... 4-9

4.6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display ................................................................................................4-10

4.7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display .................................................................................................4-11

4.8 Using the CLOCK (Data & Time) Display ........................................................................................4-13

Chapter 5 Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

5.1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span..................................................................................... 5-1

5.2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span ...................................................................................5-4

5.3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring

Channel .................................................................................................................................................5-6

5.4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input

Channel ...............................................................................................................................................5-10

IM DR232-01E

5.5 Performing Initial Balancing/Initialization on a Strain Input Channel...............................................5-12

5.6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel .................................................................................................5-13

Chapter 6 Setting the Recording Conditions

6.1 Setting the Recording Mode, Engineering Unit, Recording Channel and Recording Interval ............6-1

6.2 Setting the Chart Speed ........................................................................................................................6-4

6.3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording .............................................................. 6-6

6.4 Setting Tag, Digital Printout and Manual Printout ...............................................................................6-8

6.5 Setting the Alarm Printout ..................................................................................................................6-10

6.6 Setting Scale Printout, List Printout and List Format .........................................................................6-12

6.7 Entering Messages, Headers and Title ...............................................................................................6-14

6.8 Setting Match Time, Moving Average, Interpolation and Groups .....................................................6-16

Chapter 7 Executing Recording

7.1 Starting Dot Printing, Digital Printing and Printing in Logging Mode ................................................7-1

7.2 Starting Manual Printing, List Printing and Header Printing ...............................................................7-2

7.3 Starting Message Printing .....................................................................................................................7-3

7.4 Printing Set-up Lists ............................................................................................................................. 7-4

Chapter 8 Setting, Displaying and Recording Alarms

8.1 Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal switches) .....................................................................8-1

8.2 Alarm Display and Printing .................................................................................................................. 8-4

Chapter 9 Event/Action Function and Other Functions

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions ............................................................................................................9-1

9.2 Copying ..............................................................................................................................................9-12

9.3 Alarm Acknowledgment, Alarm Reset, Timer Reset, Keylock, and Message Printout.....................9-14

9.4 Clearing Alarm/Message Buffers, Displaying Module/Communications Information, Structuring

System Modules, and Initializing Information ...................................................................................9-16

9.5 Fail/Chart End Output, and Remote Control Signal Input .................................................................9-18

9.6 Summer/Winter Time .........................................................................................................................9-19

Chapter 10 Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot-Printing Position or Scan Interval .......................................................10-1

10.2 Setting Recording Format ...................................................................................................................10-3

10.3 Select Alarm Interval/Hysteresis/Hold/A/D Converter Integration Time/Filter ................................10-7

10.4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay/Internal Switch .............................................................................10-9

10.5 Setting Burn-out/Reference Junction Compensation .......................................................................10-12

10.6 Setting Recording Colors..................................................................................................................10-14

10.7 Setting Key Lock ..............................................................................................................................10-15

10.8 Setting FUNC/FUNC3 Menu ........................................................................................................... 10-17

10.9 Setting SET/SET3 Menu ..................................................................................................................10-20

10.10 Selecting Display Update Interval, Registering Details Set/Selected with SET UP Menu, and

Terminating SET UP Menu ..............................................................................................................10-24

10.11 Selecting the temperature unit from °C or °F (option) .....................................................................10-25

10.12 Working with the Report Function ...................................................................................................10-27

Chapter 11 Saving/Reading Measured, Computed and Set-up Data

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data ...............................................................................................11-1

11.2 Reading Measured and Computed Data .............................................................................................11-7

11.3 Saving Set-up Data ........................................................................................................................... 11-10

11.4 Reading Set-up Data ......................................................................................................................... 11-12

11.5 Copying a Data File .......................................................................................................................... 11-15

11.6 Copying in ASCII Format ................................................................................................................11-17

Contents

Index

12 IM DR232-01E

11.7 Deleting a Data File ..........................................................................................................................11-20

11.8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information ......................................................................11-21

11.9 Initializing the RAM Disk ................................................................................................................11-23

11.10 Formatting a Floppy Disk .................................................................................................................11-24

Chapter 12 Executing Computation (Available with the /M1 Model)

12.1 Overview of the Computation Function .............................................................................................12-1

12.2 Setting a Computation Equation .........................................................................................................12-4

12.3 Setting a Constant ...............................................................................................................................12-7

12.4 Starting/Stopping Computation ..........................................................................................................12-8

12.5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG

SUM..................................................................................................................................................12-12

Chapter 13 Trouble-shooting and Maintenance

13.1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts Replacement Period ............................................... 13-1

13.2 Replacing the Fuse..............................................................................................................................13-2

13.3 Troubleshooting ..................................................................................................................................13-3

13.4 Error Codes .........................................................................................................................................13-4

13.5 Calibration ..........................................................................................................................................13-6

Chapter 14 Specifications

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600 .........................................................................14-1

14.2 Universal Input Module and DCV/TC/DI Input Module .................................................................14-11

14.3 Specifications of mA-input Module .................................................................................................14-14

14.4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module ........................................................................................14-16

14.5 Specifications of Strain Input Module ..............................................................................................14-20

14.6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module...............................................................................................14-22

14.7 Specifications of Digital Input module.............................................................................................14-24

14.8 Alarm Module................................................................................................................................... 14-26

14.9 DI/DO Module ..................................................................................................................................14-27

14.10 Communication Interface Module ....................................................................................................14-29

14.11 Specifications of Extension Module and Extension Base ................................................................14-32

14.12 Dimensional Drawings......................................................................................................................14-33

Index

Contents

IM DR232-01E

List of Menus and Set-up Data

The following is a list of set-up data, procedures to switch to different setting modes, and setting

menu.

Measurement Condition Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Input type, span, linear RANGE key 001-01:VOLT/2V Chapter 5

scaling*1

Units SET key*2SET=UNIT Section 6.1

Moving average

Press the SET key for about three seconds

*2SET=MOVE AVE Section 6.8

Measurement cycle*1

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP= Section 10.1

SCAN INTVL

A/D integration time*1

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=A/D INTG Section 10.3

Filter*1

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=FILTER Section 10.3

*1: Make sure that the total number of setting changes, including calibrations and restructuring, does not

surpass 100000.

*2: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key (see section 10.9).

Chart Speed Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Chart speed 1 CHART key CHART Section 6.2

Chart speed 2

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=CHART2 Section 6.2

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key (see section 10.9).

Recording Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Logging/Analog trend SET key* SET=SYSTEM Section 6.1

switch, dot-printing cycle

Recording channel SET key* SET=TREND Section 6.1

Recording zone

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=ZONE Section 6.3

Partial compression

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=PERTIAL Section 6.3

Tag

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=TAG Section 6.4

Channel to digital print,

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=DIGITAL PR Section 6.4

number of rows to print

Channel to manual print

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=MANUAL PR Section 6.4

Alarm print

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=ALARM PR Section 6.5

Channel to print scale

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=SCALE PR Section 6.6

values

Channel to list print

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=LIST PR Section 6.6

Items to list print

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=LIST FMT Section 6.6

Message

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=MESSAGE Section 6.7

Header

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=HEADER Section 6.7

Title

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=TITLE Section 6.7

Interpolation

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=INTERPOL Section 6.8

Adjust dot-printing

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=PRN ADJ Section 10.1

position

Recording format

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=RECORD Section 10.2

Dot-print color

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=COLOR Section 10.6

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key (see section 10.9).

Display Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Switch display DISP key and MODE key -------- Chapter 4

Display update interval Turn ON power while pressing the SET UP=DISPLAY Section 10.10

DISP key

Alarm Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Alarm, alarm output ALARM key 001-01:1/OFF Section 8.1

relay

Alarm

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=ALARM Section 10.3

interval/hysteresis/hold

Execute alarm FUNC key* ALARM ACK Section 9.3

acknowledge

Reset alarm FUNC key* ALARM RST Section 9.3

Clear alarm buffer

Press the FUNC key for about three seconds*

ALM BUF CLEAR Section 9.4

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key (see section 10.8).

14 IM DR232-01E

List of Menus and Set-up Data

Computation Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Computation equation SET key* SET=MATH Section 12.2

Constant SET key* SET=CONST Section 12.3

Perform computation FUNC key** MATH START Section 12.4

Clear measured data and FUNC key** MATH CLR START Section 12.4

perform computation

Stop computation FUNC key** MATH STOP Section 12.4

Clear incomplete FUNC key** MATH ACK Section 12.4

measurement status

Handling of computation

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=MATH Section 12.5

error/time axis setting of

TLOG SUM

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key (see section 10.9).

**: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key (see section 10.8).

Settings for Saving/Loading Measured/Setup Data (Floppy Disk)

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Save/Load measured dataSET key* SET=MEMORY

Section 11.1, 11.2

Save/Load set-up data SET key* SET=FLOPPY

Section 11.2, 11.3

of SET mode

Copy measured data SET key* SET=MEMORY Section 11.5

between built-in RAM

disk and floppy disk

Convert data and copy SET key* SET=MEMORY Section 11.6

Initialize built-in RAM SET key* SET=MEMORY Section 11.9

disk

Initialize floppy disk SET key* SET=MEMORY Section 11.10

Save/Load set-up data Turn ON power while pressing the DISP SET UP=FLOPPY

Section 11.3, 11.4

of SET UP mode key

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key (see section 10.9).

Perform Printing

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Perform manual print PRINT key MAN PR START Section 7.2

Perform list print PRINT key LIST START Section 7.2

Perform header print PRINT key HEADER START Section 7.2

Perform message print FUNC key* MSG PRINT Section 7.3

Perform setup list print

Press the FUNC key for about three seconds*

S/U LIST START Section 7.4

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key (see section 10.8).

Other Settings

Parameters Procedure Selecting menu Reference

Timer SET key* SET=TIMER Section 6.1

Event/Action SET key* SET=LOGIC Section 9.1

Copy between channels SET key* SET=COPY Section 9.2

Match time

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=MATCH TIME Section 6.8

Group

Press the SET key for about three seconds*

SET=GROUP Section 6.8

Relay, internal switch

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=RELAY Section 10.4

operation mode

Burnout

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=BURN OUTSection 10.5

Reference junction

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=RJC Section 10.5

compensation

Key lock

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=LOCK Section 10.7

Menu configuration

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP= Section 10.8

of FUNC key FUNC PARM

Menu configuration

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=SET PARM Section 10.9

of SET key

Report function

Turn ON power while pressing the DISP key

SET UP=REPORT Section 10.12

Reset timer FUNC key** TIMER RESET Section 9.3

Lock keys FUNC key** KEY LOCK ON Section 9.3

Start report FUNC key** REPORT START Section 10.12

Stop report FUNC key** REPORT STOP Section 10.12

Start report print FUNC key** REPORT RECALL Section 10.12

START

Stop report print FUNC key** REPORT PRINT Section 10.12

START

Clear message buffer

Press the FUNC key for about three seconds**

MSG BUF CLEAR Section 9.4

Display module settings

Press the FUNC key for about three seconds**

MODULE INF Section 9.4

Display communication

Press the FUNC key for about three seconds**

COMM INF Section 9.4

settings

Initialize setting

Press the FUNC key for about three seconds**

RAM INIT Section 9.4

information

*: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the SET key (see section 10.9).

**: Procedure varies according to the menu configuration of the FUNC key (see section 10.8).

1-1

IM DR232-01E

System Configuration

1.1 About DARWIN

Created from a completely new concept that is based on modular architecture, this group of next

generation data acquisition systems is called DARWIN (Data Acquistion and Recording

Windows).

Today many data acquisition networks are increasingly being linked together. More than ever

before, large volume, high speed, accurate, easy-to-use communication functions are essential in

many disciplines.

In the world of measurement and control where the number of measurement points has increased

sharply, the ability to acquire information from a large number of points easily and economically

is crucial. Interfacing to a personal computer allows simplified utilization of the information

while improving quality and efficiency.

DARWIN is based on a unique, new concept to meet these needs. The art of measurement is

revolutionized by DARWIN which integrates functions of conventional recording and data

logging.

Most existing data acquisition equipment has been the all-in-one type in which the measurement

section and display/recording section are contained in one box. While this simplifies operation on

the one hand, it is difficult to adapt to changes in the measurement environment and also makes

expansion difficult.

DARWIN uses a data acquisition engine and remote I/O modules which are completely separate

from each other. It is an entirely new product line which quickly and flexibly copes with various

restrictive conditions and changes in specifications.

Supported by a personal computer, a whole line-up can be created starting with the data

acquisition systems DA series which performs data logging. For example, using a printer as the

output device, the equipment becomes a hybrid recorder (DR series).

Two models are available in the DR series: the DR230 and DR240. The DR 230 is a desk-top

hybrid recorder, and the DR240 is a panel-mount hybrid recorder (component type).

Extension cables

(max. length 500m)

Subunit

Personal

computer

CH=001 RANGE=TC TYPE-T

Hybrid Recorder

001

002

003

004

005

006

007

008

009

010

011

012

013

014

015

016

017

018

019

020

021

022

023

024

025

026

027

028

029

030

Input/output

modules

DR240DR230

DA100

1-2 IM DR232-01E

1.2 Product Overview

This product is a hybrid recorder which can record and measure from small-scale 10-ch data up to

widely distributed 300-ch multi-point data.

The number of measurement points can be expanded up to a maximum of 300-ch by connecting

up to six subunits (DS400/DS600) to a main unit (DR232/242). Using dedicated extension cables

between units, interconnections can be extended up to 500 m. Since measured objects scattered

over a wide area can be wired fast and with a minimum of wiring, a flexible, extensive

measurement system can be configured. The input modules to be incorporated in the DR232/242

or DS400/600 can be selected from the following, to suit your measurement conditions:

• Universal input module and DCV/TC/DI input module

Temperature, DC voltage and contact signals can be measured, but cannot be connected to the

main unit.

• mA-input Module

This module can directly measure DC currents ranging from -20 mA to 20 mA since it contains

shunt resistors. It cannot be connected to a system's main unit.

• Power Monitor Module

This module can measure the effective voltage, effective current, active power, reactive power,

apparent power, frequency, power factor and phase angle for an AC voltage or AC current input.

It is available in either a single-phase or three-phase model. This module cannot be connected to

a system's main unit.

• Strain Input Module

This module can measure strain. It is available in either a model with built-in 120- or 350-Ω

bridge resistors or a model with NDIS terminals where bridge resistors are connected externally.

The module cannot be connected to a system's main unit.

• Pulse Input Module

This module can measure pulses. It cannot be connected to a system's main unit.

• Digital input module

This module can measure contact signals. It cannot be connected to a system’s main unit.

• Communication interface module

This module is necessary when communicating with a personal computer. Measurement

conditions can be set and data acquired via the communication interface (GP-IB, RS-232-C, etc.)

of this dule. This module can only be connected to the main unit.

• Alarm module

This module can output alarm signals as contact signals. The module can be connected to the

main unit or the subunit.

• DI/DO module

This module allows a signal to be output in the case of alarm, failure, or chart end and a remote

control signal for the product to be input. The module can be connected to the main unit or the

subunit but only one module in all units.

Note

When the following handling is done, it is necessary to carry out “system construction” to operate the

instrument correctly. After executing system construction, confirm the module information. For details,

see page 9-16.

• Connection (including addition or replacement)/removal of subunits, or unit number setting (see page 3-

• Mounting (including addition or replacement)/removal of modules

1-3

IM DR232-01E

System Configuration

Connection example

b -/B +/A

SUB UNIT

POWER

STATUS

POWER

STATUS

POWER

100-240V 50/60Hz 55VA MAX

STATUS

100-240V 50/60Hz 70VA MAX

SUB UNIT

100-240V 50/60Hz 70VA MAX

SUB UNIT

Subunit

DS600

Subunit

DS600

Subunit

DS400

Extension cable

10ch Universal Input module

Up to 6 subunits

can be connected

Main unit DR232/DR242

1.2 Product Overview

1-4 IM DR232-01E

1.3 Names of Parts

DR232 Main Unit (desk-top hybrid recorder)

Front

Main display (See chapter 4.)

Sub-display 1 (See chapter 4.)

Sub-display 2 (See chapter 4.)

Status indicator

Operation panel

(See chapters 3 to 12.)

Handle to open/close

the front door

Power switch (See page 3-22)

Front door

Floppy disk drive (Only for DR232-1)

Rear

Heat sink fins Power fuse ( See page 13-2)

Power connector

( See page 3-29)

Vacant slot with cover

(for communication interface,

alarm, or DI/DO modules)

Failure output terminals

Chart end output terminals

Function grounding

terminal

AC outlet(Au xiliary

for DS400/DS600

: See page 3-29)

1-5

IM DR232-01E

System Configuration

DR242 Main Unit (panel-mount hybrid recorder)

Front

Main display (See chapter 4.)

Sub-display 1 (See chapter 4.)

Sub-display 2 (See chapter 4.)

Status indicator

Operation panel

(Located behind the front door.

See chapters 3 to 12.)

Handle to open/close

the front door

Front door

Power switch

(Located inside the front door. See page 3-22.)

Floppy disk drive (Only for /DR242-1)

Rear

Heat sink fins

Power terminals with a cover

( See page 3-30)

Vacant slot with cover

(for communication interface, alarm, or DI/DO modules)

Failure output terminals

Chart end output terminalsPower fuse (See page 13-2)

(located in the main unit)

Function grounding

terminal

AC outlet(Auxiliary

for DS400/DS600

: See page 3-30)

1.3 Names of Parts

1-6 IM DR232-01E

Subunit DS400

Power connector

Power switch

Feet

Status indicator

Module connector

Installation holes

Screw holes for

module installation

Holes for fastening the feet

Lid covering the extension

cable connector

Switch to set the

unit number

Function grounding

terminal (below power switch)

Subunit DS600

Power connector

Power switch

Feet

Status indicator

Module

connector

Installation

holes

Screw holes for

module installation

Holes for fastening

the feet

Lid covering the

extension cable

connector

Switch to set

the unit number

Function grounding

terminal (below power switch)

Input modules

10-ch Universal input module (DU100-11/DU100-12)

Cover

Screw

terminal

DU100-11

Cover

Clamp

terminal

DU100-12

The 20-ch Universal input modules (DU100-21/DU100-22) and the 30-ch Universal input modules

(DU100-31/DU100-31) are similar to the ones shown above.

1.3 Names of Parts

1-7

IM DR232-01E

System Configuration

10-ch DCV/TC/DI input module (DU200-11/DU200-12)

Cover

Screw

terminal

DU200-11

Cover

Clamp

terminal

DU200-12

The 20-ch DCV/TC/DI input modules (DU200-21/DU200-22) and the 30-ch DCV/TC/DI input modules

(DU200-31/DU200-31) are similar to the ones shown above.

mA input module (DU300-11/DU300-12)

Cover

Screw

terminal

Cover

Clamp

terminal

AC input module (DU400-12/22)

Cover

Wire clip

Clamp terminal

1.3 Names of Parts

1-8 IM DR232-01E

Strain input module (DU500-12/DU500-13/DU500-14)

DU500-14

DU500-12/DU500-13

NDI terminal

Gauge method setup switch

Clamp terminal

Cover

Pulse input module (DU600-11)

Cover

Screw terminal

Digital input module (DU700-11)

Cover

Screw

terminal

1.3 Names of Parts

1-9

IM DR232-01E

System Configuration

I/O Terminal Modules DI/DO module (DT100-11)

Cover

Screw terminal

Alarm module (DT200-11/DT200-21)

Cover

Screw

terminal

DT200-11

Cover

Screw

terminal

DT200-21

Communication Module

GP-IB module (DT300-11)

GP-IB connector Switch to set

the address

RS-232-C module (DT300-21)

RS-232-C connector Switches to set

communication parameters

1.3 Names of Parts

1-10 IM DR232-01E

RS-422-A/RS-485 Module (DT300-31)

ON/OFF switch of built-in terminating resistor

LED

Switches to set

communication parameters

RS-422-A/RS-485 terminal

Ethernet module (DT300-41)

Switch to set mode

Status indicator

10BASE-T port

Extender Module/Extender Base

Extender Module (DV100-011)

EXTENDER I/F

I/F

Extension cable connector

Extender Base (DV100-012)

Lid covering the extension

Holes for fastening the feet

Terminator on/off switch

Slot number setup switch

Inatallation

holes

Screw holes for

module installation

Power indicator

Module connector

1.3 Names of Parts

1-11

IM DR232-01E

System Configuration

1.4 Floppy Disk

A floppy disk drive is provided with the DR232-1 and DR242-1.

Applicable Floppy Disks

3. 5-inch floppy disks can be used for this instrument. They can also be formatted on this

instrument.

• 2HD type: 1.2 MB or 1.44 MB (MS-DOS format)

• 2DD type; 720 MB (MS-DOS format)

Inserting a Floppy Disk into the Drive

Insert the floppy disk into the floppy disk drive, shutter side first and with the label face up.

Make sure that the floppy disk is inserted until the eject button pops up.

Removing the Floppy Disk from the Drive

Make sure that the access indicator is not lit, then push the eject button to remove the floppy disk.

eject button

access indicator

CAUTION

If the floppy disk is removed when the access indicator is still lit, damage to

the magnetic head of the floppy disk drive or to data saved on the floppy

disk may result. Before removing the floppy disk, always make sure that

the access indicator is OFF.

General Precautions Regarding Handling of Floppy Disk

For general precautions regarding handling of floppy disks, refer to the instruction manual

provided with the disk.

2-1

IM DR232-01E

Functions

2.1 Display Functions

The inter-active front panel display consists of three rows. The first row is the main display, and

the second and third row are sub-display 1 and 2 respectively.

Monitor Mode and Status Display

Monitor Mode

• Auto Mode

This mode can be set for the main display, sub-display 1 and sub-display 2. Measurement

values of all channels will be consecutively displayed with update interval.

• Manual Mode

This mode can be set for the main display, sub-display 1 and sub-display 2. Measurement

values of a single channel will be displayed. The display update interval is the same as the

measurement interval (refer to page 2-4).

• Manual Mode

This mode can be set for the main display. When choosing this display, the measurement values

of 5 consecutive channels will be displayed as a page using also sub-display 1 and 2. The

display update interval is the same as the measurement interval (refer to page 2-4).

• Alarm Search Mode

This mode can be set for the main display, sub-display 1 and sub-display 2. Channels at which

an alarm occurred will be searched for and their measurement values displayed. The display

update interval is 2 seconds.

• Bargraph Mode

This mode can be set for sub-display 1. Measurement values which are shown on the main

display will be shown as a bargraph. The display update interval is the same as the interval of

the main display.

• Alarm Status Mode

This mode can be set for sub-display 1 and 2. The display will show per channel whether or not

an alarm occurred (refer to page 2-13). On one display the alarm status of a maximum of 30

channels can be monitored (depending on the number of input channels). The display update

interval is 0.5 seconds.

• Relay Status Mode

This mode can be set for sub-display 1 and 2. The display will show the operating status of

internal switches/alarm output relays (refer to page 2-13). On one display a maximum of 30

relay statuses can be monitored. The display update interval is 1 second.

• Clock Mode

This mode can only be set for sub-display 2. The current date and time are shown.

• Displaying the Selected Mode

To the right of sub-display 1 the currently selected display mode is shown for a specific

display.

Status Display

Indicators at the right side of the display will light up to show that recording is in progress (refer

to page 2-5), alarms are occuring (refer to page 2-13), keys are locked (refer to page 2-17) and

chart needs to be replaced (refer to page 2-18).

Remote/Local Status Display

The status of remote/local control will be show on sub-display 2. Keys cannot be operated in

remote control.

2-2 IM DR232-01E

Display for Setting the Type of Input, Computation and Recording Conditions

Menus for setting each of the following functions will be displayed.

• measurement input functions (refer to page 2-3)

• recording functions (refer to page 2-5)

• alarm functions (refer to page 2-13)

• calculation functions (refer to page 2-16)

• event/action function, key-lock function and external in/output function (refer to page 2-17, 18)

Display for Setting Fundamental Functions

Menus for performing fundamental settings will be displayed.

2.1 Display Functions

2-3

IM DR232-01E

Functions

2.2 Measurement Input Functions

Input Type

DC Voltage

Measurements can be done after selecting the measurement range per channel. The minimum

range is 20mV, the maximum range is 50V.

Thermocouple

Measurements can be done after selecting the type of thermocouple per channel. The available

types are R, S, B, K, E, J, T, L, U, N, W and KPvsAU7FE.

Reference Junction Compensation (RJC) can be set to either use Internal RJC (INT) or External

RJC (EXT) per channel.

Burnout function can be set OFF per channel or it can be selected in which direction the trend line

will move if burnout occurs (right or left)

Resistance Temperature Detector

Measurements can be done after selecting the type of resistance temperature detector (RTD) per

channel. The available 17 types are Pt100(1mA), Pt100(2mA), JPt100(1mA), JPt100(2mA),

Pt50(2mA), Ni100(1mA)SAMA, Ni100(1mA)DIN, Ni120(1mA), J263*B, Cu10GE, Cu10L&N,

Cu10WEED, Cu10BAILEY, Pt100 (1mA) high resolution, Pt100 (2mA) high resolution, JPt100

(1mA) high resolution and JPt100 (2mA) high resolution.

Contact Input

The type of contact input can be selected from voltage level input or contact input, and recording

can be set ON or OFF per channel. In case of the voltage level input a voltage level up to 2.4V

results in recording OFF, whereas a voltage level of 2.4V or more results in recording ON.

DC Currents

DC currents ranging from -20 mA to 20 mA can be measured by means of the built-in 250-Ω

shunt resistors.

AC Voltages/Currents

The effective voltage, effective current, active power, reactive power, apparent power, frequency,

power factor and phase angle can be measured. The measuring range is common to all terminals.

The input terminals of the module with this input mode, unlike those of modules with other input

modes, are not consistent with a setup screen in terms of the channel number.

Strain

The module for this input mode supports the single-gauge, single-gauge three-wire (not yet

supported by the DU500-14 module), adjacent-side two-gauge, opposed-side two-gauge and four-

gauge methods. If you have connected any new strain gauge or changed the measuring range, go

through initial balancing before starting measurement.

Pulses

The module for this input mode can measure the number of pulses per second on a channel basis

or detect the on/off states by means of any variations occurring in the instantaneous value every

second. Once you connect the pulse input module, you can sum up values without the need for

the computing function.

Skipping Input Channels

This function allows skipping measurement, recording and display of channels you are not using.

Measurement, recording and display will not be done for the skipped channels.

Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)

This function is to be used when measuring temperatures using thermocouples. The voltage

generated by a thermocouple depends on the temperature of the spot of measurement and the

reference junction temperature. Reference junction compensation is a function which

compensates the temperature at the side of the measurement instrument to 0 degrees C.

To compensate for the environmental temperature an internal circuit can be selected, or

compensation by a fixed compensation voltage value (external) can be set.

2-4 IM DR232-01E

Scan Interval

• The duration of time (one scan) in which the measurement of all channels is carried out, is

called the scan interval.

• This interval can be set to any value from 0.5 second to 60 seconds. The shortest is 300 ch/500

ms (varies with the shortest measurement period of the input module).

A/D Integration Time

This instrument measures the input signal after putting it through an A/D converter. In order to

minimize the noise imposed on the input signal, specific integration times exist.

The integration time can be selected from 20ms (50Hz), 16.7ms (60Hz) and 100ms (10Hz).

When “AUTO” is selected, the integration time will be automatically decided according to the 50/

60Hz frequency of the power supply.

AUTO does not function if the instrument is the subunit (DS400/DS600) of the DC power supply

model (Selecting “AUTO” will set the A/D integration time to 20 ms (50 Hz)). If you are using

the instrument on a 60-Hz power supply, set the A/D integration time to 16.7 ms (60Hz).

Input Filter

A filter can be set ON/OFF to reduce normal mode noise. Effects on normal mode noise are as

follows depending on the filter being ON/OFF (theoretical values).

0dB

–20dB

–40dB

–60dB

–80dB

–100dB

1Hz 10Hz 100Hz

50Hz 300Hz

Slope:–20dB/dec

Slope:–60dB/dec

Filter OFF

Filter ON

Frequency

Attenuation

2.2 Measurement Input Functions

2-5

IM DR232-01E

Functions

2.3 Recording Functions

Chart Speed

The speed at which the chart moves when performing trend recording can be selected from any

value between 1 to 1500mm/h.

Two types of chart speeds can be set. When you are not using the Event/Action function, which

will be described later on in this manual, chart speed 1 will be valid. When the Event/Action

function is being used, you can select whether chart speed 1 will change to speed 2 according to

the event status.

Recording Mode

Two types of recording modes are available; analog trend and logging mode. The default setting

is analog trend mode.

Analog Trend Mode (refer to the next page for a recording example)

Trend Recording (Dot recording)

The recording principle is that, according to measurement data and recording conditions, the

correct position on the chart will be decided and on that position the dot will be printed. Trend

recording conditions consist of the following.

• chart speed

• channels to be recorded

• recording color (refer to page 2-8)

• recording interval (refer to page 2-8)

• recording span (refer to page 2-9)

• recording zone (refer to page 2-9)

• partially expanded recording (refer to page 2-10)

• interpolation function (refer to page 2-10)

Digital Printout

Measurement data will be printed as numerical values. Digital printout conditions consist of the

following.

• channels to be recorded

• recording interval (refer to page 2-8)

• the number of channels to be recorded on the same line (refer to page 2-7)

Logging Mode

In this mode measurement data are only printed as numerical values. Logging recording

conditions consist of the following.

• channels to be recorded

• the recording direction (vertical or horizontal)

• recording interval (refer to page 2-8)

2-6 IM DR232-01E

Recording Example

The numbers in parentheses refer to reference pages.

Right margin

Left margin

Header

(Page 2-12)

Digital printout

(Page 2-5)

Starting date/time

of Digital printout

Chart speed

(Page 2-5)

Manual Printout

(Page 2-12)

Starting date/time

of manual printout

Trend recording (Page 2-5)

Channel No. or tag of

dot recording

Channel No. or tag

of manual printout

Alarm occurrence mark

(Page 2-12)

Alarm release mark

(Page 2-12)

Chart speed

(Page 2-5)

Starting time

of dot

recording

(Page 2-7)

Ending time of

previons dot

recording

(Page 2-7) Reference position of

dot recording start

(Page 2-7)

Reference point of scale

(Page 2-7)

Titlle

(Page 2-12)

Message

(Page 2-12)

Scaled value

(Page 2-9)

2.3 Recording Functions

2-7

IM DR232-01E

Functions

Recording Format

You can modify the recording format of measurement values according to your own preferences.

The following selections are available.

Items common for Analog Trend and Logging mode

Printing Channel No. or Tag

When printing measurement values, the corresponding channel number or a preset tag can be

recorded with it. This selection will also affect the display the same way. The number of

characters of a tag which will be printed out, can be selected too.

Items for Analog Trend Mode

Printing Starting/Stopping Time of Recording

You can select whether to print the time of starting/stopping the recording (refer to page 2-9) on

the right side of the chart. The first time recording starts after the power has been turned ON, only

the starting time will be printed. After that, the current starting time will be printed together with

the stopping time of the previous recording. To the right of the starting time a bar will be printed

as a reference point to the time of starting.

Selecting the Number of Columns for Digital Printouts

You can select how many columns (where one column equals data of one channel) will be used in

one line for printing out measurement data.

Selection of the Pitch of Channel Printouts

You can select at which distance the channel numbers (or tags) will be printed. You can also

select this printout OFF. When tags have been selected, this distance applies to the tag printout.

Selection of the Pitch of Title Printouts

You can select at which distances the title will be repeatedly printed. You can also select this

printout OFF.

Selection of the Scaled Values Printout

You can select the printing pattern for scaled values (refer to page 2-9). You can also select this

printout OFF.

Selection of the Reference Point of Scaled Values

You can select whether or not to print a reference point for the positions of the scaled values.

Items for Logging Mode

Selection of the Recording Direction (Horizontal/Vertical)

You can select whether printouts will occur in horizontal or vertical direction,

Example of a printout in horizontal direction

Example of a printout in vertical direction

2.3 Recording Functions

2-8 IM DR232-01E

2.3 Recording Functions

Recording Colors

In the trend recording the color of the recording can be selected per channel. The colors which can

be selected are black, purple, redish purple, navy blue, red, blue, brown, green, orange and

yellowish green.

The recording color of the numerical values in the logging mode is purple only.

Recording Interval

The time during which one scan of trend recording or numerical printout is carried out is called

the recording interval.

Recording interval for trend recording

This recording interval can be selected from AUTO or FIX.

AUTO

The recording interval is decided automatically depending on the measurement (scan) interval

and chart speed in order prevent the dots from overlapping. However, in cases where this

calculation would render the recording interval smaller than the scan interval, the recording

interval will equal the scan interval.

Recording interval = Scan interval × N

where N is an integer satisfying N ≤ 720 / (scan interval × chart speed). 720 is

fixed.

Example: when scan interval is 2s; chart speed is 100mm/h

then N ≤ 720 / (2 × 100) = 3.6

The closest matching integer is 3.

Accordingly, the recording interval becomes 2 × 3 = 6s.

FIX

Recording is carried out at an interval which is the same as the scan interval (2 to 60s)

regardless of the chart speed.

Recording interval for digital printouts

This recording interval can be selected from MULTIPLE or SINGLE

MULTIPLE

Six preset recording intervals (Timer 1 to 6) can be set and a recording interval can be selected

per channel. The timer setting can be selected from relative and absolute.

• Relative time: Time will be counted from the point of turning the power switch ON or of

resetting the timer. Each time the preset length of time is reached (and thus when time is

up), recording will start.

• Absolute time: A reference time is set, and from that time recording will start at preset time

intervals (each time when time is up).

SINGLE

The logging interval is decided automatically depending on the chart speed and the number of

columns for digital printouts.

Recording interval in logging mode

This recording interval can be selected from MULTIPLE or SINGLE

MULTIPLE

Same as for the analog trend mode

SINGLE

From the above mentioned six preset recording intervals, the interval set as Timer 1 will

become the recording interval.

Resetting the Recording Interval (Timer Reset)

This function will reset the elapsed time of the above mentioned MULTIPLE recording interval to

zero. Usually recording will start according to the recording intervals, but when you reset the

elapsed time using this function, the results are the same as for time-up.

2-9

IM DR232-01E

Functions

Recording Span

The maximum value and the minimum value of the measurement range are decided when setting

the type of input. The difference between the minimum value and maximum value which will be

recorded within this measurement range, is called the recording span. The value on the left and

right side of the recording are called the left span and right span respectively.

Starting/Stopping Recording

Usually starting/stopping movement of the chart and trend recording is carried out by pressing the

appropriate key on the operation panel. But movement of the chart and trend recording can also

be started/stopped upon alarm occurrence or by remote control (event/action function).

Recording Method of Trend Recording

Chart movement can start by either key operation or event/action function and selected channels

will thus be recorded as trend recording.

Normal Recording

Selected channels will all be recorded regardless of the below mentioned occurrence/release of

alarms or group settings. Recording will start when the chart starts moving.

Trend Recording upon Alarm Occurrence

• Trigger Recording

All channels where an alarm occurred will be recorded. Even when the alarm is released,

recording will continue.

• Level Recording

All channels where an alarm occurred will be recorded. When the alarm is released, recording

will stop.

Group Trend Recording

Channels can be clustered in a group, and only those channels will be recorded.

Recording Zone

The recording span of measurement values on the chart is called recording zone. For each channel

you can set between what locations on the chart the measurement values will be recorded.

It is possible to assign zones so that the analog trend recordings of each individual channel will

not overlap. This setting is only valid for trend recordings in the analog trend mode. The default

setting is the full recording width of 250mm.

The left and right boundary of the recording zone (left position and right position respectively)

correspond to respectively the left and right span of the recording span.

Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3

Left position of zone 1

(=left span of ch1) Right position of zone 1

(=right span of ch1)

Trend of channel 1 Trend of channel 2 Trend of channel 3

Scale Values

Scale values are used to mark the divisions of zones and three different scale format can be

selected.

2.3 Recording Functions

2-10 IM DR232-01E

Partially Expanded Recording

When carrying out trend recording, partially expanded recording enables you to compress a part

of the recording span in order to examine the expanded (other) part of the span in more detail. The

left boundary of the recording span being 0%, and the right boundary of the recording span being

100%, a segment of the recording span can be compressed. The following example shows a

situation where 25% of the recording span has been compressed. The points A, B, C, D, E and F

before compression correspond to the points A’, B’, C’, D’, E’ and F’ in the figure after

compression. The 25% left of the boundary shows —6 to 0V, whereas the 75% right of the

boundary shows 0 to 6V.

6 (V)

0 50 100

–6–5–4–3–2–1012345

Measurement value

(Recording span)

% of full recording

span

Recording

span

Recording

span

6 (V)

0 25 100

–6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1

Measurement value

(Recording span)

% of full recording

span

A’

B’

C’

E’

F’

012345

D’

(% of compression:RATE)

•Before compressing

•After compressing 25% of recording span

Bounda value

Chart direction

Interpolation Function

When carrying out trend recording and a measurement value differs greatly from the previous

one, the track of the recording changes stepwise in the dot printing. In cases like this,

interpolation will be carried out on the horizontal line to connect the two divergent trend tracks.

When the horizontal lines of channels are to be recorded on exactly the same location, only the

recording color with the higher priority will be used.

The priority of recording colors is black > purple > redish purple > navy blue > red > blue >

brown > green > orange > yellowish green, which means that black has the highest priority. In the

figure below a recording example is given of a horizontal line in the colors black, red and

yellowish green. In the area where red and yellowish green overlap (labeled as a), only red dots

will be recorded, and in the area where black, red and yellowish green overlap (labeled as b), only

black dots will be recorded.

However, at the locations where the recordings diverge after the connecting a horizontal line, all

recording colors will be recorded.

Red Yellowish

green

Black

Chart direction

2.3 Recording Functions

2-11

IM DR232-01E

Functions

List Printout

A list printout will show the following items.

• Title (if a title has been entered)

• Date and time

• Measurement interval, recording interval, chart speed and recording mode

• Timer setting (6 Multiple and Single)

• Match time: a specific time is set and when that time is reached, a preset operation will be

carried out (refer to event/action function on page 2-17)

• Tags for each channel, input type, recording span and linear scaling values (this print can be

selected ON/OFF)

• Alarm (this print can be selected ON/OFF)

• Group setting

• For each individual channel: whether the trend mode is ON/OFF, whether interpolation is ON/

OFF, recording zone settings, partially expanded recording settings, selected Timer No.,

whether moving average is ON/OFF, alarm type and whether manual print is ON/OFF (this

print can be selected ON/OFF)

• Headers (only when input is applied)

• Contents of up to 20 messages

• Settings related to event/action function

• Selections related to this list printout

2.3 Recording Functions

2-12 IM DR232-01E

Manual Printout

One scan of measurement values of selected channels will be recorded as digital values together

with the date and time. This printout can be executed by key operation or by event/action function

(refer to page 2-17). Refer to page 2-6 for a recording example.

Header Printout

A header can consist of up to 80 characters for each to up to 5 lines and recording can be executed

by key operation.

Additional Printouts

While recording analog trends it is possible to have engineering units, tags, scales, alarm, title,

messages, etc. printed along with the measurement values and the date/time.

• Engineering units; these will be printed in combination wiht the linear scaling function (refer to

page 2-16)

• Channel No. or tag; a preset tag can be printed for each channel; the selection whether to print

the channel No. or the tag (refer to page 2-7) can also be done

• Scale printout; values corresponding to the scales will be printed (refer to page 2-9)

• Alarm printout; alarm information (refer to page 2-15) will be printed upon occurrence (or

release) of an alarm. You can also set a message to appear upon occurrence of an alarm

• Title printout; A title of up to 32 characters can be printed. Furthermore, the title can be set to

be printed at regular intervals (refer to title pitch on page 2-7)

• Message printout; Recording of messages of up to 16 characters can be executed by key

operation or event/action function. Time will also be printed together with the message. Up to

20 different messages can be entered.

Set-Up List Printout

Each item as described in Ch. 10 will be printed.

Match Time Function

You can preset a time when you want recording to start/stop using the event/action function (refer

to page 2-12). When this time is reached, recording in the analog trend or logging mode will start/

stop.

2.3 Recording Functions

2-13

IM DR232-01E

Functions

2.4 Alarm Function

This function will show an alarm on the display or generate an alarm output signal when the

measurement conditions of a channel exceed/fall below preset values. Up to four alarms can be

set for each channel. Alarms can be set up to 4 items per channel.

Type of Alarms

Six types of alarms are available, namely high limit alarm, low limit alarm, high limit on rate-of-

change, low limit on rate-of-change, difference high limit and difference low limit.

Interval for Rate-of-Change Alarms

In case of high/low limit on rate-of-change alarms, variation is measured over a preset interval,

and if the variation exceeds a preset value, an alarm occurs. This interval can be set and applies to

all channels.

Measur-

ement

value

Measured

variation

Time

Set interval

Set variation

Time

Measur-

ement

value

Measured variation

T –T

t –t Set interval

t –t

Set variation

T –T

•High limit on rate-of-change •Low limit on rate-of-change

Alarm Hysteresis

You can set the width between the value of alarm occurrence and its release. This setting prevents

frequent alarm occurrences/releases in an unstable environment. Hysteresis values can be set in

the 0-1% percentage range of the recording span. The hysteresis setting is used for high and low

limit alarms.

Set alarm

value

Alarm release

Measurement values

Alarm occurrence

Hysteresis

(Approx. 0.5%)

Measurement values Alarm release

Hysteresis (Approx. 0.5%)

Set alarm

value

Alarm occurrence

•High limit alarm •Low limit alarm

Internal Switches

Sixty internal switches are provided which can be operated upon alarm occurrences. These

switches are only for internal operations and are used in combination with the event/action

function (refer to page 2-17).

Alarm Output Relays

The alarm module or the DI/DO module includes an alarm output relay. The contact of this relay

can be output to the outside. For how to mount modules, see 3.3, “How to Connect Input/Output

Modules” (page 3-7).

2-14 IM DR232-01E

Operation Mode

Energizing/De-energizing Setting

The alarm output relays can be selected to be energized or de-energized on alarm occurrence.

Using de-energizing, the alarm output relay will be activated when the power drops in the same

way as when an alarm occurs. This setting can be done for each relay individually.

Relay contacts in case of energizing

A-contact

NO CNOC

When power is OFF When power is on

and no alarm has

occurred

When power is on

and an alarm has

occurred

NO C

NO CNO C

When power is OFF When power is on

and no alarm has

occurred

When power is on

and an alarm has

occurred

NO C

C-contact

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC

When power is OFF When power is on

and no alarm has

occurred

When power is on

and an alarm has

occurred

Relay contacts in case of de-energizing

NO C NCNO C NC NO C NC

When power is OFF When power is on

and no alarm has

occurred

When power is on

and an alarm has

occurred

AND/OR Setting

When a group of alarms share the same internal switch or alarm output relay, you can select how

the internal switches/alarm output relays will be operated.

AND: will be operated when all alarms are occurring;

OR: will be operated when at least one alarm is occurring.

Alarm occurrence

Channel 1

AND

Channel 2

Alarm output

relay status

Alarm occurrence

Operation

Alarm status

HOLD/NON-HOLD Setting

You can select whether to hold the operating status of operated internal switches or alarm output

relays. This setting applies to both the internal switches and the alarm output relays.

Alarm release

Alarm reset

(Refer to page 2-5)

Alarm status

Operation of

Internal switch/

alarm output

relay

Alarm release

Working

Reflashing Alarm Setting

When several alarms share the same alarm output relay, you can select this setting which results

in a short de-operation of the relay when a second alarm occurs.

Reflash=ON

Reflash=OFF

Alarm status

Alarm output relay

Channel 1

Channel 2

Channel 3

Approx. 200ms Approx. 200ms

Alarm occurrence

Working

Working Working

Working

2.4 Alarm Function

2-15

IM DR232-01E

Functions

Recording Alarm Information

Analog Trend Mode

When an alarm occurs (or releases), the occurrence/release mark, message, channel No. or tag and

time of occurrence/release will be printed on the right side of the chart.

Logging Mode

• If an alarm occurs, the type of alarm will be printed together with the measured value.

• If an alarm occurs (or is canceled), the alarm occurrence/cancellation mark, channel No./TAG,

the type of alarm, time when the alarm occurs/cancels, and messages are printed after all the

measured values.

Displaying Alarm Information

Alarm Indicator

“ALARM” Indicator

When at least one alarm occurs, the “ALARM” indicator at the right of the display will light.

Display per Channel

In sub-display 1 or 2, the alarm statuses of a maximum of 30 channels (according to the

specifications) can be displayed (refer to page 2-1). Besides, when the measurement value of a

channel where an alarm occurred is being displayed, the type of alarm will appear between the

channel number and the measurement value.

Channel No. Type of alarm Measurement value

001 H 10.000mV

Alarm Display Hold Function

This function allows the alarm display to remain even when the alarm has already been released.

This function can be selected ON or OFF and applies to all alarms. When the function is set to

ON, if an alarm occurs, the alarm display flashes.

Alarm Acknowledge Function

This function only resets the display and therefore allows you to verify the current alarm status on

the display. When the alarm display hold function is ON, selecting the ALARM ACK menu

results the alarm display changing from flashing to lit and will turn off when the alarm is released.

This setting applies to all alarms.

Alarm Reset

You can reset the internal switches and alarm output relays and the corresponding displays. The

previously mentioned alarm acknowledge function has the same function as resetting the alarm

display here. Resetting the internal switches and alarm output relays when the relay hold function

is set to ON has the following affects and depends on the alarm status.

• when alarms occur continuously, the internal switches/alarm output relays will turn to their

non-operative status for a short period but soon change into their operation status.

• when alarms are released, the internal switches/alarm output relays turn to their non-operative

status.

2.4 Alarm Function

2-16 IM DR232-01E

2.5 Standard Computation Functions

Standard computations such as difference between channels and linear scaling can be set with

measurement input settings. A moving average computation is also available.

Difference between Channels

This function conputes the difference between the measurement values of a selected channel

(=reference channel) and any other channel (=destination channel). This can be applied to each

channel in the same unit. The computation formula is as follows:

Result of difference between channels computation = measurement value of destination

channel — measurement values of reference channel

Linear Scaling

This function changes the left and right span of the recording span to left and right scale values

which are converted to a different physical quantity. This can be applied to each channel and a

different engineering unit can be entered for display and printouts.

Example where voltage values are cenverted into linear scaling values

Left span:-2V

(=left scale:-0.1A) Right span:2V

(=Right scale:1.1A)

Moving Average

This function computes a moving average over a preset number of (K) measurement values. This

function is useful for displaying and recording of unsteady measurement values. The computation

formula is as follows.

Dm= (Mm-(K-1) + Mm-(K-2) + ... + Mm-2 +Mm-1 + Mm) / K

where

Dm: “m”th average value

Mm-(K-1) : the measurement value of the “K-1”th measurement before the “m”th

measurement

Mm-(K-2) : the measurement value of the “K-2”th measurement before the “m”th

measurement

Mm-2: the measurement value of the second last measurement before the “m”th

measurement

Mm-1: the measurement value of the last measurement before the “m”th measurement

Mm: the measurement value of the “m”th measurement

K : number of samples, and an integer ranging from 2 to 64

At the first computation, the measurement value of the first measurement will be multiplied by

the number of samples, after which the average will be taken. The measurement values of the

second and later measurements will replace these in turn, after which the average will be

calculated each time.

2-17

IM DR232-01E

Functions

2.6 Other Functions

Event/Action Function

Following the occurrence of an event such as remote control signal (12), alarm, internal switch,

chart end signal (out-of-paper), timer, match time or key operation, any of the following actions

can occur.

• Alarm acknowledge

(refer to page 2-15)

• Alarm reset

(refer to page 2-15)

• Timer reset

(refer to page 2-8)

• Recording start/stop

According to the recording mode and recording format, recording will start/stop

• Manual printout

(refer to page 2-12)

• Digital printout

(refer to page 2-6)

• Message printout

(refer to page 2-12)

• Message display

A preset message will be displayed on the main display

• Change of chart speed/recording interval

Chart speed 1 and recording interval 1 will change to chart speed 2 and recording interval 2,

and analog trend and logging recording will be carried out. Usually recording will be carried

out using chart speed 1 (set at the menu displayed after having pressed the CHART key) and

with recording interval 1 (set at the menu displayed after having pressed the SET key at a

touch). Upon the occurrence of an event, recording will be carried out using chart speed 2 and

with recording interval 2 (set at the menu displayed after having pressed the SET key for three

seconds).

• Group trend recording

(refer to page 2-9)

• Saving and reading of measured data, computed data and set-up data

This function is available if the instrument is equipped with a floppy disk drive.

This function enables saving of data to the internal RAM disk or floppy disk and reading of

data into the instrument.

• Starting/stopping of computation, reset, clear, status clear, and group reset

This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function or

equipped with a floppy disk drive.

This function enables starting and stopping of computation and resetting and clearing of

computed data.

• Flag

Valid only for models with mathematical option (/M1.)

Set the flag to 1.

Key-Lock Function

This function prevents alterations by careless key operations. When the key-lock function is

activated, the indicator “KEYLOCK” at the right side of the display will be lit. All key

operations, except power ON/OFF, DISP/MODE key and the cursor, will then be disabled.

However, you can preset whether RECORD/FEED/PRINT/FUNC/M.FUNC1 and M.FUNC2

keys will remain operable even after key-lock has been set. Furthermore, when activating or

releasing the key-lock, a menu for password verification appears to prevent the key-lock to be

used by unauthorized operators.

2-18 IM DR232-01E

External In/Output Function (alarm module or DI/DO module is required)

Alarm Output

This output can be performed from the internal relay in the alarm module or the DI/DO module.

These relays will be operated when an alarm occurs. For details concerning their settings and their

relation with alarms, refer to page 2-14, 2-15.

Fail Output

One transfer contact in the DI/DO module is used for fail output. This relay will change to the de-

energized status when a failure of the recorder occurs.

NO CNC NO CNC NO C NC

Usually In case of failure In case of power OFF

Chart End Output

One transfer contact in the DI/DO module is used for chart end output. When the chart has only

2cm or less paper, the “CHART” indicator at the right of the display will light, and recording will

stop. The relay will change to the energized status.

NO C NC NO CNC NO C NC

Usually In case of Chart end In case of power

OFF

Controlling Recording Functions by Remote Control

The recording functions can be controlled by inputting up to 12 contact signals to the DI/DO

module. You can choose one of the following operations for each of the 12 signals. The remote

control function can be one of the events of the event/action function described on the previous

page.

• Alarm acknowledge

• Alarm reset

• Timer reset

• Recording start/stop

• Manual printout

• Digital printout

• Message printout

• Message display

• Change of chart speed/recording interval

• Group trend recording

2.6 Other Functions

2-19

IM DR232-01E

Functions

Communication Interface (Communication module required)

Either GP-IB interface module, the RS-232-C interface module or RS-422-A/RS-485 interface

module can be connected. For details regarding operation and commands, refer to IMDR231-11E.

Internal Illumination (Option)

Clear internal illumination for easy distinction of traces is available as an option. Internal

illumination will be provided when the power is turned ON.

FDD (DR232-1, DR242-1)

This function enables saving/reading of measured data, computed data and set-up data for SET

mode to/from the internal RAM disk, and saving/reading of set-up data for SET and SETUP

modes to/from a floppy disk.

This also allows you to use events provided by the event/action function as a trigger to save/

retrieve measured/computed data to/from the internal RAM or retrieve set-up data when an event

takes place.

Computation Function (Option)

This function is available if the instrument is equipped with the computation function (/M1

model).

This function executes the following computations, and displays and records the results.

Four arithmetical operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, division), square root, absolute

values, common logarithm, natural logarithm, power, logical product, logical sum, exclusive OR,

logical negation, statistical operation, relational operation

Up to 60 channels can be used for computation. It is also possible to use the event/action function

to start/stop computation or clear data for computation channels. Furthermore, up to 4 levels of

alarm (upper-limit alarm, lower-limit alarm) can be set for computation channels.

RRJC (Remote RJC, available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH

function)

In cases where the object is located in distance for temperature measurement using

thermocouples, the temperature of the object can be measured without using a number of

expensive thermocouples if a junction terminal is installed near the object. This method requires

the object to be connected to the terminal via a thermocouple, and the terminal to this instrument

via copper lead wires. Furthermore, the junction terminal needs to be connected to an input

terminal of this instrument via a thermocouple. The temperature of the junction terminal is then

measured to carry out compensation for the reference contact point used for measurement of

temperature of the object, then finally temperature of the object is measured.

This instrument

Input

terminals

Thermocoupler*

Copper lead wire

Thermocoupler*

Junction terminal

(to be provided by the customer)

Reference channel

* Thermocouplers of the same type must be used

Computing & Report Function (Option)

This function can print the results of a statistical calculation of data on a specified channel

(measurement or computation channel), in a format predetermined for a preset time, date or

month, or send out the results to a communication line. The types of computations are averaging

(mean value, maximum and minimum), instantaneous value calculation and summation (sum,

cumulative sum).

2.6 Other Functions

3-1

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.1 General Precautions for Installation

Safety Precautions

Read the safety precautions

Make sure to read the safety precautions described on page 6 before using the instrument for the

first time.

Do not remove any covers from the instrument

For internal inspection or adjustment, contact your nearesst sales representative. Addresses may

be found on the back cover of this manual.

In case of malfunctioning

Never continue to use the instrument if there are any symptoms of malfunctioning such as unusual

sounds, smell or smoke coming from the instrument. Immediately turn OFF the power and unplug

the power cord. When using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply, immediately turn

OFF the power supply. Also disconnect the power to the equipment under measurement. Contact

your sales representative or nearest service center. Addresses may be found on the back cover of

this manual.

Power Cord

Nothing should be placed on the power cord ; it should also be kept away from any heat sources.

When unplugging the power cord from the outlet, never pull the cord itself. Always hold the plug

and pull it. If the power cord is damaged, contact your dealer for replacement. Refer to page 2 for

the part number when placing an order.

General Handling Precautions

Never place anything on top of the instrument

Never place another instrument or any objects containing water on top of the instrument.

Otherwise a failure may occur.

When moving the instrument

First turn off the power of the equipment being measured and disconnect the measurement

leadwires and the communication cable. Then turn the power switch of this instrument OFF and

unplug the power cord from the outlet. When carrying the instrument, securely hold the

instrument with both arms and take care not to drop it.

Ventilation openings

Do not block the ventilation openings in order not to raise the internal temperature.

Electrically charged objects

Don’t bring electrically charged objects near the input terminals. The internal circuitry might be

damaged.

Chemicals

Do not pour volatile agents on the case nor leave the case in contact with rubber or PVC products

for a long period. The case is made of a thermoplastic resin, so take care not to let anything hot

such as a soldering iron touch the case.

Cleaning

When cleaning the case or any other part of the instrument, first remove the power cord from the

receptacle (and in case of direct connection, disconnect the power lines). Do not use volatile

chemicals since this might result in dis-coloring etc. Always use a dry, soft cloth for cleaning.

When not using the instrument for a long time

When the instrument is not being used for an extensive period of time, unplug the power cord

from the outlet (when using an adapter for direct wiring to the power supply, disconnect the

power cord from the outlet).

3-2 IM DR232-01E

3.2 How to Install

Installation Conditions

The instrument must be installed in a location where the following conditions are met.

Ambient temperature and humidity

• Ambient temperature: 0 to 50°C

However, in case you mount the AC power supply model subunits DS400/DS600 directly to a

panel, or if you apply the DIN rail, or mount them in a rack, it is possible to use them in a range

of –10 to 60°C.

WARNING

• When the environmental temperature is 50°C or more, the temperature

of the rear panel may rise to more than 70°C. Thus, touching the rear

panel under these circumstances has the danger of sustaining burns.

• To prevent a fire, always use the instrument in a vertical position, and

do not block the upper side of the modules (a space of at least 3cm is

necessary).

• Ambient humidity: 20 to 80%RH for –10 to 40°C, 10 to 50%RH for 40 to 50°C, 5 to 30%RH

for 50 to 60°C (However, no condensation should be present.)

• Installation location: Room

• Installation height: Altitude up to 2,000 m

Note

Internal condensation may occur if the instrument is moved to another place where both the ambient

temperature and humidity are higher, or if the temperature changes rapidly. In case of thermocouple input,

this might result in erroneous measurements. In those cases, allow the instrument to achieve eqailibrium

with to its new environment for at least one hour before starting operation.

Never install the instrument in any of the following locations:

• in direct sunlight or near heat sources

• where an excessive amount of soot, steam, dust or corrosive gases are present

• near strong magnetic field sources

• near high voltage equipment or power lines

• where the level of mechanical vibrations is high

• in an unstable place

Installation Method

DR232

Can be used on a desk-top, installed on the floor, or rack-mounted. Always install the instrument

vertically.

• saDesk-top or floor installation

Install the instrument vertically on a horizontal flat floor as shown below.

3-3

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

• Rack mounting

The following fittings can be supplied for rack mounting.

Name Model Description

Rack mount fitting DV400-013 Conforming to ANSI/EIA

• External dimensions and rack mounting dimensions for the DR232 are shown below.

• To install the rack mount fitting on the instrument, remove the screws at the right and left

forward of the instrument and use the mounting screws attached to the rack mount fitting.

Be careful that right and left screws have different lengths. The screw at the right when

facing the front of the instrument is M4 of 20 mm long and the left screw is M4 of 16 mm

long. Appropriate tightening torque is 1.4 to 1.5 N·m (14 to 15 kgf·cm).

• If another instrument is to be mounted under this instrument in an ANSI/EIA rack, remove

the prong or brackets designated with 2 and 3 in the figure below because they may interfere

with both instruments.

30 207 63.6

112

438

266

Rack Mounting Dementions

11.3

482.6±1

265.9±1

190.5±0.537.7

37.7

6.8

Panel face

1&2 : Removed

11.3

265.9±1

190.5±0.5

3.2 How to Install

3-4 IM DR232-01E

DR242

• Panel mounting

Use steel plates 3 mm thick or more for panel mounting.

The external and panel cutting dimensions for the DR242 are shown below. The panel cutting

dimensions include the cutting interval for multiple mounting on the same panel.

The DR242 weighs about 12 kg, so a shelf should be provided to support the DR242 behind the

panel.

Insert the instrument from the front face of the panel.

Insert the blocks of the mounting brackets as accessories into the rectangular holes (after

removing seals) on right and left sides of the instrument, push the brackets toward the rear, and

engage the blocks with rectangular holes.

When a screw attached on each bracket is turned clockwise, the entire brackets are pushed

against the panel rear. Tighten the screws to securely fix the instrument to the panel. Proper

screw-tightening torque is 0.8 to 1.2 N·m (8 to 12 kgf·cm).

The brackets can be used for panels of 3 to 26 mm thick.

288

444

Panel cutting dimensions

At least 80 mm

At least 520 mm

281

425

40 203 64.8

280

3.2 How to Install

3-5

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

DS400/DS600

The subunit DS400/DS600 can be used on a desk-top, installed on the floor, directly panel-

mounted, mounted on DIN rails, or rack-mounted. Always mount the instrument vertically. If

the power terminals of the unit are screw terminals, directly mount the unit on the panel to

prevent electric shock.

• Desk-top use or installed on the floor

Extend the legs on the bottom of the unit forward as shown below and place the unit vertically.

If the unit could fall when wired, use the through-holes of the legs to fix the legs with the

attached four 4-mm screws.

Legs

M4 screws

• Direct panel mounting

Following the figure below, fix the unit at six places using the attached screws (length: 16 mm).

M4 screws

• Mounting on DIN rails

For the mounting procedure, see the instruction manual for “DIN rail mounting fitting.”

3.2 How to Install

3-6 IM DR232-01E

• Rack mounting

The following fittings are supplied for rack mounting. For details of the mounting procedure,

see the instruction manual for “rack mounting fitting.”

Name Model Description

Rack mounting fitting DV400-011 For DS400/DS600 conforming to ANSI/EIA

3.2 How to Install

3-7

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.3 How to Connect the Input/Output Modules

WARNING

When connecting the Input/Output modules, make sure to turn OFF the

power to the DR232/DR242/DS400/DS600 to prevent an electric shock

or damage to the instrument.

Setting the Unit Number of each Subunit

When connecting subunits to the DR232/DR242, it is necessary to assign a distinctive unit-

number to each subunit. This number can be selected from 0 to 5 (the setting 6 and up will not be

recognized) and is set, as shown in the figure below, by a setting switch (rotary dipswitch).

Note

When you connect an input module at the location of the setting switch, the switch can not be operated

anymore. Therefore, make sure you set the switch before connecting any input module there.

It is convenient for confirming unit numbers to write each unit number setting on the gray concave surface

at the top of DS600 subunit (or on the left side of DS400 subunit).

Connecting Method

1. Verify that the power to the DR232/DR242/DS400/DS600 has been turned OFF.

2. Remove the cover of the location where the module will be connected. Do not remove any

cover of locations where no module will be connected.

3. Hold the input unit so that the male part of the connector at the back side of the input unit

matches the female part of the receiving connector. Then connect the unit.

4. Fasten the input unit by fastening the two accessory M3 screws.

Module connector

Screws to fasten the module

Input

module

Switch for setting

the unit number

• Switch for setting the

unit number

(settable from 0 to 5)

Cover

Modules Which Can be Used

Not more than one DI/DO module can be connected to all units.

• Main unit DR232/DR242

Alarm module, DI/DO module, and communication interface module.

(Note: The input module cannot be connected.)

Number of modules that can be connected: 1

• Subunit DS400/DS600

Input module, alarm module, and DI/DO module.

Number of modules that Dqn be connected: 4 for DS400, 6 for DS600 (up to 300)

DS400: Input module + alarm module + DI/DO module: max. four

DS600: Input module + alarm module + DI/DO module: max. six

Note

• No alarm module or DI/DO module can be connected to the right side of an input module, since the rise

in temperature would hinder the measurement accuracy. Verify the type of module by the seal on the top

side.

• Do not connect the universal input module and the power monitor module in slots next to eachother.

Keep them at least 1 slot apart. If you mount the power module immediately beside the universal

module, the measuring accuracy of the universal module may fall out of its guaranteed range because of

the heat radiating from the power module.

3-8 IM DR232-01E

Location and Location Number (Channel Number, Alarm Output Relay Number, DI/DO

Number)

The location numbers correspond to channel numbers for locations where the input module is

connected, to alarm output numbers for locations where the alarm module is connected, and to DI/

DO numbers for locations where the DI/DO module is connected.

Modules are mounted on a unit in slots. The number of each module is the same as that of the

slot.

As shown below, input/output location numbers are assigned related to the unit number (see the

previous page; the main unit number is fixed at I) and module location.

Module 0 (Location numbers:001 to 010)

Module 1 (Location numbers:011 to 020)

Module 2 (Location numbers:021 to 030)

Module 3 (Location numbers:031 to 040)

Module 4 (Location numbers:041 to 050)

Module 5 (Location numbers:051 to 060)

Unit No.:0

Subunit DS600

Module 0 (Location numbers:101 to 110)

Module 1 (Location numbers:111 to 120)

Module 2 (Location numbers:121 to 130)

Module 3 (Location numbers:131 to 140)

Unit No.:1

Subunit DS400

Module 0 (Location numbers:101 to I10)

Unit No.:I

Main unit DR232/DR242

Input modules cannot be

connected.

Note

When the following handling is done, it is necessary to carry out “system construction” to operate the

instrument correctly. After executing system construction, confirm the module information. For details,

see page 9-16.

· Connection (including addition or replacement)/removal of subunits, or unit number setting (see page 3-

· Mounting (including addition or replacement)/removal of modules

3.3 How to Connect the Input/Output Modules

3-9

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette

Install the chart.

Preparing the Chart

1. To prevent double feed of the folded chart, sufficiently ruffle and fan the chart on both folded

side ends.

Note

• Use chart papers specified by Yokogawa (part number: B9627RY or B9627AY). Using chart papers

other than those specified may cause problems such as large recording errors or the paper getting caught

under the sprocket.

Preparing the Chart Cassette

2. Open the front door and draw out the chart cassette from inside of the main unit by pulling

forward the chart cassette pressers while simultaneously pushing them (both right and left

pressers) toward the center.

Chart cassette

Chart cassette presser

3. Open the chart pressure plate 1 by pulling the right and left lever of the chart pressure

plate 1.

Chart pressure plate 1

Chart cassette

Lever of chart

pressure plate 1

4. Open upward the chart pressure plate 2 by simultaneously pushing the right and left latch

release buttons of the chart pressure plate 2.

Chart pressure plate 2

Latch release button of

chart pressure plate 2

Platen

Sprocket

3-10 IM DR232-01E

Loading the Chart Paper

5. Place the chart paper in the chart storage housing, and move the paper to the left. Position the

chart so that its round perforations are on the left and the recording surface faces upward when

the chart paper is wound around the platen.

Chart paper

Chart pressure plate 2

Chart storage housing

Platen

6. Pass the chart paper through the gap between the chart pressure plate 1 and the platen.

Chart paper

Chart pressure plate 1

Guide pin

Chart rest cover

Sprocket

Right and left

position mark

Fold line of chart paper

7. Align the right and left chart paper perforations. Set the chart paper so that the right and left

marks of the sprockets and the fold line are aligned.

8. Close the chart pressure plate 1 until it latches. Confirm that the horizontal lines of the chart

paper are parallel with the horizontal line of the chart pressure plate 1. If they are not parallel,

open the chart pressure plate 1 and align the right and left perforations again.

9. Close the chart pressure plate 2 until it latches.

10.Fitting the guide pin of the chart cassette in the main unit guide groove, place the chart cassette

on the bottom of the main unit and slide the cassette deep inside the main unit until the latch

engages.

11.Turn on the power of the main unit and feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the

operation panel. Feed the chart paper by three folds or more to the chart paper rest and check

that the paper is fed properly. Check this in the same way when the chart paper is fed manually

without recording. If the chart paper is not fed properly, repeat the procedure from step 2. For

details of turning the power on, see page 3-31.

12.When the chart paper approaches the end, the words “RENEW CHART” in an scarlet strip on

the paper appear. Prepare a new set of chart paper.

13.When the letters “CHART” in the status indicator in the display light, it indicates that the

paper has run out. Replace the chart with a new one according to the above procedure.

*To remove the chart paper from the chart rest, open the chart rest cover and take out the paper.

3.4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette

3-11

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Loading the Ribbon Cassette

Preliminary Preparation

• If the carriage to which the ribbon cassette is to be mounted is located near the right end, turn

off the power and bring the carriage to a location near the left end by turning the screw shaft,

then load the ribbon cassette.

• Set the RECORD key on the operation panel to OFF and set all the recording actions for the

event/action functions (see page 9-1) to OFF so that recording does not start while loading the

ribbon cassette. If applicable, turn off the power.

Note

Do not perform recording without the ribbon cassette loaded, otherwise the platen may be scratched or the

chart paper may break.

Load the Ribbon Cassette in the DR232.

1. Open the front door and remove the chart cassette cassette from the main unit.

2. Press the red lever at the bottom of the carriage. The ribbon cassette holder moves to the right.

Red lever

Screw shaft

Ribbon cassette holder

3. Touch the ribbon cassette holder with a finger and tilt the housing downward.

4. Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) to take

up the ribbon slack.

5. Fit the projection of the housing into the slot of the ribbon cassette and insert the cassette fully

into the holder.

6. Bring up the front part of the cassette until it latches and make sure it is horizontal.

3.4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette

3-12 IM DR232-01E

7. Push the ribbon cassette to the left until the latch engages. Check that the three white lines of

the printer head are not visible when viewed from the front. If the white lines can be seen, the

ribbon cassette is not properly loaded. Push the cassette to the left again.

8. Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob once more in the direction of the arrow

(counterclockwise) to take up the ribbon slack.

9. Return the chart cassette to the main unit.

10.Feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel to prevent a delay in

starting the chart paper feed.

Note

• Check that the ribbon cassette is properly loaded in the carriage.

• If a ribbon cassette is used for a long time, the ribbon may become wavy and move out of the dot printing

range of the printer head. If this happens, replace the ribbon with a new one.

Load the Ribbon Cassette into the DR242.

1. Open the front door and open the display door. The ribbon cassette can be loaded without

removing the chart cassette from the main unit.

2. When the chart cassette is removed, press the red lever 1 at the bottom of the carriage. When

the chart cassette is not removed, pull forward the red lever 2, then the ribbon cassette holder

moves to the right.

Red lever 1

Red lever 2 Ribbon cassette holder

3. Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) to take

up the ribbon slack.

4. Fit the projection of the holder into the slot of the ribbon cassette and insert the cassette fully

into the holder.

3.4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette

3-13

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

5. Push the ribbon cassette to the left until the latch engages. Check that the three white lines of

the printer head are not visible when viewed from the front. If the white lines can be seen, the

ribbon cassette is not properly loaded. Push the cassette to the left again.

6. Turn the ribbon cassette rotating knob once more in the direction of the arrow

(counterclockwise) to take up the ribbon slack.

7. Feed the chart paper by pressing the FEED key on the operation panel to prevent a delay in

starting the chart paper feed.

Note

• Check that the ribbon cassette is properly loaded in the carriage.

• If a ribbon cassette is used for a long time, the ribbon may become wavy and move out of the dot printing

range of the printer head. If this happens, replace the ribbon with a new one.

3.4 Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette

3-14 IM DR232-01E

3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables

When connecting a personal computer to the instrument via a communication interface, observe

the following:

GP-IB

The GP-IB connector of the GP-IB communication module is a 24-pin connector of IEEE St’d

488-1978. Only use cables that conform to IEEE St’d 488-1978 as a communication cable.

Connection Procedure

Connect the cable as shown in the figure below.

GP-IB module

Ferrite core

Personal

computer Ferrite core

Function

grounding

terminal

•When connecting the cable, take note of the following.

• To reduce noise, use two ferrite cores (e.g., ZCAT 3035-1330 from TDK) at both ends of the

interface cable as shown above.

• Securely tighten the screws which fasten the GP-IB cable connector.

• If more than one equipment is connected, the same addresses cannot be assigned to different

equipment.

• Use only cables of 2 m or less to interconnect each equipment.

How to Assign an Address

The address can be assigned easily by turning the rotary dipswitch as shown in the figure below.

Any address can be set from “0” to “15”; the characters “A” to “F” on the dipswitch correspond to

the address “10” to “15” respectively.

3-15

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

RS-232-C

Communication Settings

Communication parameters are set using the three switches located on the RS-232-C modules.

1234

Switch 1

Data length

Baud rate

1234

Switch 2

Not used

Parity

Stop bit

1234

Switch 3

Not used

Handshake format

OFF

Switch 1 and No.4 of switch 2

Baudrate dipswitch No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4 (Switch 2)

150 OFF OFF OFF OFF

300 OFF OFF ON OFF

600 OFF ON OFF OFF

1200 OFF ON ON OFF

2400 ON OFF OFF OFF

4800 ON OFF ON OFF

9600 ON ON OFF OFF ←initial value

19200 ON ON ON OFF

38400 OFF OFF OFF ON

Data length dipswitch No.4

7 OFF

8ON←initial value

Switch 2

Parity dipswitch No.1 No.2

NONE OFF OFF

ODD OFF ON

EVEN ON OFF ←initial value

Stop bit dipswitch No.3

1 OFF ←initial value

2ON

Switch 3

Handshake format dipswitch No.1 No.2 No.3

no handshake OFF OFF OFF ←initial value

XON-DTR* OFF OFF ON

XON-RTS* OFF ON OFF

CTS-DTR OFF ON ON

CTS-RTS ON OFF OFF

* When the baud rate is set to 38400, there is no handshake.

Note

When you are using the accessory standard software, the settings should be as follows: baud rate 2400 to

19200bps, data length: 8 bit, parity: ODD, stop bit: 1.

3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables

3-16 IM DR232-01E

Connecting the RS-232-C cable

For details on connecting the RS-232-C connector of the RS-232-C communication interface

module to a personal computer, see IM DR231-11E, “DR231/DR232/DR241/DR242

Communication Interface User’s Manual.”

CAUTION

When (dis)connecting the RS-232-C cable, turn OFF the power of both

the personal computer and the instrument. If the power is not turned

OFF, malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be

damaged.

Note

To reduce noise, use ferrite cores (e.g., ZCAT 3035-1330 from TDK) for the interface cable as shown

below. Two ferrite cores should be installed near both ends of the interface cable. If the noise is

particularly bad, use several ferrite cores in series. Use a shielded cable for the interface cable and make a

one-point grounding at the ground terminal of this instrument together with the functional-ground terminal

of the personal computer.

Personal

computer Ferrite core

Function

grounding

terminal

RS-422-A/RS-485

1234

SW1

Data length

Baud rate

OFF

1234

SW2

four-wire/two-wire

Stop bit

Parity

OFF

1234

SW3

Address (upper)

Minimum response time

OFF

1234

SW4

Address (lower)

OFF

Baud rate (No.1 to 3 of SW1)

Baud rate No.1 No.2 No.3

300 OFF OFF ON

600 OFF ON OFF

1200 OFF ON ON

2400 ON OFF OFF

4800 ON OFF ON

9600 ON ON OFF ←Default Setting

19200 ON ON ON

38400 OFF OFF OFF

Data length (No.4 of SW1)

Data length No.4

7 OFF

8ON←Default Setting

3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables

3-17

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Parity (No.1 to 2 of SW2)

Parity No.1 No.2

None OFF OFF

ODD OFF ON

EVEN ON OFF ←Default Setting

Stop bit (No.3 of SW2)

Stop bit No.3

1 OFF ←Default Setting

2ON

Switch between four-wire/two-wire systems (No.4 of SW2)

four-wire/two-wire No.4

four-wire OFF ←Default Setting

two-wire ON

Minimum response time (No.1 to 3 of SW3)

Minimum response time No.1 No.2 No.3

0ms OFF OFF OFF ←Default Setting

10ms OFF OFF ON

20ms OFF ON OFF

50ms OFF ON ON

100ms ON OFF OFF

Address (No.4 of SW3 and No.1 to 4 of SW4)

Address No.4(SW3) No.1(SW4) No.2(SW4) No.3(SW4) No.4(SW4)

1 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ←Default Setting

2 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

3 OFF OFF OFF ON ON

4 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF

5 OFF OFF ON OFF ON

6 OFF OFF ON ON OFF

7 OFF OFF ON ON ON

8 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

9 OFF ON OFF OFF ON

10 OFF ON OFF ON OFF

11 OFF ON OFF ON ON

12 OFF ON ON OFF OFF

13 OFF ON ON OFF ON

14 OFF ON ON ON OFF

15 OFF ON ON ON ON

16 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF

17 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

18 ON OFF OFF ON OFF

19 ON OFF OFF ON ON

20 ON OFF ON OFF OFF

21 ON OFF ON OFF ON

22 ON OFF ON ON OFF

23 ON OFF ON ON ON

24 ON ON OFF OFF OFF

25 ON ON OFF OFF ON

26 ON ON OFF ON OFF

27 ON ON OFF ON ON

28 ON ON ON OFF OFF

29 ON ON ON OFF ON

30 ON ON ON ON OFF

31 ON ON ON ON ON

3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables

3-18 IM DR232-01E

3.5 Connecting the Interface Cables

For details on connectin the RS-422-A/RS-485 connector of the RS-422-A/RS-485

communication interface module to a personal computer, see IM DR231-11E, “DR231/DR232/

DR241/DR242 Communication Interface User’s Manual.”

CAUTION

When (dis) connecting the RS-422-A/RS-485 cable, turn OFF the power

of both the personal computer and the instrument. If the power is not

turned OFF, malfunctions may occur and the internal circuitry may be

damaged.

Ethernet

Tx (yellow)

)

LINK (yellow)

STS1 (green)

STS2 (green)

Status

Indicator LED

Dip Switch

1234

OFF

10BASE-T Port

Connect the RJ-45 modular jack

of the twist pair cable connected

to the 10BASE-T network.

You can select the following three modes by setting the dip switch.

Configuration mode: A mode in which the IP address, subnet mask, and default gateway are set

for the DR.

Test mode: A mode in which the condition of the physical connection is tested.

Communication mode: A mode in which the DR is connected to the network to carry out

communication. Use this mode to read in the DR measurement data with

the PC.

In addition, you can turn ON/OFF the Keepalive function.

Mode Setting

Mode Switch 1 Switch 2

Configuration mode ON OFF

Test mode OFF ON

Communication mode OFF OFF ←Default Setting

Do not set both dip switches, 1 and 2, to ON.

Keepalive Setting

Keepalive Switch 3

Enable ON

Disable OFF ←Default Setting

Keepalive is a function supported by TCP. It sends packets at constant time intervals and

automatically disconnects when there is no corresponding response. This instrument sends

packets at 30-second time intervals. If a response is not received, it sends 4 more packets at one-

second intervals. If a response is still not received, the connection is dropped.

Have dip switch 4 turned OFF.

3-19

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.6 Connecting the Extension Cables-

Extension Cables

Any of the following extension cables can be used for connections between the DA100 main unit

and subunits or for connections between subunits.

Name Model Description

Extension cable DV200-000 Length: 0.5m

Extension cable DV200-001 Length: 1m

Extension cable DV200-002 Length: 2m

Extension cable DV200-005 Length: 5m

Extension cable DV200-010 Length: 10m

Extension cable DV200-020 Length: 20m

Extension cable DV200-050 Length: 50m

Extension cable DV200-100 Length: 100m

Extension cable DV200-200 Length: 200m

Extension cable DV200-300 Length: 300m

Extension cable DV200-400 Length: 400m

Extension cable DV200-500 Length: 500m

Connecting Procedure

Insert the plug of the extension cable in the connector until you hear a click. Since both

connectors are identical, it makes no difference which connector you use. Furthermore, since both

plugs of the cable are identical, you may use either end.

When pulling the plug from the connector, gently press the peg of the plug and pull it forward.

Lid

Plug

Extension cable

Note

When the following handling is done, it is necessary to carry out “system construction” to operate the

instrument correctly. After executing system construction, confirm the module information. For details,

see page 9-16.

• Connection (including addition or replacement)/removal of subunits, or unit number setting (see page 3-

• Mounting (including addition or replacement)/removal of modules

Points to Note when Using the Extension Cables

• The maximum rated temperature is 60°C;

• Never disconnect the extension cable from the connector by pulling the cable, since this might

damage the signal cable. Always hold the plug.

• When wiring the extension cable through a cable duct, or metal pipe or such, protect the peg on

top of the plug by covering it with tape.

• For extension cables of longer than 50 m connect the plug with copper foil directed towards the

main unit DA100. Applying it in reverse direction might increase noise.

• Fasten the cabels in such a way that no force is applied to the connector or the plug.

• To prevent the wire from snapping, etc. do no apply a tensile force of more than 70N.

Furthermore, do not bend the cable in a radius of 3 centimeters or less.

• For the environmental conditions for wiring, refer to Section 3.11, “Countering Noise” (page 3-

35).

Note

When several sub-units are connected, and the power is turned off of one of them, the other connected sub-

units which are further away from the main unit will not be recognized anymore.

3-20 IM DR232-01E

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

WWARNING

• To prevent electric shock, always make sure that the power supply is

turned OFF before connecting.

• When 30VAC or 60VDC and more is applied to the output terminal of the alarm

module or the output terminal of the DI/DO module, use double-insulated

wires(withstand voltage performance: more than 2300VAC) for those wires

which apply 30VAC or 60VDC and more. All other wires can be basic-

insulated(withstand voltage performance: more than 1350VAC). Furthermore,

use “crimp-on” lugs (for 4mm screws) with insulation sleeves for connecting to

the screw terminal. Make sure that the crimp-on tool must be one specified by

the crimp-on lugs manufacture, and that the crimp-on lugs and tool must be

matched to the wire size. To prevent electric shock, do not touch the terminal

after wiring and make sure to re-apply the cover.

CAUTION

• Do not apply an input voltage exceeding the following levels to each

terminal of the universal or DCV/TC/DI input module. Otherwise, the

internal circuits may be damaged.

• Max. allowable input voltage

2 VDC range or less, RTD, TC and DI (CONT): ±10 VDC

6 to 20 VDC range, DI (LEVEL): ±60 VDC

• Max. common mode noise voltage : 250 VACrms (50/60Hz)

For the maximum voltage of the remote control signal input, see “DI:

remote control of recorder functions” on page 14-14.

• The overvoltage category of each input module is CAT ll (IEC 1010-1).

1 Check that the power switch of this instrument is turned off.

2 Remove the terminal cover. (the figure below shows DU100-11.)

Terminal cover

Screws for fastenin

the cover

3 Fasten the signal wires to the terminals as shown in the figure on the next page.

4 Re-apply the terminal cover and fasten the screws.

Note

Make sure that the equipment connected to the signal in-/output conforms IEC (CSA) 950 or IEC (CSA)

1010. Also, make sure to use cables that conform to IEC (CSA) standards.

In case you are using an internal RJC in case of thermocouple input, the following considerations are

necessary to stabilize the temperature at the terminals. Always make sure to re-apply the terminal cover;

The thermal capacity of the wiring should be small (cross sectional area of less than 0.5mm2); Minimize

outside temperature fluctuations as much as possible.

To prevent noise, make sure to ground each unit at the grounding function terminal (below the power

switch) together at one point.

Refrain from wiring the input signals parallel. However, if you do, then the following considerations are

necessary. Ground all equipment at the same point; Do not turn the power of other equipment ON/OFF

during operation; Do not use the burnout function.

3-21

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Wiring Input Signal Lines (to Universal, DCV/TC/DI, and Digital input modules)

Terminals

Screw type terminal Clamp type terminal*2

DC voltage • TC •

contact

RTD*1

CH1

CH2

CH10

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH9CH10

*1 There are no RTD

input terminals on

the DCV/TC/DI and

Digital input module.

*2 There is no clamp

type terminal for

Digital input module.

Wiring Diagram

DC voltage input

Compensation lead

DC current input

Shunt resistor

Note:For 4 to 20mA input, shunt

resistance value should

be 250Ω ±0.1%

10Ω* max./leadwire

Three wire resistances

should be approx. equal.

*10Ω max. for Pt100Ω and

Pt50Ω, 1Ω max. for Cu10Ω.

DC input

RTD inputTC input

DC voltage input/DI input (contact)

bAB

+-+-

Wiring DC-current Input Signal Lines (mA-input Module)

Diagrams of Terminal Block and Wiring

Model with Screw Terminals Model with Clamp Terminals

–

CH1

CH2

CH10

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH9

CH10

DC-current input

–

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

3-22 IM DR232-01E

Wiring AC Input Signal Lines (Power Monitor Module)

WARNING

• For hazard prevention, ALWAYS provide protective grounding before

connecting measuring leadwires.

• When connecting any object being measured, ALWAYS turn off the

power to the object. It is extremely dangerous to connect or disconnect

interconnecting leadwires with the power to the object left on.

• Exercise utmost care to avoid connecting any current-mode circuit to a

voltage-input terminal or any voltage-mode circuit to a current-input

terminal. Wrong connection may result in damage to the circuit or

equipment being measured or the DR232 or DR242 recorder itself, as

well as bodily injury.

• Fuses are not built into voltage- and current-input terminals. ALWAYS

install a fuse on the interconnecting leadwire. Use a fuse that will not

permit the voltage or current being measured to exceed the maximum

ratings of an AC input module.

The maximum voltage and current that can continuously be imposed on

an AC input module are as follows:

Voltage: 250 Vrms; current: 5 Arms

• To avoid electrical shock, ALWAYS attach the terminal cover in place

after the completion of wiring to the terminals so that the terminals

cannot be accidentally touched.

CAUTION

• In wiring, use double-insulated leadwires that have sufficient

withstanding-voltage and current-carrying-capacity margins against the

voltage and current being measured and meet the ratings at which they

are used.

• ALWAYS clamp measuring leadwires with the wire clips to prevent the

wires from being disconnected from their terminals. As the measuring

leadwires, use wires 0.2 to 2.5 mm2 (AWG14 to 25) thick so they can

be fastened securely with the wire clips.

• The power monitor module is a product belonging to Installation (Over-

voltage) Category CAT II.

Diagram of Terminal Block

Wire clip

Single-phase Model Three-phase Model

Wire clip

9mm

• Strip 9 mm of insulation off the leadwire.

• ALWAYS clamp the leadwire with the wire

clip.

• The recommended torque for fastening the

wire clip screw is 0.4 to 0.5 N•m.

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

3-23

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Wiring Diagrams

• Single-phase Two-wire Configuration

LOAD

A±

SOURCE

SOURCE LOAD

FUSE

• Single-phase Three-wire Configuration (power monitor modules for three-phase

use only)

SOURCE

LOAD

SOURCE LOAD

FUSE FUSE

FUSE

• Three-phase Three-wire Configuration (dual-current/dual-voltage measurement;

power monitor modules for three-phase use only)

SOURCE

LOAD

SOURCE LOAD

FUSE FUSE

FUSE

• Three-phase Three-wire Configuration (triple-current/triple-voltage

measurement; power monitor modules for three-phase use only)

SOURCE

LOAD

SOURCE LOAD

FUSE FUSE

FUSE

• Three-phase Four-wire Configuration (power monitor modules for three-phase

use only)

SOURCE

LOAD

SOURCE

FUSEFUSEFUSE

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

3-24 IM DR232-01E

Wiring Strain Input Signal Lines

Please apply the optional DV450-001 strain conversion cable when using a bridge box or strain

gage without sensor line.

Wiring Diagrams

Model with Built-in Bridge Model with External Bridge Resistors

CH2

CH3

CH5

CH7

CH9

CH1

CH4

CH6

CH8

CH10

Jumper setup switches

CH1

CH3

CH5

CH7

CH9

CH2

CH4

CH6

CH8

CH10

NDI terminal

Wiring Diagrams

• Single-gauge method

OFF

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.5

A(+)

B(L)

C(-V)

D(H)

DU500-12/DU500-13

Jumper setup switch DU500-14

No.1

ON No.2

ON No.3

ON No.4

OFF No.5

OFF

R = fixed resistor

r = resistance of leadwire

Rg = resistance of strain gauge

e = output voltage developed across bridge

E = voltage imposed across bridge

12 3 4

5678

• Single-gauge three-wire method

R = fixed resistor

r = resistance of leadwire

Rg = resistance of strain gauge

e = output voltage developed across bridge

E = voltage imposed across bridge

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

3-25

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Jumper setup switch

DU500-12/DU500-13 DU500-14

OFF

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.5

A(+)

B(L)

C(-V)

D(H)

No.1

ON No.2

ON No.3

OFF No.4

ON No.5

OFF

Rg 12 3 4

5678

• Adjacent-side two-gauge method

Jumper setup switch

DU500-12/DU500-13 DU500-14

OFF

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.5

A(+)

B(L)

C(-V)

D(H)

No.1

ON No.2

ON No.3

OFF No.4

OFF No.5

Rg1

Rg2

eRg1 Rg2

Rg1

Rg2

R = fixed resistor

r = resistance of leadwire

Rg = resistance of strain gauge

e = output voltage developed across bridge

E = voltage imposed across bridge

12 3 4

5678

Rg2

Rg1

• Opposed-side two-gauge method

Jumper setup switch

DU500-12/DU500-13 DU500-14

OFF

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.5

A(+)

B(L)

C(-V)

D(H)

No.1

ON No.2

OFF No.3

ON No.4

OFF No.5

Rg1

Rg2

Rg1

Rg2

R = fixed resistor

r = resistance of leadwire

Rg = resistance of strain gauge

e = output voltage developed across bridge

E = voltage imposed across bridge

1234

678

Rg2

Rg1

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

3-26 IM DR232-01E

• Four-gauge method

Jumper setup switch

DU500-12/DU500-13 DU500-14

OFF

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.5

A(+)

B(L)

C(-V)

D(H)

No.1

OFF No.2

OFF No.3

OFF No.4

OFF No.5

Rg1

Rg2

Rg4

Rg1 Rg2

Rg3

Rg1, Rg3

Rg2, Rg4

Rg1

Rg3

Rg1

Rg3 Rg4

Rg2

Rg1, Rg2 Rg3 Rg4

Rg3

Rg4

R = fixed resistor

r = resistance of leadwire

Rg = resistance of strain gauge

e = output voltage developed across bridge

E = voltage imposed across bridge

12 3 4

5678

Rg2

Rg1

Rg3Rg4

Wiring Pulse Input Signal Lines (to Pulse Input Module)

-+ -+

Open collector

TTL open collector

Contact

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

Wiring Output Signal and Remote Control Signal Lines (to DI/DO and Alarm modules)

Terminals

NO CNC

Failure output (transfer-contact)

REM

CHART

FAIL

ALM

Chart end output (transfer-contact)

Remote control signal input

(12 contact terminals)

Terminal arrangement

2ALM output

(transfer-contact)

NO C

Alarm output

(transfer contact)

Alarm output

(transfer contact)

DT200-11DT100-11 NO C

Alarm

output

(make

contact)

DT200-21

Output contact rating: 250 V DC/0.1 A (resistive load), 250 V AC/2A (resistive load), 30 V DC/

2A (resistive load)

3.7 Connecting the Signal Lines

3-27

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.8 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension

Bases

Using an extension module and extension bases, you can install input modules at a location

distant from the sub-unit(s). The module and bases are powered from the sub-unit and, therefore,

can be located even in a place where there is no power source nearby.

Installing an Extension Base

WARNING

• For fire prevention, use extension bases in an upright position.

Do not cover up the extension base's module (allow a clearance of at

least 3 cm around the module).

Ambient Temperature and Humidity

Use an extension base under the following environmental conditions:

• Ambient temperature: –10˚ to 60˚C

• Ambient humidity: 20 to 80% RH at -10˚ to 40˚C

10 to 50% RH at 40˚ to 50˚C

5 to 30% RH at 50˚ to 60˚C

Use the extension base in a condensation-free condition.

Note

Condensation may occur if you move the extension base from an area of low humidity to an area of high

humidity or if any drastic temperature variation takes place. In addition, a measurement error will result if

the DR recorder is in the thermocouple input mode. In that case, allow at least one hour for the extension

base to adjust to the ambient atmosphere before using it.

Do not install the extension base where:

• it is exposed to direct sunlight or there is a heat source nearby;

• soot, steam, dust and/or corrosive gas is relatively abundant;

• there is a strong electromagnetic source nearby;

• there is high-voltage equipment or a power line nearby;

• it is exposed to severe and/or frequent mechanical vibration; or

• it is not positioned stably.

Desk-top or Floor Installation

Attach the two supplied shoe plates onto the extension base with two screws (4-mm screws 16

mm long, supplied as standard accessories), as shown in the figure on the left below. Then, place

the extension base in an upright position. If the base is liable to fall on its side after wiring, fix

the shoe plates with the four supplied screws (4-mm screws 12 mm long) using the through-holes

(for 4-mm screws) of the shoe plates.

Direct Mounting on Panel

According to the figure on the right below, fix the extension base onto a panel by fastening the

four corners with the supplied screws (4-mm screws 12 mm long).

3-28 IM DR232-01E

Connecting Extension Bases to an Extension Module

Verify that the power of the DR/DS400/DS600 has been turned off before connecting the

extension module/extention base.

Mount the extension module onto the sub-unit. The module cannot be mounted to the DR

recorder itself. Wire the extension module to the extension base with an extension cable. You

can wire a maximum of three extension bases to one extension module at the same time. It is not

possible, however, to wire extension bases in such a manner that the total sum of modules already

mounted on the sub-unit and the extension bases being wired exceeds the maximum number of

modules (four for the DS400 sub-unit and six for the DS600 sub-unit) allowed for mounting on

the sub-unit.

Either a 10-channel universal input module (DU100-11 or DU100-12) or a 10-channel DCV/TC/

DI module (DU200-11 or DU200-12) can be mounted onto each extension base.

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

CH10

b -/B +/A

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

CH10

b -/B +/A

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

CH10

b -/B +/A

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

CH10

b -/B +/A

POWER

STATUS

100-240V 50/60Hz 70VA MAX

SUB UNIT

EXTENDER I/F

I/F

POWER ADDRESS TERMN

OFF

I/F

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

CH10

b -/B +/A

POWER ADDRESS TERMN

OFF

I/F

CH 1

CH 2

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

CH 6

CH 7

CH 8

CH 9

CH10

b -/B +/A

Extension module (DV100-011)

Sub-unit (DS400/600)

Extension

cable

Extension cable

Extension base (DV100-012)

Terminator on/off switch

Set this switch to ON for the last extension

base in the connection.

Slot number setup switch

Select an unused slot number.

Either a 10-channel universal input module

(DU100-11 or DU100-12) or a 10-channel

DCV/TC/DI module (DU200-11 or DU200-12)

Wiring Distance

The last extension base in the connection can be located at a maximum distance of 30 m from the

sub-unit.

Setting of Terminator On/Off Switch

Set the terminator on/off switch of an extension base to ON for the base that is the last in the

connection. Set these switches of all other extension modules to OFF.

Setting of Slot Numbers

Select an unused slot number for each extension base. This can include, however, a slot number

for an extension module. The following figure shows how the numbers you set correspond to the

positions of slots and relate to channel numbers.

Setpoint 1

X01-X10

Setpoint 2

X11-X20

Setpoint 3

X21-X30

Setpoint 4

X31-X40

Setpoint 5

X41-X50

Setpoint 6

X51-X60

Setpoints of slot number

setup switch on an

extension base

Channel numbers, where

X is the unit number

3.8 Connecting an Extension Module to Extension Bases

3-29

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the

Power ON/OFF

When Using the Accessory Power Cord

DR232/DS400/DS600 (when using the accessory power cord)

Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument.

WARNING

• Connect the power cord only after confirming that the voltage of the

power supply matches the rated electric power voltage for this

instrument.

• Connect the power cord after checking that the power switch of this

instrument is turned off.

• To prevent electric shock or fire, always use the power cord supplied by

Yokogawa.

• Always use protective grounding to prevent electric shock. Connect the

power cord of the instrument to a three-pole power outlet which has a

protective ground terminal.

Do not use the function grounding ( marked terminal) under the power

connecting part as the protective ground terminal.

• Never use an extension cord that does not have protective grounding,

otherwise the protection feature will be negated.

• An AC outlet (auxiliary for the DS400/DS600) should be used to supply

power to the DS400/DS600 using a power cable(DV400-051)

separately available. Do not use this AC outlet to supply power to the

other equipments nor use other cables for the power connection.

Otherwise, the current flowing through the AC outlet will exceed the

permissible current, thereby resulting in the fuse blowing, overheating

or burning may occur.

Connecting Procedure

1. Check that the power switch is turned off.

2. Connect the plug of the accessory power cord to the power connector.

3. Plug the other end of the power cord into a power outlet that satisfies the following conditions:

For DS400/DS600 in order to cut down on unnecessary radio interference, attach a clamp filter

(accessory) near the power cord plug as shown below. Make a loop with the power cord and

clamp it in the clamp filter.

Rated supply voltage : 100 to 240 V AC (free power supply),operating voltage: 90 to 250 V AC

Rated supply voltage frequency : 50/60 Hz

Power consumption : DR232 ... About 130 VA max.

DS400 ... About 55 VA max.

DS600 ... About 70 VA max.

Use a three-pole power outlet provided with a protective ground terminal.

Power connector

Power cord

• DR232 • DS400/DS600

AC outlet(Auxiliary

for DS400/DS600)

Status

indicator

Power connector

Power switch

3-30 IM DR232-01E

When Using an Adapter for Direct Wiring to the Power Supply

DR242/DS400/DS600 (when connecting wires to screw terminals)

This applies only to products with power inlet W suffix code.

Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument.

WARNING

• Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned

off to prevent electric shock.

• To prevent fire, use 600 V PVC insulated wire (AWG18) for both power

and ground wiring (cross section of 0.83 mm2 or thicker, anti-galvanic

corrosion finish, insulation thickness more than 0.8 mm, insulation

resistance more than 50 MΩ/km at 20°C, approved EN60 320

(VDE0625)), or equivalent cables.

• Units equiped with screw type terminals should only be used in panel

installations.

• Before turning on the power, always ground the protective ground

terminal. Do not use the function grounding terminal ( marked

terminal) under the power connecting part as the protective grounding

terminal.

• For AC power and ground wiring, use “crimp on” lugs (for 4mm screws)

with insulation sleeves. Make sure that the crimp-on tool must be one

specified by the crimp-on lugs manufacture, and that the crimp-on lugs

and tool must be matched to the wire size.

• To prevent electric shock, do not touch the terminals after wiring.

• An AC outlet (auxiliary for the DS400/DS600) should be used to supply

power to the DS400/DS600 using a power cable(DV400-051)

separately available. Do not use this AC outlet to supply power to the

other equipments nor use other cables for the power connection.

Otherwise, the current flowing through the AC outlet will exceed the

permissible current, thereby resulting in the fuse blowing, overheating

or burning may occur.

Connecting procedure (DR242)

1. Check that the power switch is turned off.

2. Remove the cover protecting the power terminals.

3. Connect the power supply wires and the protecting ground wire to the power terminals.

4. Replace the cover.

Connecting procedure (DS400/DS600)

1. Check that the power switch is turned off.

2. Remove the cover protecting the power terminals.

3. Connect the power supply wires and the protecting ground wire to the power terminals.

4. Replace the cover.

In order to cut down on unnecessary radio interference, attach a clamp filter (accessory) near

the power cord plug. Make a loop with the power cord and clamp it in the clamp filter.

Rated supply voltage : 100 to 240 V AC (free power supply),operating voltage: 90 to 250 V AC

Rated supply voltage frequency : 50/60 Hz

Power consumption : DR242 ... About 130 VA max.

DS400 ... See previous page.

DS600 ... See previous page.

• DR242 • DS400/DS600

Protective ground wire

Power supply wires

Power terminals

Protective ground wire

Power supply wires

Power terminals

AC outlet(Auxiliary

for DS400/DS600)

3.9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON/OFF

3-31

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON/OFF

DS400/DS600(when using DC power supply connecter)

This applies only to products with power supply 2 suffix code.

Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument.

WARNING

• Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned

off to prevent electric shock.

• To prevent fire, use wires with cross sectional area of 0.3mm2(22AWG)

or more.

CAUTION

• If you connect the + and - terminals in reverse on the DS400/DS600,

the internal fuse will be blown (You cannot replace the fuse by yourself.

The instrument needs servicing in this case). If there is a possibility of

reversing the polarity, insert a fuse (rating shown below) in the wiring.

This will lower the chances of blowing the internal fuse.

Fuse : 250 V/T2.5 A to T4A (time lag), 20 mm glass tube fuse,

I2t = 12.5 to 32

(Recommended: A1350EF (250 V/T2.5 A, I2t=12.5: SCHURTER:

FST0034.3121))

Connecting procedure

1.Check thst the power switch is turned off.

2.Connect the accessory DC power terminal connector (part No. A1105JC) to the power wire and

the DS400/DS600. Use a power wire with a cross sectional area of 0.3 mm2 (22AWG) or

more.

Soldering

- (0 V DC)

+ (10 to 32 V DC)

DS400/DS600

Rated supply voltage:12 to 28 V DC

Operating supply voltage:10 to 32 V DC

Power consumption:About 25 VA max.

• DS400/DS600: DC power supply model

DC power terminal

connector

DC power

terminal

3-32 IM DR232-01E

3.9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON/OFF

DS400/DS600(when using optional AC adapter)

This applies only to products with power supply 2 suffix code.

Follow the warnings below to avoid electric shock or damaging the instrument.

WARNING

• Connect the power wires after checking that the power supply is turned

off to prevent electric shock.

• To prevent electric shock or fire, always use the power cable supplied

by YOKOGAWA.

• Before connecting the power cord, check that the voltage on the supply

side matches with the voltage rating of this recorder.

• When not using the instrument for a long time, unplug the power cord of

the AC adapter.

• Only use the AC adapter from YOKOGAWA (Model No.: DV500-00x).

• Do not put objects on top of the AC adapter or the power cord. Also, do

not let heat generating objects come in contact with them.

• When unplugging the power cord, do not pull on the power cord.

Always hold the plug. If the power cord becomes damaged, contact

your nearest representative listed on the back cover of this manual.

Connecting Procedure

1. Check that the power switch is turned OFF.

2. Connect the AC adapter to the AC adapter jack on DS400/DS600.

3. Connect the power cord plug that came with the AC adapter to the power supply connector of

the AC adapter.

4. Connect the plug on the other end of the power cord to a power outlet meeting the following

specifications.

The power outlet should be a three-pole type with a protective grounding terminal.

Rated power supply voltage: 100 to 240 VAC

Permissible supply voltage range: 90 to 250 VAC

Rated supply voltage frequency: 50/60 Hz

Maximum power consumption: 90 VA

AC adapter rated output voltage: 12 VDC

AC adapter maximum rated output current: 2.6 A

• DS400/DS600: DC power supply model

Power cord for

AC power supply

DC power terminal

connector

AC adapter

Power connector

for AC power supply

Functional grounding

When using the AC adapter, noise may be reduced if the functional ground is connected to the

earth GND. Use the functional ground terminal as necessary.

3-33

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Switching the Power ON/OFF

DR232/DR242

The power switch is a push-button; the power is turned on when pressed once and turned off

when pressed again.

Power switch

Note

• Before turning the power on, check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cord is correctly

connected.

• If nothing appears on the display when the power switch is turned on, turn off the power and check the

following:

• Is the power cord properly connected?

• Is the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page?

• Is the power fuse blown (see page 13-2)

If the problem still cannot be fixed, there may be an equipment problem; please contact your nearest

sales representative. Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual.

• The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up.

• The service life of the lithium battery used to save the settings is about 10 years at an ambient

temperature of 23°C. If the settings cannot be held because the lithium battery has run down, please

contact your nearest sales representative. Addresses may be found on the back cover of the manual.

DS400/DS600

When the “ ” side of the power switch is pressed, the power is turned on and when the “O” side

of the switch is pressed, the power is turned off. When the power is turned on, the status indicator

(see the figure on page 3-29) lights.

Note

• Before turning the power on, check that each unit is properly mounted and the power cord is correctly

connected.

• If the status indicator does not go on when the power switch is turned on, turn off the power and check

the following:

• Is the power cord properly connected?

• Is the supply voltage within the range noted on the previous page?

If the problem still cannot be fixed, there may be an equipment problem; please contact Yokogawa

Engineering Service Corporation (contact details on rear cover) for repair.

• If the status lamp flashes, it means that there is an internal error. Turn off the power switch and check the

same items as for the DR242. If the problem still cannot be fixed, there may be an equipment problem;

please contact your nearest sales representative. Addresses may be found on the back cover of the

manual.

• If the power of a subunit is turned on and off with multiple subunits connected, subunits connected

subsequently to the end from the subunit whose power is turned off will not be recognized temporarily.

• The device takes about 30 minutes to warm up.

3.9 Connecting the Power Cord and Turning the Power ON/OFF

3-34 IM DR232-01E

3.10 Setting the Date and Time

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=CLOCK

CHART CLOCK

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the CHART key to display the CHART menu.

• Set and select using .

• To escape while using a single menu, press the MODE(ESC) key. The menu returns to the first

menu to which the single menu belongs. Note that newly selected or set items will be

canceled.

• When the device displays that setting is completed, the newly set or selected details are fixed.

CLOCK 96/01/01 03:36:23

>Set Date & Time YY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS

*** SET OK***

ENTERENTER

ESC

SET=

Main menu

Lower menu

Setting the Date and Time

Set them in the order of year/month/day, hour:minutes:seconds.

• Year: Specify the lower two digits of the year. Example: 1996 → 96, 2000 → 00

• Month, day: Use two digits for each.

• Hour: 00 to 23

Press the ENTER key at the set time to make it effective.

Note

The date and time settings are backed up by the lithium battery in the main unit.

3-35

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

3.11 Countering Noise

Types and Features of Noise Sources

Commercial Power Supply

It is necessary to consider both 50 and 60Hz as noise components. It is important to note that a

power supply line in which a thyristor or inverter is incorporated functions not only as an “energy

surplus line”, but also as a “supply surplus line”.

Thyristor (SCR)

A thyristor is used to control power through ON/OFF modulation of commercial power by

controlling the phase angle.

50Hz

60Hz

*heaters, etc.

noise

phase angle

Current

Voltage

Thyristor waveform

Thyristor

Unit

*Load

When the thyristor turns ON or OFF, a pulse noise is superimposed on commercial power supply,

and its pulse width is approximately 1µs. Accordingly, thyristor noise can be defined as follows.

· thyristor noise = commercial power supply + pulse noise

Inverter

Commercial power supply is converted to direct current by a rectifier (sometimes the thyristor is

used as the rectifier to stabilize direct current) and then modulated by a switching transistor and

finally converted into alternating current at the desired frequency (from tens to hundreds of Hz) to

drive a motor, for example. If the load to be driven is a fluorescent lamp, the frequency is tens of

kHz. Accordingly, inverter noise can be defined as follows.

Inverter noise = commercial power supply + pulse noise (high density) + variable low frequency

noise

Since the density of pulse noise is high compared to that of a thyristor and in addition, there is

variable frequency noise, it is difficult to consider a countermeasure for inverter noise.

Commercial

power supply Rectifier output DC output Inverter output

Commercial

power supply Rectifier DC filter Inverter Motor

Principle of inverter

3-36 IM DR232-01E

Voltage

waveform

Current

waveform

Voltage/current waveforms of an inverter

Relay

A relay is frequently used to amplify alarm and temperature controller outputs. However, since a

counter-electromotive force (counter e.m.f.) is produced by coil inductance when the relay is

turned off and the e.m.f. becomes noise, care must be taken. Due to chattering at the relay contact,

tens to hundreds of kHz noise occurs mainly in bursts. Thus, the noise energy often becomes high.

Transceiver

In large-scale plants, transceivers are often used for communications between the field and the

control room. Although W/G of the Japanese Electric Measuring Instruments Manufacturers

Association recommends to use transceivers covering a wave band of 27MHz, smaller-sized

transceivers for the 140 or 470MHz wave band are often used.

Noise Simulator

To test the immunity to pulse noise (mainly thyristor noise), a noise simulator is often used. A test

noise of approximately 1kV for 0.8µs is used synchronously with the power supply frequency.

Since data acquisition equipment is often used for measurements of equipment subjected to the

pulse noise test, the influence of noise must be considered.

Propagation of Noise

• Noise is propagated in the following three ways.

Conduction: noise is conducted through a power line, input wiring, etc.

Electrostatic induction: noise leaks through capacitances between wires and instruments.

Electromagnetic induction: a loop in the input line, etc. induces an AC voltage by detecting the

AC magnetic field.

In real applications, the above three propagation paths are not independent of each other. Their

combination propagates noise to the equipment and causes problems.

• Examples of noise propagated through each of these paths are given below.

Conduction: inverter noise, relay noise, thyristor noise, and noise caused by

surface temperature measurement of a power transistor, etc.

Electrostatic induction: commercial power supply noise such as the hum of audio

equipment, relay noise, etc.

Electromagnetic induction: magnetic leakage flux from a power transformer or motor, magnetic

field from a high-frequency induction furnace, the rotating magnetic

field of a power generator (Cu10Ω), etc.

The figure on the next page shows the propagation paths using practical examples.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-37

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Power

supply

Example of a high-frequency

induction furnace

Inverter power supply

(20 to 3500kW)

Furnace

(0.2k to 10kHz)

Electrostatic

induction noise

Hot-line conduction

noise

Electro magnetic

induction noise

Electrostatic induction noise

Electro magnetic induction noise

Room

temperature

Line noise

The instrument

Temperature

inside

furnace

* Due to electromagnetic induction, current i flows

through the conductor, creating joule heat which

heats the furnace.

J=i

Power

supply Inputs

Basics of Anti-Noise Measures (part 1)

Common Mode Noise and Normal Mode Noise

ONM

Case

Circuit

common

Floating amp

Signal source

resistances Normal mode noise

Signal

voltage E

Common mode noise

Signal component

Normal mode noise

component

Output

Common Mode Noise (ECM)

Noise generated between the signal source and the ground of a measuring instrument. Since it is

applied to both the H and L input terminals in phase with one another, it is also called in-phase

voltage.

Normal Mode Noise (ENM)

This is an unfavorable noise that is superimposed on a signal voltage. Since it is a voltage

between the H and L terminals, it is also called the line voltage, or since it is a voltage in series

with the signal voltage, it is sometimes called the series mode voltage.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-38 IM DR232-01E

In the figure on the previous page, due to common mode voltage ECM, noise currents i1 and i2

flow through the impedance to grounds Z1 and Z2 and coupling impedance Z3, resulting in the

generation of normal mode noise ENM between input terminals H and L. Like this, common mode

noise is converted to normal mode noise. The amp is equipped with a built-in filter and in case of

output EO the normal mode noise will be eliminated. This rate of conversion is called the

common mode rejection ratio and expressed by the following equation.

• Common mode rejection ratio

(CMRR)=20Log E

C M

(dB)

Since the actual CMRR is expressed using the ratio of an error component output caused by

common mode noise to common mode noise, it contains the normal mode rejection ratio (NMRR)

expressed by the following equation.

• Normal mode rejection ratio

(NMRR)=20Log E

N M

(dB)

The NMRR is a value that shows the ability to reject the output error (normal mode noise

component: ENM) by normal mode noise. Thus, this is also a very important value which shows

the resistance-to-noise characteristics of the measuring instrument.

Basics of Anti-Noise Measures (part 2)

Decreasing and Increasing Impedance

As described in the previous section, conversion of common mode noise into normal mode noise

causes an error in the measured output. In other words, prevention of such a conversion is the key

to anti-noise measures. As can be understood from the previous section, it is important to take the

following measures to reduce normal mode noise.

· reduce the wiring resistances R1 and R2, including the resistance of the wires.

· increase the coupling impedance of common mode voltage ECM.

These are called the decrease and increase of impedance as basics of anti-noise measures.

In the above discussions, anti-noise measures have been described on the assumption that

common mode noise has already been given. In real applications, common mode noise often

occurs owing to grounding resistance as shown in the figure below.

Signal source The instrument

One-point grounding

Grounding resistance and E

Ground current

In such a case, perform one-point grounding as indicated by the dotted line, as an extreme

example of decreasing impedance, to equalize the potentials of the signal source and the

instrument. Rejecting common mode noise in this way is the basics of anti-noise measures.

Anti-Noise Measures in the Instrument Itself

Pulse width modulation type A/D converter (PWM type A/D)

This instrument uses a feedback pulse width modulation type A/D converter and has the

following features:

• Linearity and stability are good because of the feedback effect.

• Integration type A/D converter ensures excellent noise suppression.

If the integration time is equal to the noise period, the positive and negative sides of the shaded

part in the figure below cancel each other out and thus the average value becomes zero.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-39

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Balance each other

integration time

DC voltage (average value)

Input voltage (instantaneous value)

Normally, an integration time of 20ms (50Hz) or 16.7ms (60Hz) is selected depending on the

commercial power supply frequencies. A 100-ms integration mode is added to the instrument to

achieve superior noise rejection. However, when using the 100ms setting, the smallest

measurement interval is longer than in case of the 20ms or 16.7ms setting. The integration effect

enables the PWM A/D converter to perform the following two functions.

• Rejection of frequency determined by the reciprocal of the integration time and frequencies

which are whole multiples of that frequency;

• First-order lag filter provided with cut-off frequency proportional to the reciprocal of the

integration time.

The following table compares the integration times of 16.7ms, 20ms and 100ms.

Integration time Rejection frequency Cut-off frequency Remarks

16.7ms n×60Hz approx. 19Hz for 60Hz

20.0ms n×50Hz approx. 16Hz for 50Hz

100.0ms n×10Hz approx. 3.2Hz for both 50Hz/60Hz

n=1,2,3...

As shown in the table, the merit of 100.0-ms integration is not only that it applies to both 50 and

60Hz, but also that it provides a low cut-off frequency as the first-order lag filter and improves

the noise rejection ability.

The following figure shows the calculation values of the NMRR for three integration times and an

example of actual measurement of the NMRR for a 100-ms integration signal.

• Calculated values of NMRR • Example of actual measurement of NMRR

(100ms)

-20

-40

-60

-10

-30

-50

-70

510 20 50 100 200

Frequency (Hz)

16.7ms

20.0ms

100ms

Frequency (Hz)

Noise Filter

This instrument is equipped with a low-pass filter (cutoff-frequency of 10Hz (for both 50/60 Hz),

50Hz,60Hz) which functions as a way of noise rejection. Also exponential averaging functions as

a noise filter.

Anti-Noise Measures: Applications

Practical Measures

• Reducing noise itself

The basics of this practical measures dictates using the instrument in conditions where noise is

suppressed as much as possible.

• for power lines: an increase of impedance;

Separate the power lines for noise source equipment (inverter, thyristor, etc.) from those for

the measuring instrument.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-40 IM DR232-01E

• for input lines: an increase of impedance;

Always separate the input line from the noise source lines (power and alarm lines).

Step 1 : Install a separator.

Separator

Special class 3 ground

(10Ω or less)

Signal*

lines Power

lines

Step 2 : Keep the signal cables at least 15cm above the power lines using a bracket.

If the power lines are not shielded, the operating voltage is 220V or less, and the operating

current is 10A or more, the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be

60cm or more.

Signal lines*

Power

lines

at least

15 cm

Step 3 : Leave a clearance of at least 15 cm between the signal lines and power lines.

If the power lines are not shielded, the operating voltage is 220V or less, and the operating

current is 10A or more, the distance between the signal cables and power cords must be

60cm or more.

Signal*

lines Power

lines

at least 15 cm

Step 4 : Lay the signal lines at right angles to the power lines.

If the power lines are not shielded, separate the signal lines and power lines where they cross

using steel sheeting at least 1.6mm thick.

Signal lines*

Power lines

1.6mm

* Separate analog signal lines and communication cables in the same manner as from power

cords.

• When there is influence from a magnetic or electrical field: an increase of

impedance

Step 1 : Keep the noise source as far away as possible.

Magnetic field strength

H = I

2πr=2,400

6= 400 A/m

Example I=2,400A

r=1m

The influence of the external magnetic field on the measuring instrument: 400A/m or less.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-41

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

Step 2 : Change the position of the noise source.

A) Leakage magnetic flux of transformer:

Φ = strong

Φ = weak Move the instrument to a location

where the influence from magnetic

flux is weak.

B) Sparks

strong electromagnetic

radiation

weak electrogmagnetic

radiation

Move the instrument to a location

where the influence from electro-

magnetic radiation is weak.

spark

• Grounding: a decrease of impedance

The grounding method is the point of common mode noise suppression.

Equipment

under

measurement

(EUM) The instrument

ec ec'

EUM The instrument EUM The instrument

(if grounding is difficult)

The difference in the potential to the ground between EUM

and the instrument may cause a ground current, resulting in noise.

Equalize the potentials to the ground so

that the common mode noise becomes zero.

One-point grounding Potential equalization

The basic means to obtain stable measurement is to set the circuit potential with proper

grounding. Thus, potential equalization is the means to be adopted only when grounding is

impossible.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-42 IM DR232-01E

• Shielded and twisted pair (prevention of electromagnetic coupling): an increase

of impedance

If it is difficult to keep the noise source away from the measuring instrument due to space

limitations, the use of a shielded twisted pair is effective.

• electrostatic coupling can be completely cut off by shielding;

• for a magnetic field, shielding with a magnetic material (iron, permalloy, etc.) can be

employed. However, there are many restrictions on this use and perfect shielding is

impossible. Therefore, use of a twisted pair is preferable.

Voltage em induced by the coil is proportional to the area of the coil.

=> The smaller the area of the coil becomes, the smaller the noise becomes.

Magnetic field Φ

Coil

If the directions of coils 1 and 2 are reversed by twisting, as shown, if the areas of the two coils

are equal, the induced voltages of the coils offset each other and total induced voltage em

becomes zero.

coil 1 coil 2

The above two principles are combined as a twisted pair.

Even though a shielded twisted pair is used, a proper grounding method is still important.

Connected

equipment

Signal

source twisted pair shield

If the signal source is not grounded

connected

equipment

Power

source twisted pair shield

Ground the signal cable shields collectively but separately from the power line ground. If the

separation of grounds is impossible, use the guard terminal.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-43

IM DR232-01E

Installation and Wiring

• Insertion of noise filter and noise killer

If the influence from noise cannot be eliminated by the methods described before, use noise

filter or noise killer.

Power line noise rejection

Step 1 : Insert an isolation transformer into the power line.

Increasing impedance to high frequency

with shield, which is grounded

1:1

The

instrument

(Most of the noise is

high-frequency noise)

100V AC

Power

supply

Step 2 : Insert a power line noise filter (available on the market)

High frequency noise is divided by decreasing impedance to ground through C and

increasing impedance through L.

The

instrument

100V AC

Power

supply

Note 1:Ground the noise filter and the recorder in common.

Note 2:Since insertion of a noise filter increases the by-pass current (regarded as leakage

current), make sure that the leakage current is within the specified value.

• When the noise contains wide frequency components

While one-point grounding is effective at a low frequency, it sometimes forms a loop and

has an adverse effect on a high frequency.

Ex: Connecting a power meter and the recorder grounded at one point to an inverter

AC power meter

The instrument

Noise source

(inverter, etc.) High-frequency noise

(reverse flow)

One-point

grounding

AC power meter

The instrument

Noise

blocking of reverse flow

Ferrite beads

(high impedance at high frequency)

Reverse flow of high-frequency to the recorder is thus suppressed.

The power meter leaks the high-frequency noise component to the

ground and that noise flows back to the DA100 side.

Noise source

(inverter, etc.)

• Input noise rejection

If input noise cannot be rejected by means of one-point grounding or 100-ms integration,

insert capacitor or ferrite beads as they are effective in rejecting pulse noise.

Step 1 : Connect a capacitor between the L input and ground.

The instrument

Use a capacitor from a hundred

to thousands of pF which can

withstand high voltages and

must be grounded.

Step 2 : Rejection of pulse noise when grounding is impossible.

The instrument

Use a capacitor from a hundred

to thousands of pF.

Ferrite beads

Insert the ferrite beads as necessary.

3.11 Countering Noise

3-44 IM DR232-01E

3.11 Countering Noise

• Relay noise suppression

Dc external

power supply Contact

Diode

connect to the relay

coil terminal (socket)

directly.

()

Relay

the relay coil rating must

be as low as possible.

• To prevent noise and protect the contact,

connect the diode to the relay coil terminal

directly.

• In addition to the above measure, reduce

the rated voltage of the relay circuit as

much as possible for higher reliability.

• It is necessary to choose a diode that

matches the relay. Generally, a diode

whose rated rectifying current is at least

three times the current flowing through

the relay coil must be used.

And the rated reverse voltage must be at

least three time the operating voltage.

(Note) Across the relay or solenoid coil, a counter-electromotive force is produced by an

inductive load. This phenomenon may damage the contact or, as the noise source,

cause a malfunctioning of the equipment, and have an unfavorable effect on the

entire system.

Surge suppresser circuit

connect to the

relay socket

terminal directly.

()

C=0.01 to 1µF

Must withstand a voltage

of at least three times

the operating voltage.

R=0.3Re to 1Re

Re=Relay coil's DC resistance

• If a relay contact is connectd to the input

of the system components, apply the

measure shown in the figure at the right

to the relay coil. Otherwise, a counter-

electromotive force produced across the

coil may be induced on the contact side

through the relay's internal coupling or

coupling between the lines, and may

cause a malfunctioning of the equipment.

• Others (isolation from noise source: for hot line measurement)

(Hot line) Power transistor

(Vcc)

Wrap

At high temperatures

At low temperatures Mylar isolation film

Adhesive copper

foil tape

Adhesion

Anti-Noise Measures for PC Connection

When connecting the instrument to a PC, it is recommended to apply ferrite cores (e.g.

ZCAT3035-1303 from TDK) to the interface cable as a noise countering measure. Apply a ferrite

core on both sides of the cable as shown below, when the noise persists, apply more ferrite cores.

Personal

computer Ferrite core

Function

grounding

terminal

4-1

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.1 Using the AUTO Display

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

E S C

AUTO Display for the Main Display

1 Select the main display using the DISP key. Direct the arrow mark on the Sub-display upward.

2 Select “AUT” using the MODE key.

003 0.0045V 004 0.0931V AUT

Sub-display 1

AUTO Display for Sub-display 1

1 Select sub-display 1 using the DISP key. Direct the arrow mark on the Sub-display leftward.

2 Select “AUT” using the MODE key.

004 0.0926V 005 0.0824V

Sub-display 1

AUT

AUTO Display for Sub-display 2

1 Select sub-display 2 using the DISP key. Direct the arrow mark on the Sub-display downward.

2 Select “AUT” using the MODE key.

005 0.8210V 006 0.0095V

Sub-display 1

AUT

4-2 IM DR232-01E

AUTO Display for the Main Display

Channel No.

The first three characters are used for displaying the channel number. Delete “The first character

always displays “0”.” “A” will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels.

If you selected TAG at the channel No./TAG setting in the set-up mode (refer to 10.2 on page 10-

4), the assigned tag will appear for each channel.

• The first 7 characters of the TAG setting will be displayed;

• If the TAG setting consists of only spaces, the channel number will be displayed instead;

• If the first character of the TAG setting is a space, the 2nd to 8th character will be displayed.

Difference between Channels (delta)

One character is used to let you know that difference between channels (delta) is displayed.

However, it will not be displayed in the case of optional computation channels.

Only if you selected the difference between channels (delta) as the input type, “d” will be

displayed here.

Alarms

Two characters are used for displaying alarms. One channel is used in the case of optional

channels.

When an alarm occurs, the kind of alarm will be displayed. When in one channel several alarms

occur at the same time, the priority of display becomes H > L > dH > dL > RH > RL. For details

on H, L, dH, dL, RH and RL alarms, refer to page 8-2.

Measurement Values

Seven characters are used for displaying the measurement values. The decimal point uses up one

character. Nine channel is used in the case of optional computation channels.

When a measurement value does not reach the following value, “– *****” will be displayed.

• DC voltage: a minimum value of the measuring range – (max. value – min. value) × 0.05

• TC/RTD: min. value of the measurement range –10°C

• Linear scaling: –32000, or a minimum value of the recording span – (max. value – min. value)

× 0.05

When a measurement value exceeds the following value, “+ *****” will be displayed.

• DC voltage: a maximum value of the measuring range + (max. value – min. value) × 0.05

• TC/RTD: min. value of the measurement range +10°C

• Linear scaling: +32000, or a maximum value of the recording span + (max. value – min. value)

× 0.05

If the input module is not connected properly, “ XXXXXX” will be displayed.

While waiting for an input signal “ OOOOOO” will be displayed.

Engineering Units

If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display, six characters are used for

displaying engineering units. If TAG has been selected to appear on the display, only three

characters are used for displaying units. Only the first three characters of the unit setting will then

be displayed, even if the first character of the unit setting is a space.

When “ XXXXXX” or “ OOOOOO” are displayed as measurement value, no engineering unit

will be displayed.

001

Engineering unit

V0.0467 H d

Measurement value

Alarm

Difference between channels

"A" will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels.

Channel No.

1st digit: unit No.

2nd digit: slot No.

3rd digit: channel No. (in units of 1)

Others

If you selected “SKIP” as the input type, that channel will not be displayed.

When the input type of all channels is set to “SKIP”, “***ALL SKIP***” will be displayed.

4.1 Using the AUTO Display

4-3

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

AUTO Display for Sub-display 1

Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta), Alarms, Measurement Values

Same as for the main display.

Engineering Units

If the channel number has been selected to appear on the display, the first four characters of the

unit setting are used for displaying engineering units. If TAG has been selected to appear on the

display or when “ XXXXXX” or “ OOOOOO” are displayed as measurement value, no

engineering unit will be displayed.

Selected Display Mode (refer to page 4-1 for procedure)

This only appears on sub-display 1 when monitoring. The arrow shows to which display the

display mode refers.

004d L 0.0926V 005 0.0824V AUT

Selected display mode

Engineering unit

Measurement value

Alarm

Difference between channels

Channel No.

1st digit: unit No. A will be displayed in the case of optional

computation channels.

2nd digit: slot No.

3rd digit: channel No. (in units of 1)

Others

Same as for the main unit.

AUTO Display for Sub-display 2

Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta), Alarms, Measurement Values,

Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode

Same as for the sub-display 1.

Others

Same as for the sub-display 1.

Points to Note when Using the AUTO Display

• When all three displays are set to AUTO display, the main display will start displaying data of

the channel with the smallest channel number, on sub-display 1 data of the next two channels

will be displayed, while on sub-display 2 data of the next two channels will be displayed. When

the data are updated, the display will be replaced with data of the next, consecutive, channel.

• When the input type of all channels is set to “SKIP”, then depending on the display as

described below, “***ALL SKIP***” will be displayed.

• When the main display is set to AUTO display, then this will be displayed settings on the

main display, regardless of the settings of sub-display 1 and 2.

• When sub-display 1 is set to AUTO display, and the main display is set to any other mode

than AUTO, then this will be displayed on sub-display 1, regardless the setting of sub-

display 2.

• When sub-display 2 is set to AUTO display, and the main display is set to any other mode

than AUTO, and sub-display 1 to any other mode than AUTO, then this will be displayed on

sub-display 2.

• When on any of the main, sub-display1 or sub-display 2 “***ALL SKIP***” appears, other

displays which may have been set to AUTO will turn blank. Only the selected display mode

on sub-display 1 and the status display will appear.

4.1 Using the AUTO Display

4-4 IM DR232-01E

4.2 Using the MANUAL Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

MANUAL Display for the Main Display

1 Select the main display using the DISP key.

2 Select “MAN” using the MODE key.

002 0.0034V 003 0.0920V MAN

Sub-display 1

3 Select the required channel using the keys.

001 V0.0057

Main display

MANUAL Display for Sub-display 1

1 Select sub-display 1 using the DISP key.

2 Select “MAN” using the MODE key.

002 0.0422V 003 0.0726V

Sub-display 1

MAN

3 Select the right or left channel using the keys. A dash [—] will appear below the unit

number of the selected channel.

4 Select the required channel using the keys.

006 0.0892V 003 0.0726V

Sub-display 1

MAN

MANUAL Display for Sub-display 2

1 Select sub-display 2 using the DISP key.

2 Select “MAN” using the MODE key.

005 0.0931V 006 0.0092V

Sub-display 1

MAN

3 Select the right or left channel using the keys. A dash [—] will appear below the unit

number of the selected channel.

4 Select the required channel using the keys.

009 1.0075V 008 0.0154V

Sub-display 2

4-5

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.2 Using the MANUAL Display

MANUAL Display for the Main Display

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta) and Alarms

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2).

Measurement Values

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then “SKIP” will be displayed.

When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected, “- - - - - -” appears.

Engineering Units

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then no engineering unit will be displayed.

MANUAL Display for the Sub-display 1 and 2

Data of two channels are displayed here simultaneously on each display.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta), Alarms and Selected Display

Mode

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3).

Measurement Values

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then “SKIP” will be displayed.

When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected, “- - - - - -” appears.

Engineering Units

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then no engineering unit will be displayed.

4-6 IM DR232-01E

4.3 Using the PAGE Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

1 Select the main display using the DISP key.

2 Select “PGE” using the MODE key.

002 0.1936V 003 0.0995V PGE

Sub-display 1

3 Select the required set of five channels (page) using the keys.

007 0.0197V 008 0.0074V PGE

006 V0.0173

009 0.0162V 010 0.0102V

Display

PAGE Display for the Main Display

When this display is selected, the measurement values of five consecutive channels will be

displayed using sub-display 1 and 2 also.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta) and Alarms

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2).

Measurement Values

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then “SKIP” will be displayed.

When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected, “- - - - - -” appears.

Engineering Units

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then no engineering unit will be displayed.

PAGE Display for the Sub-display 1 and 2

In combination with the page display of the main display, data of two channels are displayed here

simultaneously on each display. Other display modes cannot be selected.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta), Alarms and Selected Display Mode

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3).

Measurement Values

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then “SKIP” will be displayed.

When the channel other than the channel of the input module is selected, “- - - - - -” appears.

Engineering Units

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3), except for the following.

When the input type of the channel is set to “SKIP”, then no engineering unit will be displayed.

4-7

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display

1 Select the main display using the DISP key.

2 Select “SER” using the MODE key.

003 0.0054V 004 0.0319V SER

Sub-display 1

ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub-display 1

1 Select sub-display 1 using the DISP key.

2 Select “SER” using the MODE key.

004 H 0.0269V 005 RH 0.0248V

Sub-display 1

SER

ALARM SEARCH Display for Sub-display 2

1 Select sub-display 2 using the DISP key.

2 Select “SER” using the MODE key.

005 0.2108V 006 0.0951V

Sub-display 1

SER

ALARM SEARCH Display for the Main Display

Only the channels in which an alarm occurred, will be displayed. When an alarm occurs in several

channels, the channels will be displayed consecutively.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta), Alarms, Measurement Values

and Engineering Units

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-2).

Others

When the input types of all channels are set to “SKIP” or no alarms occur, “***NO ALARM***”

will be displayed.

ALARM SEARCH Display for the Sub-display 1 and 2

Only the channels in which an alarm occurred, will be displayed. Two channels will be displayed

on each sub-display.

Channel No., Difference between Channels (delta), Alarms, Measurement Values,

Engineering Units and Selected Display Mode

Same as for the AUTO display (refer to page 4-3).

4-8 IM DR232-01E

4.4 Using the ALARM SEARCH Display

Points to Note when Using the ALARM SEARCH Display

• When all three displays are set to ALARM SEARCH display, the main display will start

displaying data of the channel with the smallest channel number, on sub-display 1 data of the

next two channels will be displayed, while on sub-display 2 data of the next two channels will

be displayed. When the data are updated, the display will be replaced with data of the next,

consecutive, channel.

• When the input type of all channels is set to “SKIP”, then depending on the display settings as

described below, “***NO ALARM***” will be displayed.

• When the main display is set to ALARM SEARCH display, then this will be displayed on the

main display, regardless the settings of sub-display 1 and 2.

• When sub-display 1 is set to ALARM SEARCH display, and the main display is set to any

other mode than ALARM SEARCH, then this will be displayed on sub-display 1, regardless

the setting of sub-display 2.

• When sub-display 2 is set to ALARM SEARCH display, and the main display is set to any

other mode than ALARM SEARCH, and sub-display 1 to any other mode than ALARM

SEARCH, then this will be displayed on sub-display 2.

• When on any of the main, sub-display1 or sub-display 2 “***NO ALARM***” appears,

other displays which may have been set to ALARM SEARCH will turn blank. Only the

selected display mode on sub-display 1 and the status display on sub-display 2 will appear.

4-9

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.5 Using the BARGRAPH Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

1 Select the sub-display 1 using the DISP key.

2 Select “BAR” using the MODE key.

- 1.5000> < 2.0000 BAR

003 V0.0172

004 0.0153V 005 0.0123V

Display

Bargraph Display

Sub-display 1 can be turned into a bargraph display.

The measurement data on the main display are displayed as a bargraph on sub-display 1. The

bargraph shows a graph corresponding to the measurement value, showing the recording span

divided into 40 equal parts. The left side of the bargraph shows the left span, the right side of the

bargraph shows the right span. When you are using the linear scaling function, the left and right

side of the bargraph show the left scaling and right scaling value respectively. Engineering units

are not displayed.

When the main display shows “SKIP”, “***ALL SKIP***”, “NO ALARM”, “OOOOOO”,

“XXXXXX”, or “- - - - - -” the bargraph will not appear. Only the selected display mode will

appear.

4-10 IM DR232-01E

4.6 Using the ALARM STATUS Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

ALARM STATUS Display for Sub-display 1

1 Select the sub-display 1 using the DISP key.

2 Select “ALM” using the MODE key.

001

Sub-display 1

ALM

3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels.

011

Sub-display 1

ALM

ALARM STATUS Display for Sub-display 2

1 Select the sub-display 2 using the DISP key.

2 Select “ALM” using the MODE key.

001

Sub-display 1 and 2

ALM

001

3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels.

001

Sub-display 1 and 2

ALM

011

Alarm Status Display

The status of alarms can be displayed on sub-display 1 and 2.

On each sub-display the alarms of maximum 30 channels can be monitored which also depends

on the number of input channels. The display shows “ ” for channels where no alarm has

occurred, and shows “ ” for channels where an alarm has occurred. The relation between the

alarm status display and channel number is as shown below.

001

021

Alarm status of channel 3

Alarm status of channel 2

Alarm status of channel 1

Channel 12

Channel 11

Channel 30

Channel 21

Channel 20

Channel 10

Alarm status of channel 22

Alarm status of channel 21

Channel 30

"A" will be displayed in the case of optional computation channels.

Channel No. (fixed to 1 in units of 1)

Slot No.

Unit No.

4-11

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

RELAY STATUS Display for Sub-display 1

1 Select the sub-display 1 using the DISP key.

2 Select “RLY” using the MODE key.

S01

Sub-display 1

RLY

3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels.

S11

Sub-display 1

RLY

RELAY STATUS Display for Sub-display 2

1 Select the sub-display 2 using the DISP key.

2 Select “RLY” using the MODE key.

S01

Sub-display 1 and 2

RLY

S01

3 Select the range to be displayed in blocks of 10 channels.

S01

Sub-display 1 and 2

RLY

041

Relay Status Display

The status of relays can be displayed on sub-display 1 and 2.

On each display the status of maximum 30 relays can be monitored. The display shows “ ” for

relays which are currently not operated by internal switch/alarm output relay, and shows “ ” for

relays which are currently operated by internal switch/alarm output relay.

4-12 IM DR232-01E

4.7 Using the RELAY STATUS Display

Relation between the Relay Status and Internal Switch

If the relay status of the internal switches is being displayed, an “S” will be displayed as the first

character. The next two characters show the number of the internal switch which corresponds to

the first batch of the display and range from 01 to 51. There are 60 internal switches.

S01

Relay status of internal switch 3

Relay status of internal switch 2

Relay status of internal switch 1

Internal switch 12

Internal switch 11

Internal switch 30

Internal switch 21

Internal switch 20

Internal switch 10

Internal switch no. in units of 1 (fixed to 1)

Tens of internal switch no. (0 to 5)

Internal switch (S)

Relation between the Relay Status and Alarm Output Relay

If the relay status of the alarm output relays is being displayed, a unit number will be displayed in

the first character position. The slot number in the second character position represents the

number of slot in which the alarm module or the DI/DO module is mounted. The alarm output

relay is different in relay status display whether it is in the alarm module or in the DI/DO module

as shown below.

• If an alarm module is mounted, ten or indicators are displayed.

• If the DI/DO module is mounted, ten or indicators are displayed but the right 8 indicators

of ten are not used because two alarm output relays are used.

Example for mounting the alarm module and the DI/DO module:

011

Relay status of alarm output relay 13

Relay status of alarm output relay 12

Relay status of alarm output relay 11

Alarm relay 22

Alarm relay 21

Alarm relay 20

Alarm relay No. (in units of 1)

Slot No.

Unit No.

Display for alarm

module Display for DI/DO

module Not used

4-13

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Monitor Mode Display

4.8 Using the CLOCK (Data & Time) Display

D I S P

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

R E C O R D

M O D E

E S C

1 Select the sub-display 2 using the DISP key.

2 Select “CLK” using the MODE key.

005 0.8210V 006 0.0095V

Sub-display 1 and 2

CLK

Dec. 30. 95 13:16:19

Clock Display

The date and time can be displayed on sub-display 2.

According to the set time in 3.9, “Setting the Date and Time” (see page 3-23), the current date and

time is displayed.

The display shows the month, day, year and hour, minute, second in this sequence.

5-1

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

5.1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

001-10:VOLT/2V

SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL

SPAN=–2.0000/ 2.0000V

E S C

1 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

001-01:VOLT/2V

>Select Channel No.

001-01:VOLT/2V

>Select Channel No.

001-01:VOLT/2V

20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V

SPAN=–2.0000/_2.0000V

>Span limit(–2.0000~2.0000V)

***SET OK***

001-01:SKIP

***SET OK***

001-01:TC/R

R S B K E J T N W L U KP

SPAN=_ _ _ _0.0/1760.0˚C

>Span limit(0.0~1760.0˚C)

***SET OK***

001-01:RTD/PT1

PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 NI3

CU1 CU2 CU3 CU4 PT1S PT2S JPT1S

JPT2S J263B

SPAN=–_200.0/_ _600.0˚C

>Span limit(–200.0~600.0˚C)

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

To the next page

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

5-2 IM DR232-01E

5.1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

001-01:DI/LEVL

LEVL CONT

SPAN=

_ _ _ _ _ _

>Span limit(0~1)

***SET OK***

002-02:DELTA/REF Ch=01

>Select Channel No.

SPAN=–2.0000/_2.0000V

>Span limit(–2.0000~2.0000V)

***SET OK***

002-02:RRJC/RJC Ch=01

>Select Channel No.

SPAN= 0.0/1760.0˚C

>Span limit(0.0~1760.0˚C)

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

From the previous page

ENTER

Setting the Channel No.

This setting specifies the channels to which the type of input and recording span applies. Set a

range of channels in the same unit, whether you specify from what channel (the first channel) to

what channel (the last channel).

First Channel No. (Begin)

The first three characters on the main display show the number of the first channel to which

settings apply.

• A numeral in the first character position shows a unit number. A numeral in the second

character position represents a module number (slot number).

• Setting range: Determined by the positions in which the input modules are connected. For

details, see page 3-8.

Last Channel No. (End)

The two characters following the first channel number show the number of the last channel to

which settings apply.

• Setting range: See description of the above “The first channel number.” The number of the last

channel cannot be smaller than the number of the first channel. When both channel numbers are

equal, settings will only apply to that particular channel. When you have set the first channel

number and you move the cursor to the last channel setting, the channel number of the first

channel setting will appear here.

5-3

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

5.1 Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span

Selecting the Type of Input

The following types of input can be selected. The default setting is VOLT.

• SKIP

Measurement, recording and display (except for page display) will not be carried out.

Measurement, recording and display will be carried out for the next channel whose input type is

not set to SKIP.

• VOLT (DC voltage)

This input type can be selected from 20mV, 60mV, 200mV, 2V, 6V, 20V and 50V. Refer to

chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting. The default setting is 2V.

• TC (thermocouple)

This input type can be selected from R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N, W, L, U and KP (KPvsAU7Fe).

Refer to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting. The default setting is R.

• RTD (resistance temperature detector)

This input type can be selected from PT1 (Pt100 1mA), PT2 (Pt100 2mA), JPT1 (JPt100 1mA),

JPT2 (JPt100 2mA), PT50 (Pt50 2mA), NI1 (Ni100 1mA SAMA), NI2 (Ni100 1mA DIN), NI3

(Ni120 1mA), CU1 (Cu10 GE), CU2 (Cu10 L&N), CU3 (Cu10 WEED), CU4 (Cu10

BAILEY), PT1S (Pt100 1mA high resolution), PT2S (Pt100 2mA high resolution), JPT1S

(JPt100 1mA high resolution), JPT2S (JPt100 2mA high resolution) and J263B (J263*B). Refer

to chapter 14 for the measurement range of each setting. The default setting is PT1.

• DI (voltage level: LEVL; contact:CONT)

This input type can be selected from LEVL and CONT.

In case of LEVL, a voltage of less than approx. 2.4 V will be recognized as “0 (OFF)”, whereas

a voltage of approx. 2.4V or more (max. allowable voltage is up to ±60 VDC) will be

recognized as “1 (ON)”.

In case of CONT, an open, externally connected contact to which no voltage is applied, will be

recognized as “0 (OFF)”, whereas a closed contact will be recognized as “1 (ON)”.

The default setting is LEVL.

• DELTA (difference between channels)

Computation can be done only in the same unit. Destination channels should lie within the first

channel No. to the last channel No. range. The number of the reference channel should be lower

than the number of the destination channels. The default setting for the reference channel is 01.

The type of input and the measuring range in the distination channel are the same as for the

reference channel. After setting the DELTA (difference between channels), if you attempted to

change the type of input and the measuring range, setting the difference between channels is

released, thereby the type of input and the measuring range in the destination channel are

returned to their original settings, and the recording span is returned to its initial value.

• RRJC (Remote RJC, available if the instrument is equipped with the optional MATH function)

Reference channel (RJC): Within the setting range of reference channel No.

TC (thermocouple) must be selected as the type of input to the reference channel.

If the channel No. or type of input for the reference channel, or the type of thermocouple is

changed, the alarm and partial compression recording functions will be turned OFF.

If the type of input for the reference channel or the type of thermocouple is changed, the RRJC

settings will be cleared and the type of input and measuring range for the reference channel will

be set to the one which was in effect before the change was made. The recording span will be

set to the initial value of the measuring range.

• mA (DC current, mA input module)

This input can be set only for mA input channels. The measuring range is -20 mA to 20 mA.

Setting the Recording Span

The measurement range is decided according to the type of input. The recording left and right

span must lie within the measurement range. However, the recording span is 0 to 1 for the DI

input type. The value on the left side of the SPAN menu shows the left span, and the value on the

right side of the SPAN menu shows the right span.

For the remote RJC, the setting range for recording span is the same as that for the reference

channel.

5-4 IM DR232-01E

5.2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

001-10:SCL:VOLT/2V

SKIP VOLT TC RTD DI DELTA SCL

E S C

1 Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

001-01:VOLT/2V

>Select Channel No.

001-01:VOLT/2V

>Select Channel No.

001-01:VOLT/2V

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

001-01:SCL:VOLT/2V

20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V

SPAN=–2.0000/_2.0000V

>Span limit(–2.0000~2.0000V)

SCL=_ _ _0.00/_100.00

***SET OK***

001-01:SCL:TC/R

R S B K E J T N W L U KP

SPAN=_ _ _ _0.0/_1760.0˚C

>Span limit(0.0~1760.0˚C)

SCL=_ _ _0.00/_100.00

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

To the next page

5-5

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

5.2 Setting Linear Scaling and the Recording Span

001-01:SCL:RTD/PT1

PT1 PT2 JPT1 JPT2 PT50 NI1 NI2 NI3

CU1 CU2 CU3 CU4 PT1S PT2S JPT1S

JPT2S J263B

SPAN=–_200.0/_ _600.0°C

>Span limit(–200.0~600.0°C)

SCL=_ _ _0.00/_100.00

***SET OK***

001-01:SCL:DI/LEVL

LEVL CONT

SPAN=_ _ _ _ _ _0/_ _ _ _ _ _1

>Span limit(0~1)

SCL=_ _ _0.00/_100.00

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

From the previous page

The setting of the channel number is the same as explained in 5.1 on page 5-2. The following

explanation assumes that you already carried out the channel setting and that you selected “SCL”

as the input type.

Selecting the Input Type for Linear Scaling

The input type can be selected from the following. The default setting is VOLT.

• VOLT (DC voltage)

Refer to page 5-3.

• TC (thermocouple)

Refer to page 5-3.

• RTD (resistance temperature detector)

Refer to page 5-3.

• DI (contact)

Refer to page 5-3.

Setting the Recording Span

Refer to page 5-3.

Setting the Scaling Values (SCL)

The left scaling and right scaling values are set following the left and right span values of the span

menu. The value on the left side of the SCL menu shows the left scaling value, and the value on

the right side of the SCL menu shows the right scaling menu. The setting ranges from -30000 to

30000.

• The decimal point can be set in any position of the scale as shown below. Set it when the left

scale is set.

“.,” “ .,” “ .,” “ .,” or “ .”

• The default settings are 0.00 for the left span and 100.00 for the right span.

For details on setting the engineering units for linear scaling, refer to page 6-2.

5-6 IM DR232-01E

5.3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording

Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power

Monitoring Channel

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

SPAN= - 1250 / 1250W

RNG=250-5A/ V1 002:VA1

E S C

• Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu.

• Using and , select and/or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below.

• To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure, press the MODE (ESC) key.

This returns to the first item of the menu. Note, however, that your new settings and selections

are canceled.

• Reaching the step showing the message “***SET OK***” confirms the latest settings/

selections.

Setting the Measuring Range and Recording Span

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

(Main menu item)

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

SKIP AC SCALE

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

1Ph2W 1Ph3W 3Ph3W-2I 3Ph3W-3I 3Ph4W

RNG= 250V - 5A/P1

250V-0.5A 250V-5A 25V-0.5A 25V-5A

RNG= 250V - 5A/P1

P1 P3 P13

SPAN= - 125.0/125.0W

>Span Limit (- 125.0 to 125.0W)

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

Setting Linear Scaling

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

>Select Channel No.

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

>Select Channel No.

001-01:AC/1Ph3W

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

001-01:SCL:AC/1Ph3W

2k 20k 200k

RNG=250V-0.5A/P13

250V-0.5A 250V-5A 25V-0.5A 25V-5A

RNG=250V-0.5A/P13

P1 P2 P3 P13

SPAN=–125.0/125.0W

>Span limit(–125.0 to 125.0W)

SCL=0.00/100.00

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

ENTER

ESC

(Press twice)

ENTER

5-7

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

Setting the Channel Number

This procedure sets the channel number for which you want to show and record the values of a

parameter selected from the effective voltage, effective current, active power, reactive power,

apparent power, frequency, power factor and phase angle which were calculated using the

measured data. Therefore, it does not correlate with the terminals of an input module. In this

procedure, determine from which channel (starting channel) to which channel (ending channel)

you want to include in your configuration.

Starting Channel Number

The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number.

• The first digit is the unit number. The second digit denotes the module number (slot number).

• The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected.

See page 3-8 for more information.

Ending Channel Number

The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number.

Normally, the starting channel number and the ending channel number should be the same. If you

want to skip any consecutive number of channels, enter the range of those channel numbers.

• When you move the cursor from the starting to the ending channel number, the ending channel

number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number.

Setting the Wiring Method

Select from the following methods:

Single-phase two-wire (1Ph2W)

Single-phase three-wire (1Ph3W; three-wire input modules only)

Three-phase three-wire 2 Voltage 2 Current (3Ph3W-2I; three-wire input modules only)

Three-phase three-wire 3 Voltage 3 Current (3 Ph3W-3I; three-wire input module only)

Three-phase four-wire (3Ph4W; three-wire input modules only)

Setting the Input Range

Select from the following ranges:

250V-0.5A 250V-5A

25V-0.5A 25V-5A

This setting is common to all channels. Any change to this setting also changes the settings of the

rest of the channels. Impose a voltage or current signal to the input module within the limits you

set here.

Setting the Parameter Being Shown and Recorded

A power monitor module measures the voltage or current through the respective channels. The

values that are shown and recorded are not those of the voltage and current being actually

measured through each channel but the values of the parameters you set here.

A combination of parameters being measured is fixed for each group of channels 1-2, 3-4 and 5-6

within the same module. For example, setting channel 1 to P1 (active power 1) sets channel 2 to

VA1 (apparent power 1). In addition, the configurable parameters being measured varies

depending on the wiring method selected. See the lists on the next page for more information.

The respective mnemonics in the lists should be interpreted as noted below:

Vi (i=1, 2, 3) : effective voltage Ii (i=1, 2, 3) : effective current

V13 : (V1+V3)/2 I13 : (I1+L3)/2

V0 : (V1+V2+V3)/3 I0 : (I1+I2+I3)/3

Pi (i=1, 2, 3) : active power Vari (i=1, 2, 3) : reactive power

P13 : P1+P3 Var13 : PF1+PF3

P0 : P1+P2+P3 Var 0 : Var1+Var2+Var3

VAi (i=1, 2, 3) : apparent power PFi (i=1, 2, 3) : power factor

VA13 : VA1+VA3 PF13 : P13/(P132+Var132)1/2=P13/VA13

VA0 : VA1+VA2+VA3 PF0 : P0/(P02+Var02)1/2=P0/VA0

PHi (i=1, 2, 3) : phase FREQ : frequency

PH13 : tan–1 (Var13/P13)

PH0 : tan–1 (Var0/P0)

5.3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel

5-8 IM DR232-01E

CH1

CH2

VA1

CH3

CH4

CH5

PF1

Var1

FREQ

CH6

PH1

PF1

Single-phase two-wire configuration

CH1

P13

CH2

VA1

VA3

VA13

CH3

CH4

CH5

PF1

PF3

PF13

V13

FREQ

Var1

Var3

Var13

CH6

PH1

PH3

PH13

I13

PF1

PF3

PF13

Single-phase three-wire/three-phase three-wire configurations

(dual-voltage, dual-current; modules for three-phase use only)

CH1

P13

CH2

VA1

VA2

VA3

VA13

CH3

CH4

CH5

PF1

PF2

PF3

PF13

V13

FREQ

Var1

Var2

Var3

Var13

CH6

PH1

PH2

PH3

PH13

I13

PF1

PF2

PF3

PF13

Three-phase three-wire configuration

(triple-voltage, triple-current; modules for three-phase use only)

CH1

CH2

VA0

VA1

VA2

VA3

CH3

CH4

VA0

VA1

VA2

VA3

CH5

PF0

PF1

PF2

PF3

FREQ

Var0

Var1

Var2

Var3

CH6

PH0

PH1

PH2

PH3

PF0

PF1

PF2

PF3

VA0

VA1

VA2

VA3

Three-phase four-wire configuration

(modules for three-phase use only)

Select from these combinations.

Select from either of the

two groups of

combinations.

Select from either of the

two groups of

combinations.

5.3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel

5-9

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

Setting the Recording Span (SPAN)

Set the left and right spans within the limits of an input range. In the SPAN menu item, the left-

hand value is the left span and the right-hand value the right span. Set the recording span within

the measuring range. The measurable limits vary depending on the measuring range you select,

as shown below.

25V-0.5A 25V-5A 250V-0.5A 250V-5A

Effective voltage 0.00 to 25.00Vrms 0.00 to 25.00Vrms 0.0 to 250.0Vrms 0.0 to 250.0Vrms

Vi (i=1,2,3,13,0)

Effective current 0.0000 to 0.5000Arms 0.000 to 5.000Arms 0.0000 to 0.5000Arms 0.000 to 5.000Arms

Ii (i=1,2,3,13,0)

Active power –12.50 to 12.50W –125.0 to 125.0W –125.0 to 125.0W –1250 to 1250W

P1,P2,P3

Active power –25.00 to 25.00W –250.0 to 250.0W –250.0 to 250.0W –2500 to 2500W

P13

Active power –37.50 to 37.50W –375.0 to 375.0W –375.0 to 375.0W –3750 to 3750W

Apparent power 0.00 to 12.50VA 0.0 to 125.0VA 0.0 to 125.0VA 0 to 1250VA

VA1,VA2,VA3

Apparent power 0.00 to 25.00VA 0.0 to 250.0VA 0.0 to 250.0VA 0 to 2500VA

VA13

Apparent power 0.00 to 37.50VA 0.0 to 375.0VA 0.0 to 375.0VA 0 to 3750VA

VA0

Reactive power 0.00 to 12.50Var 0.0 to 125.0Var 0.0 to 125.0Var 0 to 1250Var

Var1,Var2,Var3

Reactive power 0.00 to 25.00Var 0.0 to 250.0Var 0.0 to 250.0Var 0 to 2500Var

Var13

Reactive power 0.00 to 37.50Var 0.0 to 375.0Var 0.0 to 375.0Var 0 to 3750Var

Var0

Power factor –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00

PFi(i=1,2,3,13,0)

Phase –80.0 to 80.0deg –80.0 to 80.0deg –80.0 to 80.0deg –80.0 to 80.0deg

PHi(i=1,2,3,13,0)

Frequency 45.00 to 65.00Hz 45.00 to 65.00Hz 45.00 to 65.00Hz 45.00 to 65.00Hz

FREQ

Precautions in Measurement

• Input the voltage or current being measured at a level between 10% and 100% of the measuring

range. The DR recorder bases its calculations of all other parameters on the frequency of V1.

Extra care must therefore be taken when setting the input level of V1. If the input level fails to

fall within the given limits, there is no guarantee that the measurement of any other parameters

will be reliable.

5.3 Configuring the Input Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Power Monitoring Channel

5-10 IM DR232-01E

5.4 Configuring the Measuring Range and

Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a

Strain Input Channel

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

001-01:STRAIN/200k

> Select Channel Number

SPAN=–20000/ 20000 * 10µε

E S C

• Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu.

• Using and , select and/or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below.

• To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure, press the MODE (ESC) key.

This returns to the first item of the menu. Note, however, that your new settings and selections

are canceled.

• Reaching the step showing the message “***SET OK***” confirms the latest settings/

selections.

Setting the Measuring Range and Recording Span

001-01:STRAIN/200k

>Select Channel No.

001-01:STRAIN/200k

>Select Channel No.

(Main menu item)

001-01:STRAIN/200k

2k 20k 200k

SPAN=–20000/_20000

>Span limit(–20000 to 20000*10 µε)

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

ENTER

ESC

Setting Linear Scaling

001-01:STRAIN/200k

>Select Channel No.

001-01:STRAIN/200k

>Select Channel No.

001-01:STRAIN/200k

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

001-01:SCL:STRAIN/200k

2k 20k 200k

SPAN=–20000/_20000

>Span limit(–20000 to 20000 *10µε)

SCL=-100.00/_100.00

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Press twice)

ENTER

5-11

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

Setting the Channel Number

Set the channel number for which you want to configure the type of input, recording span and so

on. In this procedure, determine from which channel (starting channel) to which channel (ending

channel) you want to include in your configuration.

Starting Channel Number

The first three digits on the main display constitute the starting channel number.

• The first digit is the unit number. The second digit denotes the module number (slot number).

• The configurable range depends on the location where the power monitor module is connected.

A strain input module takes up twice the space of a standard-size module. This results in the

number of the slot following the one where the strain input module is installed being a missing

number. See page 3-8 for more information.

Ending Channel Number

The two digits that follow the starting channel number constitute the ending channel number.

• For the configurable range, see “Starting Channel Number” above.

• You cannot enter a channel number that is smaller than the starting channel number.

• If you have entered the same number as the starting channel number, only that one particular

channel is included in your configuration (configuration of the type of input, recording span,

etc.).

• When you move the cursor from the starting to the ending channel number, the ending channel

number becomes the same as the last two digits of the starting channel number.

Setting the Recording Span (SPAN)

Set the left and right spans within the limits of the input range. In the SPAN menu item, the left-

hand value is the left span and the right-hand value the right span.

Note

If you have connected any new strain gauge or changed the measuring range (initialization of settings or

reconfiguration of the system also changes the measuring range back to its default), you must go through

initial balancing. See Section 5.5, “Performing Initial Balancing/Initialization on a Strain Input Channel,”

for more information.

5.4 Configuring the Measuring Range and Recording Span or the Linear Scaling of a Strain Input Channel

5-12 IM DR232-01E

5.5 Performing Initial Balancing/Initialization on a

Strain Input Channel

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

INIT BALANCE

>Select Function item

E S C

• Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu.

• Using and , select and/or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below.

• To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure, press the MODE (ESC) key.

This returns to the first item of the menu. Note, however, that your new settings and selections

are canceled.

• If you have made changes to any item executable with the FUNC key, information on initial

balancing may not appear on the display.

Performing Initial Balancing

ALARM ACK

INIT_BALANCE

(Operating status)

ENTER

(Main menu item)

BALANCE CH=001-010

>Select Channel No.

BALANCE MODE = EXEC

ABORT EXEC INIT

Balancing... *

> CHANNEL = 001-60

>OK 001

>OK 031

ENTER

Initializing the Strain Input Channels

ALARM ACK

INIT_BALANCE

(Operating status)

ENTER

(Main menu item)

BALANCE CH=001-010

>Select Channel No.

BALANCE MODE = INIT

ABORT EXEC INIT

ENTER

Indication of the Status of Initial Balancing

If you have performed initial balancing, the DR recorder shows whether the initial balancing is

successful or not in the following format. Using the $ and $ keys, you can change the unit

number for which you want the status shown.

> CHANNEL = 001-60

>OK 001

>OK 031

Module-by-module status indication

: successful end of initial balancing

: unsuccessful end of initial balancing

Starting channel

Note

• This function is disabled during making a report.

• The following operations are stopped when this function is performed.

• Recording

• Saving data to the memory and reading data from it.

• Computing

5-13

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Input Type/Recording Span/Linear Scaling

5.6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

001-01:PULSE/RATE

SKIP PULSE

SPAN= 0/ 6000

E S C

• Press the RANGE key to enter the RANGE menu.

• Using and , select and/or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below.

• To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure, press the MODE (ESC) key.

This returns to the first item of the menu. Note, however, that your new settings and selections

are canceled.

• Reaching the step showing the message “***SET OK***” confirms the latest settings/

selections.

001-01:SKIP

001-01:SKIP 001-01:SKIP

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

ENTER

ESC

001-60:PULSE/RATE

RATE GATE

SPAN=

_ _ _ _ _ _

_ 30000

>Span limit(0 to 30000)

SCL=

_ 30000

>SPAN(0/30000)

FILTER=ON

ON OFF

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

ENTER

ESC

5-14 IM DR232-01E

Types of Input

• Pulse Input Measurement (PULSE)

Select this option when measuring pulse input.

• Skip (SKIP)

No measurement is done.

Measurement Mode

Select the mode used in pulse input measurement. Use the computing function when summing

the count or turn-on time over a given period of time.

• Instantaneous Count Mode (RATE)

Select this option when determining the count for one second.

• Instantaneous Turn-on Time Mode (GATE)

Select this option when detecting the on/off states by means of variations in the instantaneous

value every second.

Span (SPAN)

Set the upper and lower limits of the pulse count and turn-on time. The maximum configurable

value is 30000.

Scale (SCL)

Set the upper and lower limits of the pulse count and turn-on time. The maximum configurable

value is 30000.

Configure this menu item when converting the scale values to those of a system of units suited for

your purpose. The maximum configurable range is 0-30000, excluding the decimal point.

Count/sec

03000

100

Revolution

rpm

Span Lower

Scale Lower

Span Upper

Scale Upper

Filter On/Off (FILTER)

Set this menu item to ON when eliminating chatter (up to 5 ms).

Unit (UNIT)

Configure this menu item when assigning a unit to the measured value. See Section 6.1, “Setting

the Recording Mode, Engineering Unit, Recording Channel and Recording Interval,” (on page 6-

1) for more information on how to assign the unit.

5.6 Configuring the Pulse Input Channel

6-1

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

6.1 Setting the Recording Mode, Engineering Unit,

Recording Channel and Recording Interval

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=SYSTEM

SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

SET=

SYSTEM

UNIT

TREND

SYSTEM=LOGGING

***SET OK***

SYSTEM=TREND

TREND=FIX

FIX AUTO

***SET OK***

001-01:UNIT=_ _ _ _ _ _

>Select Channel No.

001-01:UNIT=_ _ _ _ _ _

>Select Channel No.

001-01:UNIT=Ω_ _ _ _ _

>↓%&()+-*/.:˚ µ ε 0123- - -89 ABC- - -KL↑

***SET OK***

001-01:TREND=ON

>ON 001

>Select Channel No.

001-01:TREND=ON

>ON 001

>Select Channel No.

001-01:TREND=ON

>ON 001

OFF ON

***SET OK***

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

To the next page

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

Delete two lines of description in Japanese in this position.

6-2 IM DR232-01E

6.1 Setting the Recording Mode/Engineering Unit/Recording Channel and Recording Interval

TIMER TIMER No.=1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1:TIMER MODE=RELATIVE

1:TIME=00 01: 00

>Set DD HH:MM:00

***SET OK***

1:TIMER MODE=ABSOLUTE

1:TIME=1h

1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min

12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h

8h 12h 24h

1:REF TIME=00:00

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

From the previous page

Recording Mode (SYSTEM)

The following types of recording mode can be selected. The default is TREND.

• LOGGING (LOGGING MODE); measurement values will be printed out as digital values.

• TREND (ANALOG TREND MODE); measurement values will be recorded as analog trends

(dot recording) and printed out as digital values.

• Selecting the recording interval

This setting can only be done for the TREND mode, and its default setting is AUTO.

FIX: Recording takes place at intervals equal to the measurement period (scan interval).

However, if the measuring period is 0.5 or 1 second, the recording interval is fixed to 2

seconds. The measured data during the excess period is ignored.

AUTO: recording takes place at intervals automatically decided by measurement interval and

chart speed.

Engineering Unit (UNIT)

An engineering unit of up to six characters can be assigned to each channel. The default setting is

all spaces.

The characters/numbers can be selected by cursor from the displayed row on sub-display 1. An

engineering unit can only be assigned to channels to which linear scaling is applied. For details

concerning entering characters/numbers, refer to page 6-15.

If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, make

sure that channel Nos. are set between A01 and A60 when specifying the measurement units for

computation channels.

Setting the Channels to be Recorded (TREND)

Dot Recording

Recording can be set ON/OFF per channel. The default setting is ON.

ON: recording will take place;

OFF: recording will not take place.

The display will show “ ” for channels set to ON, and “ ” for channels set to OFF. Refer to

page 4-10 on which channel is being displayed.

If you are installing optional computation channels, channel Nos. must be set to A01 to A60.

Digital Printout in the Analog Trend Mode

Refer to 6.4 Setting Tag, Digital Printout and Manual Printout on page 6-9.

6-3

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

6.1 Setting the Recording Mode/Engineering Unit/Recording Channel and Recording Interval

Setting the Recording Interval (TIMER) of the Digital Printout for the Logging and

Analog Trend Mode

• TIMER No.

You can set up to six recording intervals. A recording interval can be set for each channel

individually. Refer to 6.4 on page 6-9 for details.

• TIME MODE

The following two modes can be selected. The default is RELATIVE.

• RELATIVE; the number of days/hours/minutes can be set to any value between 00 days 00

hours 01 minute to 31 days 23 hours and 59 minutes, in one-minute steps. The default

setting is 00 days, 01 hours and 00 minutes.

• ABSOLUTE; the time interval can be selected from the following settings. The default

setting is 1h.

1min, 2min, 3min, 4min, 5min, 6min, 10min, 12min, 15min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2h, 3h, 4h,

6h, 8h, 12h, and 24h.

The reference time is set by the hour and minutes. The default value is 00 hrs, 00 min.

6-4 IM DR232-01E

6.2 Setting the Chart Speed

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=CHART

CHART CLOCK

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

Setting Chart Speed 1

1 Press the CHART key to enter the SET menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

CHART CHART SPEED=_100mm/H

>Chart Speed Max 1500mm/H

***SET OK***

ENTER ENTER

ESC

(Main menu) (Lower menu)

Setting Chart Speed 2

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

SET=

CHART2 SECOND SPEED=_100mm/H

>Chart Speed Max 1500mm/H

TIMER MODE=RELATIVE

TIME=00 01:00

>Set Day & Time DD HH:MM:00

***SET OK***

TIMER MODE=ABSOLUTE

TIME=1h

1min 2min 3min 4min 5min 6min 10min

12min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 3h 4h 6h

8h 12h 24h

REF TIME=00:00

***SET OK***

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-5

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

6.2 Setting the Chart Speed

Chart Speed 1 (CHART)

This setting specifies the chart speed of ordinary trend recordings. The setting ranges from 1 to

1500mm/h, in 1 mm steps. The default setting is 100mm/h.

Chart Speed 2 (CHART2)

This setting consists of a chart speed and recording interval. Depending on the Event/Action

function (refer to 9.1 on page 9-1), the chart speed and recording interval will change into chart

speed 2 and its corresponding interval.

• Chart speed 2 setting

This setting is the same as for chart speed 1, and its default setting is 100mm/h.

• Recording interval

This setting specifies the recording interval for the digital prinout in the logging and analog

trend recording mode. One type of recording interval can be set. The setting is done the same

way as described on page 6-3, although only one type can be set.

6-6 IM DR232-01E

6.3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially

Expanded Recording

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=ZONE

CHART2 ZONE PARTIAL TAG DIGITAL_PR MAN↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

SET=

ZONE

PARTIAL

001-01:ZONE=_ _0 to 250mm

>Select Channel No.

001-01:ZONE=_ _0 to 250mm

>Select Channel No.

001-01:ZONE=_ _0 to 250mm

>Left limit(0 to 245mm)

001-01:ZONE=_ _0 to 250mm

>Right limit(5 to 250mm)

***SET OK***

001-01:PARTIAL=OFF

>ON 001 - - -

001-01:PARTIAL=OFF

>ON 001 - - -

001-01:PARTIAL=OFF

***SET OK***

001-01:PARTIAL=ON

RATE 50%=_0.0000V

>Rate Limit(1 to 99%)

RATE 50%=_0.0000V

>Boundary Limit(–1.9999 to 1.9999V)

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-7

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

Setting Recording Zones (ZONE)

This setting specifies the recording zones for each channel. The set left and right position of the

zone correspond to the left and right span set at the SPAN menu (recording span). The left value

of the ZONE menu corresponds to the value of the left position of the zone, whereas the right

value of the ZONE menu corresponds to the value of the right position of the zone.

Zones can be set in 1mm steps and cannot exceed the recording range (i.e. 250mm). The left

position setting ranges from 0 to 245mm, whereas the right position setting ranges from 5 to

250mm. The minimum width of a zone is 5mm. A decimal point cannot be set. The default

settings are 0mm for the left position and 250mm for the right position.

If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this

setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60.

Partially Expanded Recording (PARTIAL)

This setting specifies whether to carry out partially expanded recording, and if so, which

percentage of the recording span will be compressed and the corresponding boundary value.

If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this

setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60.

Selecting Partial Recording ON/OFF

ON: Partial recording will be carried out;

OFF: Partial recording will not be carried out.

The default setting is OFF.

Specifying the Compressed Part and Boundary Value

RATE

This setting specifies which percentage (1 to 99%) of the full recording span will be

compressed. The default value is 50%.

Boundary value

This setting specifies the boundary value which corresponds to the previous set compressed

part. The setting lies within the recording span, but when linear scaling is being used, the

setting lies within the left/right scale range. The default value is 0.

Note

If boundary values are to be set for succeeding channels, the decimal point is handled as shown below.

If succeeding channels are set, the decimal point position of boundary values when the measurement range

for each channel setting is different, is that determined for each corresponding range. As a result, it exceeds

the measurable range, an error occurs.

For example, if channels whose measurement ranges are 20 mV, 2 V, and type T thermocouple are set and

the boundary value is set to 10000, the following applies:

The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is 20 mV: 10.000 mV;

The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is 2 V: 1.0000 V; and

The boundary value of the channel whose measurement range is type T thermocouple: 1000.0 °C

As the measurement range of type T thermocouple is -200.0 to 400.0 °C, an error occurs for this channel.

For decimal point positions for each measurement range, see Chapter 14, “Specifications.”

Points to Note when Using Partially Expanded Recording

• Partial recording cannot be carried out if the input type of the computation channels is SKIP or

DI or if the computation channels are OFF.

• Partially expanded settings will be automatically canceled when either of the following changes

occur.

• the input type has been changed;

• the measurement range has been changed;

• the recording span has been changed;

• linear scaling settings have been changed;

• the reference channel for difference between channels has been changed.

6.3 Setting Recording Zones and Partially Expanded Recording

6-8 IM DR232-01E

6.4 Setting Tag, Digital Printout and Manual

Printout

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=TAG

CHART2 ZONE PARTIAL TAG DIGITAL_PR MAN↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

001-01:TAG=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>TAG=[

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

]

>Select Channel No.

001-01:TAG=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>TAG=[

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

]

>Select Channel No.

001-01:TAG=12345678901

>TAG=[1234567890123456]

↓%&()+-*/.:- - - 0123456789 ABC- - -KL↑

***SET OK***

001-01:DIGITAL PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:DIGITAL PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:DIGITAL PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

OFF ON

DIGITAL PR TIMER No.=1

1 2 3 4 5 6

001-01:MANUAL PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:MANUAL PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:MANUAL PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

OFF ON

***SET OK***

TAG

DIGITAL PR

MANUAL PR

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

***SET OK***

In case “SINGLE” is set as log interval at

the “RECORD” setting in the SET UP mode.

ENTER

ESC

In case “MULTIPLE” is set as log interval at

the “RECORD” setting in the SET UP mode.

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-9

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

Tag Setting

A tag of up to 16 characters can be assigned to each channel. If the instrument is equipped with

the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this setting can also be made for

computation channels A01 to A60. The characters/numbers for the tag can be selected by cursor

from the displayed row on sub-display 1. For details on the number of characters which will be

printed, refer to 10.2 on page 10-4. For details on the number of characters which will be

displayed, refer to 4.1 on page 4-2. To select whether the tag or channel number are displayed/

printed, refer to 10.2 on page 10-4. The default settings are all spaces. For details concerning

entering characters/numbers, refer to page 6-15.

Digital Printout Setting (DIGITAL PR)

This setting can be selected for each channel from the following. This setting applies to the digital

print of the analog mode and logging mode. The default setting is ON.

OFF: Digital printout will not be carried out for this channel;

ON: Digital printout will be carried out for this channel.

The recording interval can be selected from the following. For details on LOG INTERVAL, refer

to 10.2, page 10-6.

If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this

setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60.

When LOG INTERVAL is set to SINGLE:

The recording interval is decided automatically, depending on the chart speed, and the columns

of channels to be printed.

When LOG INTERVAL is set to MULTIPLE:

The recording interval can be selected from six timer settings. The default value is 1. For

details on the timer setting, refer to 6.1, page 6-3.

Columns selecting

Refer to 10.2, page 10-5.

Manual Printout Setting (MANUAL PR)

This setting can be selected from the following. The default setting is ON.

If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this

setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60.

OFF: Manual printout will not be carried out for this channel;

ON: Manual printout will be carried out for this channel.

6.4 Setting Tag, Digital Printout and Manual Printout

6-10 IM DR232-01E

6.5 Setting the Alarm Printout

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=ALARM_PR

↓TIAL TAG DIGITAL_PR MANUAL_PR ALARM_PR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

001-01:1/ALARM PR=ON2

>Select Channel No.

001-01:1/ALARM PR=ON2

>Select Channel No.

001-01:1/ALARM PR=ON2

1 2 3 4

001-01:1/ALARM PR=ON2

OFF ON1 ON2

MSG ON ALARM=OFF

OFF 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 20

***SET OK***

ALARM PR

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

In case

of OFF

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-11

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

Selecting the Alarm Items

Although up to four alarm headings can be set per channel, this setting specifies the number of the

heading which will be printed. The default setting is 1.

If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this

setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60.

For details on alarm settings, see 8.1, “Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal switches”

(on page 8-1).

Selecting the Alarm Printout (ALARM PR)

This setting can be selected from the following. The default setting is ON2.

OFF: Alarm printout will not be carried out;

ON1: Alarms will only be printed out on occurrence.

The alarm occurrence mark, channel No. or tag, type of alarm, alarm heading or time of

occurrence will be printed with trend recordings.

ON2: Alarms will both be printed out on occurrence and release.

The alarm occurrence/release mark, channel No. or tag, type of alarm, alarm heading or time of

occurrence/release will be printed with trend recordings.

Alarm Printout Buffer

• Analog Trend Mode

Up to 30 alarm occurrences/releases can be stored in memory.

• Information on more than 30 alarm occurrences/releases will be discarded. After one alarm

printout, 29 alarm occurrences/releases are stored and another alarm occurrence/release can

then be stored.

• If 31 alarm occurrences/releases (exceeding the allowed number of 30) are entered, an

asterisk (*) will be printed at the top of the alarm message when 30 alarm printouts are

executed.

• The alarm buffer clear function is available for canceling the stored alarm printout

information (see page 9-17).

• Logging Mode

Up to 10 alarm occurrences/releases can be stored in memory.

• Information on more than 10 alarm occurrences/releases will be discarded.

• If 11 alarm occurrences/releases (exceeding the allowed number of 10) are entered, an

asterisk (*) will be printed at the top of the alarm message when 10 alarm printouts are

executed.

• The alarm buffer clear function is available for canceling the stored alarm printout

information (see page 9-17).

Selecting a Message Printout

This setting specifies whether to print a message on alarm occurrence, and if so, which message

will be printed. The default setting is OFF.

OFF: No message will be printed.

Message No.

This setting can be selected from 01, 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17,

18, 19 and 20. When a message No. has been selected where no message has been entered,

printout will not be carried out.

For details on setting messages, refer to 6.7 on page 6-15.

6.5 Setting the Alarm Printout

6-12 IM DR232-01E

6.6 Setting Scale Printout, List Printout and List

Format

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=SCALE_PR

↓DIGITAL_PR MANUAL_PR ALARM_PR SCALE PR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

001-01:SCALE PR=ON2

>Select Channel No.

001-01:SCALE PR=ON2

>Select Channel No.

001-01:SCALE PR=ON2

OFF ON1 ON2 ON3

***SET OK***

001-01:LIST PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:LIST PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:LIST PR=ON

>ON 001 - - -

OFF ON

***SET OK***

LIST RANGE=ON

OFF ON

LIST ALARM=ON

OFF ON

LIST PRINT=ON

OFF ON

LIST OTHER=ON

OFF ON

***SET OK***

SCALE PR

LIST PR

LIST FMT

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-13

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

Scale Printout (SCALE PR)

This setting can be assigned to each channel individually. The scaled values will be printed out

with trend recordings. This printout will not occur when a zone of 49mm or less is set. The scaled

values of the following channels will be printed. For example, when the recording zone of ch. 1 is

set to 49mm, and of ch. 2 is 150mm, the scaled values of ch. 2 will be printed at the position of

ch. 1. The default setting is ON2. If the instrument is equipped with the optional computation

function or floppy disk drive, this setting can also be made for computation channels A01 to A60.

When Partial Expanded Recording is OFF

OFF: Scaled values will not be printed.

ON1:

• when the recording zone is 150mm or more: scaled values at each 20%-interval of the

recording span will be printed at positions at 20%-intervals of the zone.

• when the recording zone is 50mm to 149mm: scaled values at 0% and 100% of the

recording span will be printed at 0% and 100% positions of the zone.

ON2:

Scaled values at 0% and 100% of the recording span will be printed at 0% and 100% positions

of the zone.

ON3:

• when the recording zone is 100mm or more: scaled values at 0%, 50% and 100% of the

recording span will be printed at 0%, 50% and 100% positions of the zone.

• when the recording zone is 50mm to 99mm: scaled values at 0% and 100% of the recording

span will be printed at 0% and 100% positions of the zone.

When Partial Expanded Recording is ON

OFF: Scaled values will not be printed.

ON1/ON2/ON3:

• when the recording zone is 100mm or more: scaled values at 0%, 100% of the recording

span and at the boundary value will be printed at 0%, 100% and boundary value positions of

the zone.

• when the recording zone is 50mm to 99mm: scaled values at 0% and 100% of the recording

span will be printed at 0% and 100% positions of the zone.

List Printout (LIST PR)

This setting can be assigned to each channel individually. The default setting is ON. Starting a list

printout can be done at the PRINT menu (refer to 7.2 on page 7-2). If the instrument is equipped

with the optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this setting can also be made for

computation channels A01 to A60.

OFF: List printout will not be printed.

ON: Setting information per channel will be printed.

Setting the List Format (LIST FMT)

This setting specifies which setting information will be printed out in case of list printouts. Each

of the following lists can be selected ON or OFF, and the default setting is ON.

LIST RANGE (information about the setting range)

Information about settings related to tags, type of input, recording span, linear scaling and

computation equation.

LIST ALARM (information about the alarm settings)

Alarm settings

LIST PRINT (information about the printing settings)

Information about settings related to analog trend recording, digital printout, interpolation,

recording zones, partial expanded recording, recording interval of digital printouts for logging

mode and analog mode, moving average, scaled values, alarm printout, manual printout and data

saving ON/OFF.

LIST OTHER (information about other settings)

Information about settings related to match time, groups, headers, messages, event/action

function, list format and computation constant.

Information which always be included in a list printout, regardless of the above settings, are title,

measurement interval, recording interval (trend), chart speeds 1 and 2, recording mode and time.

6.6 Setting Scale Printout, List Printout and List Format

6-14 IM DR232-01E

6.7 Entering Messages, Headers and Title

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MESSAGE

↓ LIST_PR LIST_FMT MESSAGE HEADER TITLE↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MESSAGE No.=01

MSG01=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>MSG01=[_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ]

↓%&()+-*/.:- - - 0123456789 ABC- - -KL↑

MESSAGE No.=02

MSG02=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>MSG02=[_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ]

↓%&()+-*/.:- - - 0123456789 ABC- - -KL↑

: :

MESSAGE No.=20

MSG20=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>MSG20=[_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ ]

↓%&()+-*/.:- - - 0123456789 ABC- - -KL↑

MESSAGE No.=COPY

COPY MSG01 TO MSG01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

COPY MSG01 TO MSG02

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

MESSAGE

ENTER

To the next page

ENTER

ESC

***SET OK***

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-15

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

HEADER LINE No.=1

1 2 3 4 5

LINE1=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>1=[

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

]

↓%&()+-*/.:- - - 0123456789 ABC- - -KL↑

***SET OK***

TITLE=

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>=[

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

]

↓%&()+-*/.:- - - 0123456789 ABC- - -KL↑

***SET OK***

HEADER

TITLE

ENTERENTER

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ESC

From the previous page

Entering a Message

MESSAGE No. (selection of the message No.)

Up to 20 messages can be entered.

MSG01 to 20 (entering the message)

The message contents can be entered here using up to 16 characters. Characters and numerals

can be selected from the menu. The default setting is all spaces.

COPY (copying messages)

The contents of an entered message (message No. at the left side of the setting) can be copied to

another message number (at the right side of the setting). You cannot copy to the same message

number.

Printing out a message

A message can be printed out on the occurrence of an alarm (refer to 6.5 on page 6-11 for

details), using the FUNC menu (refer to 7.3 on page 7-3 for details), or using the event/action

function (refer to 9.1 on page 9-1 for details).

Displaying a message

A message can be displayed on the main display using the even/action function.

Entering a Header

HEADER LINE No. (selection of the header line)

One header can consist of up to five lines.

LINE 1 to 5 (entering one line of the header)

The header contents can be entered here using up to 80 characters for each line, and thus up to

400 characters for the entire header. Characters and numerals can be selected from the menu.

The default setting is all spaces.

Entering a Title

One title can be set, using up to 32 characters. Characters and numerals can be selected from the

menu. The default setting is all spaces.

Inserting/Deleting a Character or Numeral

Press the PRINT(DEL) key to delete a set character or numeral. The digit at the location of the

cursor will be deleted.

Press the FUNC(INS) key to insert a character or numeral. The digit at the location of the cursor

will become a space, while all the characters/numeral at the right side of the cursor will move one

digit to the right.

6.7 Entering Messages, Headers and Title

6-16 IM DR232-01E

6.8 Setting Match Time, Moving Average,

Interpolation and Groups

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MATCH_TIME

↓TLE MATCH_TIME MOVE_AVE INTERPOL GROUP↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

1 Press the SET key for three seconds to enter the SET3 menu.

2 Select/set using the keys.

3 To escape from a lower menu, press the “MODE (ESC)” key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

4 New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MATCH TIME No.=1

1 2 3

1:TIME=01 00:00

>Set Day & Time DD HH:MM:00

***SET OK***

001-01:MOVE AVE=0

>Select Channel No.

001-01:MOVE AVE=0

>Select Channel No.

001-01:MOVE AVE=0

>2~64:Move Average Number [0=OFF]

***SET OK***

001-01:INTERPOL=OFF

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:INTERPOL=OFF

>ON 001 - - -

>Select Channel No.

001-01:INTERPOL=OFF

OFF ON

***SET OK***

GROUP No.=G01

G01 G02 03 G04 G05 G06 G07

G01=001,010-020

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

>=[

_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _

]

, –_ 0123456789

***SET OK***

MATCH TIME

MOVE AVE

INTERPOL

GROUP

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ESC

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

6-17

IM DR232-01E

Setting the Recording Conditions

Setting the Match Time

MATCH TIME No. (selection of the match time number)

Three kinds of match times can be set.

TIME

Any time between 00 days, 00 hrs., 00 min. and 31 days, 23 hrs, 59 min. can be set in 1-minute

units. The default setting is 01 days 00 hrs 00 min.

If 00 is set to day (DD), HH:MM every day shows the set time. If day (DD) is set to a value

other than 00, HH:MM of DD day every month shows the set time. DD, HH, and MM give the

set numeric values respectively.

The match time setting is used with the event/action function. Refer to 9.1 on page 9-1 for details.

Moving Average (MOVE AVE)

This setting can be set for each channel individually. The number of samples used for the moving

average can be set from 2 to 64. The default value is 0, which means that no moving average is

carried out. The result of the moving average is being displayed/printed.

Interpolation (INTERPOL)

This setting can be set for each channel individually. If the instrument is equipped with the

optional computation function or floppy disk drive, this setting can also be made for computation

channels A01 to A60. The default setting is OFF.

OFF: no interpolation will be carried out.

ON: interpolation will be carried out according to the priority of recording colors. The priority of

recording colors is black > purple > redish purple > navy blue > red > blue > brown > green >

orange > yellowish green.

Group setting (GROUP)

• GROUP No. (selection of the group number)

Up to seven groups can be set.

• G01 to G07

This setting specifies which channel numbers will be included in one group. A “,” is used for

entering a single channel, while a “-” can be used to enter a range of channels. Setting the same

channel two or more times in one group causes an error. For example, if you configure G01 as

003, 001-010, an error will result because 003 is included in this range. The default setting is

001.

• The group setting is used with the event/action function. Refer to 9.1 on page 9-1 for details.

6.8 Setting Match Time, Moving Average, Interpolation and Groups

7-1

IM DR232-01E

Executing Recording

7.1 Starting Dot Printing, Digital Printing and

Printing in Logging Mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

E S C

RECORD

To start recording

Press the RECORD key. The status display [RECORD] lights.

To stop recording

Press the [RECORD] key once again. The status display [RECORD] turns off.

To feed the recording paper

Press the [FEED] key.

Starting dot printing, digital printing, and recording in logging mode

• See Chapter 6, “Setting.”

• Event/action functions can also be used to perform the above printing and recording (see Page

9-1).

Feeding the recording paper

Press the [FEED] key to feed the recording paper. Even if the [FEED] key is pressed while

recording, the paper is fed without stopping the recording.

Notes on starting recording

The carriage will stop temporarily at the left or right side for each line as shown below.

• When printing in logging mode or manual printing:

Printing direction Channel no./TAG selection Temporary stop (in seconds)

Horizontal Channel 4

TAG of 7 to 8 characters 3

TAG of 9 to 16 characters 5

Vertical Channel 2

TAG of 7 to 16 characters 3

• List printing

Temporary stop: For 0.5 secondsList printing

7-2 IM DR232-01E

7.2 Starting Manual Printing, List Printing and

Header Printing

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

MAN_PR_START

MAN_PR_START LIST_START HEADER_START

>Enter & Print Start/Stop

E S C

• Press the [PRINT] key to enter the print menu.

• To display the print menu from the [RANGE][ALARM] or [CHART][SET] (SET3) menu,

press the [DISP] key.

MAN PR START

LIST START

HEADER START

ENTER

Starting the manual print (MAN PR START)

• Press the [ENTER] key to start manual printing.

• After printing starts, the operation display mode appears.

• During manual printing, the menu displays “MAN PR STOP.”

• During manual printing, enter the PRINT menu again and select [MAN PR STOP]. Then press

the [ENTER] key to stop the manual printing.

• After manual printing terminates or stops, the display returns to [MAN PR START].

Starting the list print (LIST START)

• Press the [ENTER] key to start list printing. For details on setting the time for temporarily

stopping printing, see the previous page.

• After list printing starts, the operation display mode appears.

• During list printing, the menu displays [LIST STOP].

• During list printing, if the PRINT menu is displayed to select the [LIST STOP] and the

[ENTER] key is then pressed, the list printing stops.

• After list printing terminates or stops, the display returns to [LIST START].

Starting the header print ( HEADER START)

• To start the header print, press the [ENTER] key.

• After header printing starts, the operation display mode appears.

• During header printing, the [HEADER STOP] menu appears.

• During header printing, if the PRINT menu is displayed to select the [HEADER STOP] and the

[ENTER] key is then pressed, the header printing stops.

• After header printing terminates or stops, the display returns to [HEADER START].

Notes on starting the above menus

• If the above menus are executed, analog trend recording will stop. After returning from the

menus, analog trend recording resumes.

• While the above menus are being executed, if any other menu is selected, the previous menu is

first executed and the later menu is then executed.

• See Chapter 6 for details on setting the above menus.

7-3

IM DR232-01E

Executing Recording

7.3 Starting Message Printing

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

MSG_PRINT

>Select Function item

E S C

• Press the [FUNC] key to enter the FUNC menu.

• To display the print menu from the [RANGE][ALARM] or [CHART][SET] (SET3) menu,

press the [DISP] key.

• Select / set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings / selections will not be kept.

MSG PRINT PRINT MESSAGE No.=01

ENTER ENTER

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

Starting message printing (MSG PRINT)

• Select a message number from 01 to 20. For details on how to set the message, see Section 6.7,

“Entering Messages, Headers and Titles” on page 6-15.

• While the instrument is recording, if the [ENTER] key is pressed, messages are printed.

• If an alarm occurs, messages are also printed. See Section 6.5, “Setting the Alarm Printout” on

page 6-11.

Message printout buffer

• Analog trend

Up to 10 message printouts can be stored in memory.

• Information exceeding 10 message printouts will be discarded.

• After one message printout, 9 are stored and another printout message can then be stored.

• If 11 message printouts (exceeding the allowed number of 10) are entered, an asterisk (*)

will be printed at the top of the message when 10 message printouts are executed.

• The message buffer clear function is available for canceling stored printout messages (see

page 9-17).

• Logging mode

Up to 5 message printouts can be stored in memory.

• Information exceeding 5 message printouts will be discarded.

• If 6 message printouts (exceeding the allowed number of 5) are entered, an asterisk (*) will

be printed at the top of the message when 5 message printouts are executed.

• The message buffer clear function is available for canceling stored printout messages (see

page 9-17).

7-4 IM DR232-01E

7.4 Printing Set-up Lists

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

S/U_LIST_START

>Select Function item

E S C

S/U_LIST_START ALM_BUF_CLEAR MSG_BUF_C↑

• Press and hold the [FUNC] key for three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu.

S/U LIST START

ENTER

Printing the set-up list (S/U LIST START)

Prints a list of the settings made in the SETUP menu. For details of the settings and their values,

see Chapter 10.

• Press the [ENTER] key to start printing the set-up list.

• After printing starts, the operation display mode appears.

• During list printing, the [S/U LIST STOP] menu appears.

• During list printing, if the FUNC3 menu is displayed to select the [S/U LIST STOP] and the

[ENTER] key is then pressed, the list printing stops.

• After the list print terminates or stops, the display returns to the [S/U LIST START].

• If the setup list printing starts, analog trend recording will stop. After the printing is completed,

analog trend recording resumes.

8-1

IM DR232-01E

Setting, Displaying and Recording Alarms

8.1 Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal

switches)

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

001–01:1/OFF

1=OFF 2=OFF 3=OFF 4=OFF

E S C

• Press the [ALARM] key to enter the ALARM menu.

• Select / set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings / selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you rach the final display of that setting.

001-01:1/OFF

>Select Channel No.

001-01:1/OFF

>Select Channel No.

001-01:1/OFF

1 2 3 4

001-01:1/OFF

***SET OK***

001-01:1/H_=_ _ _0.00

>Alarm Limit(0.00~100.00)

RELAY=OFF

***SET OK***

RELAY=S01

***SET OK***

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

Selecting channel Nos.

Channels Nos. A01 to A60 are available for computation channels (optional).

Selecting the alarm item number

Set the alarm item number for each channel as follows:

• Select any number from among 1, 2, 3, and 4.

• Alarm numbers 1 to 4 can be set for one channel.

• For details on setting the alarm printout, see Section 6.5, “Setting the Alarm Printout” on page

6-10.

Note

• If SKIP is selected for the input type or if the computation channels are OFF, alarms cannot be set.

• If the following cases, the alarm is set to OFF:

• If the input type or measuring range in the related channel is changed,

• If computation channels are turned ON/OFF or the computation equation is changed.

• If the recording span for the linear scaling, or linear scaling values is changed, or

• If the standard channel for differential computation between channels is changed.

• Setting the alarm or relay (including internal switches) gives more functions to this recorder. For details,

see Section 9.1, “Setting Event and Action Functions” on page 9-1.

8-2 IM DR232-01E

Selecting the type of alarm

• Select an alarm type for each alarm number from among the following:

• OFF (default set): No alarm is set.

• H: Upper-limit alarm. An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the upper-limit

alarm setpoint.

• L: Lower-limit alarm. An alarm occurs when the measured value exceeds the lower-limit

alarm setpoint.

• RH: Rate-of-change upper-limit alarm. An alarm occurs when the measured value changes

in the increasing direction within a certain time (rate-of-change alarm interval) and exceeds

the upper-limit alarm setpoint.

• RL: Rate-of-change lower-limit alarm. An alarm occurs when the measured value changes

in the decreasing direction within a certain time (rate-of-change alarm interval) and exceeds

the lower-limit alarm setpoint.

• dH: An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the alarm setpoint.

This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential computation is selected,

and can be set as a type of alarm.

• dL: An alarm occurs when the difference between two channels exceeds the lower-limit

alarm setpoint. This only applies to a channel for which interchannel differential

computation is selected, and can be set as a type of alarm.

• For details on the rate-of-change alarm interval setting or other basic alarm settings, see Section

10.3, “Select Alarm Interval/Hystresis/Hold/A/D Converter integration Timer/filter” on page

10-8.

• For details on interchannel differential computation, see Section 5.1, “Setting the Type of Input

and Recording Span” on page 5-3.

• Only H (upper-limit alarm) and L (lower-limit alarm) are available for computation channels.

Setting alarm values

Set one alarm value for each alarm number within the following range, depending on the type of

input. The default value is 0 (zero).

• H and L

• VOLT, TC, RTD, DI, and DELTA: Within the measuring range in the related channel. DI

can be set to either 0 or 1.

• SCALE: Within a linear scaling value.

• Computation channel: Within the range specified by the computation function

• RH and RL

• VOLT, TC, RTD, DI, and DELTA: Within 1 to [maximum measuring range minus

minimum measuring range] in the related channel. For example, set 30000 (without using a

decimal point) if the maximum value exceeds 30000. DI can be set to only 1.

• SCALE: Set 1 to 30000 without using a decimal point.

• dH and dL

• When the standard channel uses VOLT: Within the measuring range.

• When the standard channel uses other than VOLT: [maximum measuring range minus

minimum measuring range] to - [maximum measuring range minus minimum measuring

range]

• For the type of input, see Section 5.1, “Setting the Type of Input and Recording Span” on page

5-3.

Note

When setting alarm values in continuous channels, use the decimal point as follows:

The decimal point of an alarm value when the continuous channels have different measuring ranges

should be in the position determined by the individual measuring range. If the decimal point is outside

the measuring range, an error occurs. For example, if channels with measuring ranges 20 mV and 2 V,

and a type T thermocouple channel, are all set to an alarm value of 10000, then the alarm values in the

respective channels are as follows:

10.000 mV in the 20 mV measuring range channel

1.0000 V in 2 V measuring range channel

1000.0°C in the type T thermocouple channel

A type T thermocouple has a measuring range from -200.0 to 400.0°C, so an error results. For details on

the decimal point positions in individual measuring ranges, see Chapter 14, “Specifications.”

8.1 Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal switches)

8-3

IM DR232-01E

Setting, Displaying and Recording Alarms

Setting Relays (Internal Switches)

Set which alarm output relay or internal switch should be triggered when an alarm occurs:

• Select the desired alarm output relay or internal switch from among the following. The default

setting is OFF.

• OFF: Alarm output relays and internal switches remain OFF.

• S01 to S60: 60 internal switches are provided.

• UMN

U: Unit number for an alarm module or a DI/DO module. M: Slot number for an alarm

module or a DI/DO module. N: Number 0 to 9. For details, see page 3-8.

• 0M1 to 0M2: /R1 option. M = Slot number for a DI/DO module. Two relays are provided.

• For the model with both /A4 and /R1 options, both the above can be selected

simultaneously.

• Multiple alarm setpoints can be set for one alarm output relay or internal switch.

• The operation mode in the alarm output relay or internal switch can be set when an alarm

occurs. For details, see Section 10.4, “Setting Operation Mode of Relay/Internal Switch” on

page 10-9.

• When the alarm module on the DI/DO modules are not recognized as system modules, the relay

is st to OFF. For the system recognition, see page 9-17.

8.1 Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal switches)

8-4 IM DR232-01E

8.2 Alarm Display and Printing

CHART

KEYLOCK

RECORD

ALARM

Alarm display

• When an alarm status is detected and an alarm is issued, the [ALARM] lights.

• To display the alarm status for each channel, see Section 4.4, “Using the ALARM SEARCH

Display” on page 4-7 or Section 4.6, “Using the ALARM STATUS Display” on page 4-10.

• To display the alarm output relay or internal switch status, see Section 4.7, “Using the RELAY

STATUS Display” on page 4-11.

• If an alarm occurs while the alarm display hold (ALARM HOLD) is ON (because the alarm has

already been triggered), the [ALARM] and alarm status displays flash. Even after the alarm

status is released, the displays still flash.

• When the alarm status hold function is ON, use the alarm acknowledge function to determine

the current status of the alarm. To do this, display the FUNC menu, select ALARM-ACK, then

press the [ENTER] key to use the alarm acknowledge function. For details, see Section 2.4,

“Alarm Function” on page 2-15.

Alarm printing

For details on setting the alarm printing, see Section 6.5, “Setting the Alarm Printout” on page 6-

10. The alarms are printed after making this setting.

Alarm reset

This function is selected from the FUNC menu when the relay hold function (see page 10-11) is

activated. To use the alarm reset function, select [ALARM RST], then press the ENTER key to

use the alarm reset function. For details on the alarm reset, see Section 2.4, “Alarm Function” on

page 2-15.

9-1

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=LOGIC

SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

Selection of the logic box and event [NONE]

ENTER

LOGIC LOGIC BOX NO.=01

(01~30)

EVT=NONE

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ESC

***SET OK***

To the next page From the following page

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

9-2 IM DR232-01E

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

Selection of event (REMOTE)/actions

The [REMOTE] menu is displayed only with the models with DI/DO module.

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with models with the /M3 option.

EVT=REMOTE:1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

ENTER

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ACT=LEVL/SPEED CHG

ACT=LEVL/GR TREND:G01

G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07

ACT=LEVL/MATH

ACT=LEVL/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=LEVL/REPORT

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

ENTER

From the previous page To the previous page

ENTER

9-3

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

Selection of event (ALARM)/actions

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with models with the /M3 option.

ENTER

EVT=ALARM

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ACT=LEVL/SPEED CHG

ACT=LEVL/GR TREND:G01

G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07

ACT=LEVL/MATH

ACT=LEVL/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=LEVL/REPORT

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

To the previous page

From the previous page

ENTER

9-4 IM DR232-01E

Selection of event (RELAY)/actions

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with models with the /M3 option.

ENTER

EVT=RELAY:S01

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ACT=LEVL/SPEED CHG

ACT=LEVL/GR TREND:G01

G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07

ACT=LEVL/MATH

ACT=LEVL/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=LEVL/REPORT

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

To the previous page

From the previous page

ENTER

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-5

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

Selection of event (CHART END)/actions

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with /M3 option.

ENTER

EVT=CHART END

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ACT=LEVL/SPEED CHG

ACT=LEVL/GR TREND:G01

G01 G02 G03 G04 G05 G06 G07

ACT=LEVL/MATH

ACT=LEVL/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=LEVL/REPORT

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

To the previous page

From the following page

ENTER

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-6 IM DR232-01E

Selection of event (TIMER)/actions

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with models with /M3 option.

ENTER

EVT=TIMER:1

1 2 3 4 5 6

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

To the previous page

From the previous page

ENTER

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-7

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

Selection of Event (MFUNC KEY)/actions

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with models with /M3 option.

ENTER

EVT=MFUNC KEY:1

1 2

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

To the previous page

From the previous page

ENTER

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-8 IM DR232-01E

Selection of event (MATCH TIME)/actions

The [MATH] menu is displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1 and models with the /M1

option.

The [MEMRY] and [FLOPPY] menus are displayed only with the DR232-1/DR242-1.

The [REPORT] menu is displayed only with models with the /M3 option.

ENTER

EVT=MATCH TIME:1

1 2 3

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/ALARM RST

ACT=EDGE/TIMER RST

ACT=EDGE/RECORD:OFF

OFF ON

ACT=EDGE/MANUAL PR

ACT=EDGE/DIGITAL PR

ACT=EDGE/MSG PR:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MSG DISP:01

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10

11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

ACT=EDGE/MATH:START

START STOP CLEAR RESET

ACT=EDGE/FLAG:F01

F01 F02 F03 F04 F05 F06 F07 F08 F09 F10

F11 F12 F13 F14 F15 F16

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

DATA_WR WR_TRIG RD_TRIG LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/FLOPY:LD_TRG1

LD_TRG1 LD_TRG2 LD_TRG3

ACT=EDGE/REPORT:START

START STOP

ACT=LEVL/RECORD

ENTER

To the next page From the following page

To the previous page

From the previous page

ENTER

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-9

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

When an event is detected, this menu allows you to set and execute a certain action.

Selection of logic (LOGIC) box number

• Select a box number from among 01 to 30 for storing a combination logic from events to

actions.

• Select the same number as the box number already indicating events and actions, and set an

event and action to overwrite the logic number.

Selection of events (EVT)

Select any event from among the following:

• NONE — releases the event/action setting.

• REMOTE

• This menu is displayed only with the DI/DO modules that are recognized as system modules

(see page 9-16).

• When a remote control signal is applied, the action is executed.

• There are 12 control signals available. Select any control signal from these numbers for

event setting. Remote control signal terminal numbers are applicable for this selection. See

page 3-19 for the remote control terminal numbers.

• ALARM

If an alarm occurs, the action is executed. See Section 8.1, “Setting Alarms and Relays

(including internal switches),” on page 8-1 for setting alarms.

• RELAY

If the selected internal switch or relay is operating, the action is executed. When the alarm

module or the DI/DO modules are not recognized as system modules (see page 9-16), the relay

is set to OFF. See Section 8.1, “Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal switches),” on

page 8-1 for setting internal switches and relays.

• CHART END

When the end of the chart is detected, the action is executed.

• TIMER

• If the selected timer’s set time is up, the action is executed. Six timers are available. Select

any from among these timers. See Section 6.1, “Setting the Recording Mode/Engineering

Unit/Recording Channels/Recording Interval,” on page 6-3 for the timer setting provided

earlier in this manual.

• In combination with the level action, the action is repeated alternately between executing

and stopping each time the timer’s set time is up.

• MFUNC KEY

• When the M.FUNC key on the operation panel is pressed, the action is executed. Select

either M.FUNC 1 or M.FUNC 2.

• In combination with the level action, the action is repeated alternately between executing

and stopping each time the M.FUNC key is pressed.

• MATCH TIME

• When the set time is reached, the action is executed.

• There are three types of applicable MATCH TIMEs. Select any of them. For details, see

Section 6.8, “Setting Match Time, Moving Average, Interpolation and Groups,” on page 6-

17 provided earlier in this manual.

• In combination with the level action, the corresponding action is repeated alternately

between executing and stopping for each set time.

Selecting edge or level action

• Edge action (EDGE)

This action is executed when an event is detected.

• Level action (LEVEL)

This action is executed when an event is detected. When an event is released, this action will

be canceled.

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-10 IM DR232-01E

Selection of actions

An action that can be selected varies depending on the events and edge or level action. See the

individual procedures. The following describe all actions available.

• ALARM ACK

This allows alarm acknowledgment. For the applicable functions, see Section 2.4, “Alarm

Function,” on page 2-15.

• ALARM RST

This resets alarms. When the “RELAY” is selected for an event, this function cannot be

selected.For the applicable functions, see Section 2.4, “Alarm Function,” on page 2-15.

• TIMER RST

This resets timers. For the applicable functions, see Section 2.3, “Recording Functions,” on

page 2-8.

• RECORD

• ON: Starts recording. The recording format is set individually. For details, see Section

10.2, “Setting Recording Format,” on page 10-3.

• OFF: Stops recording. The level action does not include record ON/OFF functions.

• When the level action is set, the ON/OFF functions using the RECORD key are disabled.

• The edge and level actions cannot be set simultaneously.

• For the level action, only one action is available.

• MANUAL PR

This enables manual printing. For applicable functions, see Section 2.3, “Recording

Functions,” on page 2-12.

• DIGITAL PR

• Digital printing starts in the analog trend mode. The recording intervals depend on the timer

setting (see Section 2-8). When the event/action functions are set, normal digital print

functions are disabled.

• Only one function can be set in the event/action functions.

• MSG PR

• Prints messages. For details, see Section 7.3, “Starting Message Printing,” on page 7-3.

• Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20.

• MSG DISP

• Displays messages. For details, see Section 7.3, “Stating Message Printing,” on page 7-3.

• Select any message from the corresponding codes 01 to 20.

• To cancel the message display, press any key.

• SPEED CHG

• Changes chart speed 1 to chart speed 2. When the recording interval is set to automatic

(page 6-3), the recording interval is also changed. When the event is released, the chart

speed and recording interval return to their original positions.

• Only one function can be set in the event/action functions.

• GR TREND

• This executes the recording in a channel in which the group setting (page 6-17) has already

been made. For this, set the dot-recording (see on page 10-4) to “ GROUP” and start

recording by key operations following the “RECORD” given above.

• Select any group from G01 to G07.

• Only one identical group can be set in the event/action functions.

Note

·If Chart End appears, counter-actions such as RECORD ON are not executed.

·Actions such as RECORD or SPEED CHG may operate later than an event occurrence. For example,

with RECORD set in the action setting, if an alarm occurs, the measured values in that condition are not

recorded. This is because recording operations are delayed due to an action operation.

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-11

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

• MATH (available if the instrument is equipped with the MATH function or floppy disk drive)

• START: Starts computation.

• STOP: Stops computation.

• RESET: Resets computation channel data at the end of completion of the first computation

in case an event takes place.

• CLEAR: Resets computation channel data immediately in case an event takes place.

• RST_G01 to RESET_G07: Resets the computing channel data registered in the specified

group number to 0. This is invalid for measuring channels. The timing for resetting the data

is as follows.

Reset here

Not reset

Computed value

Start computing Event

• If MATH is selected as a level action, computation will be carried out while an event is

present. Computation will stop when the event is cleared.

• MEMORY (available with the DR232-1/DR242-1 equipped with the floppy disk drive)

• DATA_WR: Saves a data item each time an event occurs, until the specified data length is

reached.

• WR_TRIG: Saves measured/computed data on the built-in RAM disk.

• RD_TRIG: Reads measured/computed data from the built-in RAM disk.

• LD_TRG1-3: Reads setup data from the built-in RAM disk.

• FLOPY (available only with the DR231-1 or DR241-1 equipped with a floppy disk drive)

• LD_TRG1-3: Reads setup data from the floppy disk.

• FLAG (only for /M1 optional model)

• F01 to 16: Set the flag number (F01 to F16) to 1. F01 to F16 are normally 0. Flags can be

placed in computing equations to hold the computed result using a certain event as a trigger,

or reset to 0.

• REPORT (available if the instrument is equiped with the REPORT function.)

• START (Edge action): Starts making up a report.

• STOP (Edge action): Stops making up a report.

• REPORT (Level action): Starts/stops making up a report.

Note

• If, in the SETUP mode, the report function is set to OFF for all data items, you cannot select the action

item REPORT.

9.1 Setting Event/Action Functions

9-12 IM DR232-01E

9.2 Copying

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=COPY

SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC COPY

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

COPY RANGE=ON

OFF ON

COPY ALARM=ON

OFF ON

COPY OTHER=ON

OFF ON

COPY 001ch TO 002-10ch

***SET OK***

COPY

ENTER

ESC

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

9-13

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

Selecting range copying (COPY RANGE)

• ON: Copies the type of input, measuring ranges, recording spans, linear scaling, engineering

units, and tags set.

• OFF: The copying of ranges is disabled.

Selecting alarm copying

• ON: Copies the type of alarm, alarm values, and relay (internal switch) setting.

• OFF: The copying of alarms is disabled.

Selecting copying of other items (COPY OTHER)

• ON: Copies setting recording zones, partial compressions, dot-recording ON/OFF, digital

printing ON/off, manual printing ON/OFF, alarm printout ON1/ON2/OFF, scale-value printout

ON1/ON2/ON3/OFF, list-printout ON/OFF, average numbers in moving averages,

interpolation ON/OFF and measured data saving ON/OFF.

• OFF: The copying of other items is disabled.

Setting a copy-source channel

Sets a copy-source channel with up to three characters. For details on these characters, see

Section 4-1, “Using Auto Display,” on page 4-2.

Setting a destination channel to be copied

Sets a channel to which the setting data in the source channel are copied.

• When the COPY RANGE, COPY ALARM and COPY OTHER are set to ON, individual set

data are copied.

• For the setting of a destination channel number, see Section 5.1, “Setting the Type of Input and

Recording Span,” on page 5-2.

• It is not possible to copy data between measurement channels and computation channels.

Copying Data from a Computation Channel

When copying from an optional computation channel is carried out, the following data will be

copied.

• When COPY RANGE is ON : Computation equation, tag

• When COPY ALARM is ON : Alarm

• When COPY OTHER is ON : Zone, partial compressions, trend ON/OFF, digital printing

ON.OFF, alarm printout ON1/ON2/OFF, scale-value printout

ON/OFF, manual printing ON/OFF, list-printout ON/OFF,

interpolation ON/OFF,

9.2 Copying

9-14 IM DR232-01E

9.3 Alarm Acknowledgment, Alarm Reset, Timer

Reset, Keylock, and Message Printout

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

TIMER_RESET

>Select Function item

E S C

• Press the FUNC key to enter the FUNC menu.

• To enter the FUNC menu from the [RANGE], [ALARM], [CHART], or [SET ](SET3) menu,

press the DISP key.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• There may be some menus that are not displayed by basic settings in Chapter 10.

ALARM ACK

ALARM RST

TIMER RESET

MATH START

MATH CLR START

MATH STOP

MATH ACK

KEY LOCK ON

MSG PRINT

ENTER

Operating status

ENTER

(Main menu)

ENTER

PRINT MESSAGE No.=01

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

(Lower menu)

A CODE NUMBER=2888

ENTER ENTER

*1: Displayed when computation is not in progress (i.e. when stopped).

*2: Displayed when computation is in progress (i.e. when started).

*3: Displayed only when incomplete measurement occurs during computation.

Note

·If MATH is selected as a level action, MATH START, MATH CLR START and MATH STOP will not

be displayed.

9-15

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

Any of the following functions are executed by pressing the ENTER key. After that, the recorder

returns to the operation mode.

Alarm acknowledgment (ALARM ACK)

• When the alarm display hold (ALARM HOLD), on page 10-8 is set to ON, the alarm

acknowledgment menu appears.

• For the alarm display hold functions, see Section 2.4, “Alarm Function,” on page 2-15.

Alarm reset (ALARM RST)

• When the relay hold function (on page 10-11) is set to ON, the alarm reset menu appears.

• For the alarm reset functions, see Section 2.4, “Alarm Function,” on page 2-15.

Timer reset (TIMER RESET)

• For the timer reset functions, see Section 2.3, “Recording Functions,” on page 2-8.

Computation start (MATH START)

• Starts computation. For details, refer to Chapter 12, “Executing Computation”.

Computation clear start (MATH CLR START)

• Clears computation results then re-starts computation.

Computation stop (MATH STOP)

• Stops computation.

Clearing Incomplete Measurement Status (MATH ACK)

• Clears the status indication displayed due to incomplete measurement which occurred during

computation.

Keylock function (KEY LOCK ON)

• For the keylock functions, see Section 2.6, “Other Functions,” on page 2-17.

• The KEY LOCK ON is displayed after selecting the keylock (see page 10-16).

• Enter a password (A CODE NUMBER) and then press the ENTER key to actuate the keylock

functions. The KEY LOCK OFF menu then appears.

• Enter the FUNC menu, select KEY LOCK OFF and then enter a password (A CODE

NUMBER). Press the ENTER key to release the keylock functions. The menu returns to KEY

LOCK ON.

• To set a password, see page 10-16.

• When the keylock functions are actuated, the “KEYLOCK” lights up.

Message printout (MSG PRINT)

• Prints out messages. For details, see Section 7.3, “Starting Message Printing,” on page 7-3.

• Select a message from the corresponding code 01 to 20.

9.3 Alarm Acknowledgment, Alarm Reset, Timer Reset, Keylock, and Message Printout

9-16 IM DR232-01E

9.4

Clearing Alarm/Message Buffers, Displaying Module/

Communications Information, Structuring System

Modules, and Initializing Information

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

ALM_BUF_CLEAR

>Select Function item

E S C

↓ALM_BUF_CLEAR MSG_BUF_CLEAR MODULE_INF↑

• Press and hold the FUNC key for about three seconds to enter the FUNC3 menu.

• To enter the FUNC menu from the [RANGE], [ALARM], [CHART], or [SET] (SET3) menu,

press the DISP key.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• There may be some menus that are not displayed by basic settings in Chapter 10.

ALM BUF CLEAR

MSG BUF CLEAR

MODULE INF

COMM INF

RE SYSTEM

RAM INIT

S UNIT0:INF=SYSTEM

0 1 2 3 4 5

S UNIT0:INF=SYSTEM

SYSTEM REAL

MODULE=GP-IB

>ADDR=01

MODULE=RS-232C

>BIT RATE=19200 LENGTH=8BIT PARITY=NONE

>STOP=1BIT HANDSHAKE=OFF:OFF

RE SYSTEM=NO

RE SYSTEM=YES

SYSTEM RESTRUCTING

RAM INIT=NO

RAM INIT=YES

RAM INITIALIZING

ENTER

Operating status

ENTER

(After about

15 seconds)

ENTER

(After about 10 seconds)

ENTER

(For GP-IB interface)

(For RS-232-C interface)

ENTER

(Lower menu)

(Main menu)

9-17

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

Any of the following functions are executed and displayed by pressing the ENTER key, the last

key of the lower menu. After that, the recorder returns to the operation mode.

Clearing the alarm buffer (ALM BUF CLEAR)

Cancels all information in the alarm buffer; see page 6-11.

Clearing the message buffer (MSG BUF CLEAR)

Cancels all information in the message buffer; see page 7-3.

Displaying information set in the modules (MODULE INF)

• Selection of unit numbers (S UNIT)

• Select I from the main unit or 0 to 5 from the sub-unit.

• The unit number that is not recognized for the system cannot be selected.

• Module information (INF)

Displays the information in the module installed in the slot.

• SYSTEM: Displays the information recognized as the system module.

• REAL: Displays the real module information when the recognized system module is

replaced by another one or removed.

• If the SYSTEM displays information different from that of REAL module, the following

system must be configured. Otherwise, an operation error may occur or the recorder may

display measured values incorrectly.

• The information on individual modules is displayed as follows:

Module Display ID inside the display ( ) Description

Input module INPUT 00 to 3F

DI/DO module REMOTE 57

Alarm module RELAY 5C to 5F

Communication module COMM 48 to 4F

Module not installed –––––– FF

Invalid module installed ====== FE

Module error XXXXXX Displays error code (80 to FF).

Displaying communications information (COMM INF)

When the communication module is recognized as a system module, communications information

is displayed. For details on the communication information, see Section 3-5 “Connecting the

Interface Cables,” on page 3-14 or the separate DR231/232/DR241/DR242 Communication

Interface User’s Manual (publication number IM DR231-11E).

System configuration (RE SYSTEM)

Modules are recognized as system modules for this recorder.

• NO: Modules are not recognized as system modules.

• YES: Modules are recognized as system modules. It takes about 15 seconds to recognize

system modules.

Note

• After completing the system configuration, if you attempt to do the following, and then configure the

system again, the setting information for the corresponding module position (slot) will be initialized.

• Install modules with different model codes/style numbers into slots.

• Remove modules.

• Add modules.

• When you attempt the following, you should first configure the DR232/242 system to operate the

instrument correctly. After executing the system configuration, check the module information.

• Sub-unit connections (including additions and replacement)/removal/unit-number setting

• Installation (including additions and replacement)/removal of modules

• If the installed modules are not recognized in the system configuration, check that the:

• same unit number is not used or that the setting is out of range,

• number of modules does not exceed the allowed number,

• modules and units are connected properly, and

• power supply is operating properly.

Initialization (RAM INIT)

This initializes information other than the basic information set in Chapter 10 or calibration set in

Chapter 11. For details on initial setting, see the appropriate sections and explanations. All the

files in the internal RAM disk will be lost when the RAM is initialized.

• NO: Initialization not executed

• YES: Initializes the information. It takes about ten seconds to initialize the information.

9.4 Clearing Alarm/Message Buffers, Displaying Module/Communications Information, Structuring System

Modules, and Initializing Information

9-18 IM DR232-01E

9.5 Fail/Chart End Output, and Remote Control

Signal Input

Function

See Section 2.6, “Other Functions,” on page 2-17.

Connections and Notice

See Section 3-7, “Connecting the Signal Lines,” on page 3-20.

9-19

IM DR232-01E

Event/Action Function and Other Functions

9.6 Summer/Winter Time

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=DST

SYSTEM UNIT TREND TIMER LOGIC DST COPY

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

SET TIME=SUMMER

SUMMER WINTER

SUMMER=96/05/01 00

>Set Data & Time YY/MM/DD HH:00:00

***SET OK***

DST

ENTER

ENTERENTER

ESC

SET=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

Using this funcion the DR will autonatically change its date and time to the summer time or

winter time when appropriate.

If you specify SUMMER, the time will be ajusted to one hour later when the specified date and

time is reached.

If you specify WINTER, the time will be ajusted to one hour earlier when the specified date and

time is reached.

When the set time is reached, the setting will return to its intial value of 50/01/01 00.

The value of the years are as follows : 00 to 49 stand for the year 2000 to 2049, whereas 50 to 99

stand for the years 1950 to 1999.

10-1

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot-Printing Position

or Scan Interval

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=PRN_ADJ

PRN_ADJ SCAN_INTVL RECORD ALARM A/D_IN↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

Recording Mode (SYSTEM)

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

SET UP=

PRN ADJ

SCAN INTVL

PRINTER HYS=–_ _ _2

>Hys Limit(– 50~ 50)

PRINTER ZERO=_ _326

>Zero Limit (1~500)

PRINTER FULL=_2506

>Full Limit (2400~2600)

***PRINTER SET***

SCAN INTERVAL=0.5 (sec)

0.5 1 2 3 4 5 6 10 12 15 20 30 60

***SCAN INTVL SET***

ENTER

ESC

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

10-2 IM DR232-01E

10.1 Selecting Adjustment of Dot-Printing Position or Scan Interval

In the [PRN ADJ] menu, three lines are dot-printed according to the left and right movements of

the carriage.

Adjustment of Dot-printing Shift (HYS)

Dots are printed in a line along the length of the chart almost in the middle following the right and

left movements of the carriage. If these dots shift either to the left or the right, make a straight

line by adjusting the HYS setting.

• The setting range is -50 to 50.

• The set value 1 corresponds to about 0.1 mm of the dot-printing position.

Adjustment of Zero Position (ZERO)

If a line composed of printed dots shifts from the scale line at the left end of the chart, have the

line of dots just overlap the scale end line by adjusting the ZERO setting.

• The setting range is 1 to 500.

• The set value 1 corresponds to about 0.1 mm of the dot-printing position.

Adjustment of Full-scale Position

If a line composed of printed dots shifts from the scale line at the right end of the chart, have the

line of dots just overlap the scale end line by adjusting the FULL setting.

• The setting range is 2400 to 2600.

• The set value 1 corresponds to about 0.1 mm of the dot-printing position.

Selection of Scan Interval (SCAN INTVL)

• Select 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30 and 60 seconds as the interval.

• The default setting is 0.5 seconds.

• The shortest selectable scan interval varies with the setting of the number of input channels, A/

D converter integration time, or filter ON/OFF. For details, see chapter 14.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10-3

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.2 Setting Recording Format

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=RECORD

PRN_ADJ SCAN_INTVL RECORD ALARM A/D_IN↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

SET UP=

CH OR TAG=CHANNEL

CHANNEL TAG

TAG PRINT LEN=7

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

TREND MODE=NORMAL

NORMAL ALARM1 ALARM2 GROUP

SPEED CHANGE PR=ON

OFF ON

ON/OFF MARK PR=ON

OFF ON

DIGITAL PR CLMN=1

1 2 3 4

CHANNEL PITCH=5.0mm

OFF 5.0mm 12.5mm

TITLE PITCH=1500mm

OFF 600mm 1500mm

SCALE TIC PR=OFF

OFF ON

LOG FORMAT=HORIZON

HORIZON VERTICAL

LOG INTERVAL=SINGLE

SINGLE MULTIPLE

***RECORD SET***

ENTER

ESC

RECORD

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

10-4 IM DR232-01E

10.2 Setting Recording Format

Selection of Channel Number or Tag (CH OR TAG)

Select the call name for printing or displaying the measured values of either CHANNEL or TAG.

• Select either CHANNEL or TAG. However, if the TAG setting includes all spaces (vacant),

the channel is printed or displayed regardless of selection.

• The default setting is CHANNEL.

• For the TAG setting, see Section 6.4, “Setting Tag, Digital Printout and Manual Printout” (page

6-8).

Selection of Number of TAG Printing Characters

• Select 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15 or 16.

• The default setting is 7.

• If the number of printing characters is less than the set TAG set in Sect. 6. 4. Only the

number selected here will be printed.

• For the number of characters when displaying, see chapter 4.

Selection of Dot-printing Recording System

Select it from the following systems. The default setting is NORMAL. To practically record it,

the RECORD must be turned on. Channels to be recorded are those selected to be ON in “Setting

the Channels to be Recorded, Dot Recording” on page 6-2.

• NORMAL:

• Records all channels to be recorded.

• ALARM1:

• Records only those channels in which alarms are generated.

• Continues recording even if the alarm is reset.

• ALARM2:

• Records only the channels in which alarms are generated.

• Stops recording when the alarm is reset.

• GROUP:

• Records the channels which are set into a group (see page 6-16).

• Recording can be done only if “GR TREND” is set in the event/action function.

10-5

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.2 Setting Recording Format

Selection of Printing When Chart Speed Is Changed (SPEED CHANGE PR)

When the chart speed is changed in dot-recording, select whether to print with the changed chart

speed or not.

• OFF: does not print.

• ON: prints.

• The default setting is ON.

Selection of Printing Record-Start/Stop Time (ON/OFF MARK PR)

In dot recording, select whether the record-start/stop time is printed or not.

• OFF: not printed.

• ON: printed.

• The default setting is ON.

Selection of Number of Columns for Digital Printing (DIGITAL PR CLMN)

Select to print measured values for the number of channels in a horizontal line.

• Select 1, 2, 3, or 4.

• The default setting is 1.

• If TAG has been selected in selecting the channel number/TAG, this is limited to 3 columns.

• If TAG uses 16 characters, the TAG entry is limited to two columns.

Selection of Channel Number Printing Pitch (CHANNEL PITCH)

In dot recording, select how many millimeters are taken as the channel number printing interval.

When TAG has been selected in channel number/TAG selection, the TAG corresponding to the

channel number is printed.

• OFF: not printed.

• 5.0 mm: printed every 5.0 mm.

• 12.5 mm: printed every 12.5 mm.

• The default setting is 5.0 mm.

Selection of Title Printing Pitch (TITLE PITCH)

In dot recording, select how many millimeters are taken as the title printing interval. For setting a

title, see Section 6.7, “Entering Messages, Headers and Title” (page 6-15).

• OFF: not printed.

• 600 mm: printed every 600 mm.

• 1500 mm: printed every 1500 mm.

• The default setting is 1500 mm.

Selection of Scale Check Mark Printing (SCALE TIC PR)

In dot recording, select whether a tic mark indicating the scale mark positions is printed or not.

For setting the scale mark printing, see Section 6.6, “Setting Scale Printout, List Printout and List

Format” (page 6-13).

• OFF: not printed

• ON: printed

• The default setting is OFF.

Selection of Horizontal or Vertical Printing (LOG FORMAT)

In logging mode, select either horizontal or vertical printing of the channel number/TAG. For

examples of printing, see Section 2.3, “Recording Functions” (page 2-7).

• HORIZON: printed horizontally.

• VERTICAL: printed vertically

• The default setting is HORIZON.

10-6 IM DR232-01E

10.2 Setting Recording Format

Selection of Recording Interval in Digital Printing/ Logging Mode (LOG INTERVAL)

Select recording of the channel number/TAG and measured values whether at one interval or at a

selected interval for each channel from the 6 timers. For the setting of the timer, see Section 6.1,

“Setting the Recording Mode/Engineering Unit/Recording Channel and Recording Interval” (page

6-3), and for the selection of the timer for each channel, see Section 6.4, “Setting Tag, Digital

Printout and Manual Printout” (page 6-9).

• SINGLE:

• Digital print: The interval is determined by the chart speed and the number of columns to be

printed. See the table in chapter 14 (page 14-3).

• Logging mode: interval for timer No. 1

• MULTIPLE: intervals selected for each channel from 6 kinds of timers for either Digital

printing or the Logging mode.

• The default setting is SINGLE.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10-7

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.3 Select Alarm Interval/Hysteresis/Hold/A/D

Converter Integration Time/Filter

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=ALARM

↓TVL RECORD ALARM A/D_INTG FILTER RELAY↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

ALARM RH TIME=8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ALARM RL TIME=8

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

ALARM HYS=0.5%

0.0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5

0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

ALARM HOLD=OFF

OFF ON

***ALARM SET***

S UNIT0:A/D INTG=AUTO

AUTO 50Hz 60Hz 100ms

***A/D INTG SET***

FILTER=OFF

OFF ON

***FILTER SET***

ESC

ENTER

ENTERENTER

ESC

ALARM

A/D INTG

FILTER

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

ENTER

SET UP=

10-8 IM DR232-01E

10.3 Select Alarm Interval/Hysteresis/Hold/A/D Converter Integration Time/Filter

Selection of Interval for High Limit of Rate-Of-Change Alarm (ALARM RH TIME)

Set the number of measurement repeats in “Interval = measurement interval x measurement

repeats.”

• Select 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, or 15.

• The default setting is 8.

Selection of Interval for Low Limit of Rate-Of-Change Alarm (ALARM RL TIME)

• The same selection method as the above.

Selection of Alarm Hysteresis (ALARM HYS)

Applied to high/low limit alarm.

• Select 0.0, 0.1, 0.2, 0.3, 0.4, 0.5, 0.6, 0.7, 0.8, 0.9 or 1.0%.

• The default setting is 0.5%.

Selection of Alarm Display Hold (ALARM HOLD)

Select whether the alarm display is held or not when the alarm is reset.

• OFF: hold

• ON: not hold

• The default setting is OFF.

Selection of A/D Converter Integration Time (A/D INTG)

Select each A/D converter integration time for each unit. Select it from the following:

• AUTO: the frequency of 50/60 Hz is automatically switched corresponding to the power

frequency of this instrument.

However, AUTO does not function on the the subunit of the DC power supply model.

Selecting “AUTO” will set the A/D integration time to 20 ms (50 Hz).

• 50 Hz: the integration time is set to 20 ms (50 Hz).

• 60 Hz: the integration time is set to 16.7 ms (60 Hz).

• 100 ms: the integration time is set to 100 ms (10 Hz)

• The default setting is AUTO.

Selection of Filter (FILTER)

Select whether the input filter is operated or not. Select it from the following:

• OFF: Not operated

• ON: Operated

• The default setting is OFF.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10-9

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay/Internal Switch

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=RELAY

↓TVL RECORD ALARM A/D_INTG FILTER RELAY↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

RELAY SET=REFLASH

REFLASH AND ENERG HOLD

REFLASH RELAY No.1=OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6

REFLASH RELAY No.1=OFF

OFF 0

REFLASH RELAY No.1=001

RELAY SET=AND

AND RELAY:S=NONE

RELAY SET=ENERG

RELAY:001-01=ENERG

ENERG DE EN

RELAY SET=HOLD

RELAY HOLD=OFF

OFF ON

ENTERENTER

RELAY

ESC

ENTER

***REFLASH SET***

ENTER

***AND RELAY SET***

ESCENTER

ENTER

***RELAY MODE SET***

ENTER ESC

ENTER

***RELAY HOLD SET***

ENTER ESC

SET UP=

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

10-10 IM DR232-01E

10.4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay/Internal Switch

The following operation mode is set to the alarm output relays and the internal switches. There

are menus which cannot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI/DO module is mounted

and recognized as the system of this instrument. Also, there are menus which cannot be set to the

internal switches.

Setting Re-failure or Re-alarm (REFLASH)

This is a menu which canot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI/DO module is

mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument. Setting for the internal switches cannot

be done. REFLASH setting is available for up to six relays.

• Selection of REFLASH number

Select from 1 to 6.

• Setting of REFLASH relay

• OFF: not set.

• Setting with numerals for 3 characters:

• The first character is the unit number.

• For the second and third characters, a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective

setting range is as shown in the following examples: (Check which what slot the alarm

module or the DI/DO module is mounted in using the model number of mounted modules

and their mounted positions. Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0, slot 1, ..... facing

the front.)

Ex. 1: When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3: 31 to 40

Ex. 2: The DI/DO module is mounted in slot4: 41 to 42

• The default setting is OFF.

• After REFLASH setting, when the alarm module or the DI/DO module becomes

unrecognized as the system of this instrument, the relay setting becomes OFF.

Setting AND/OR (AND)

This can be set either to the relays or the internal switches. However, the relay cannot be set

unless the alarm module or DI/DO module is mounted and recognized as the system of this

instrument.

• Selection of Internal Switch/Relay

• S: internal switch is set.

• I, 0 to 5: relay is set.

• The default setting is S.

• Setting AND/OR

The relays or the internal switches are set to AND in up to the set range and set to OR in the range

exceeding the set range.

• For internal switches: set from 01-01 to 01-60.

• For one alarm module: 01-01 to 01-60 can be displayed. However, if this option is installed

in slot 4, 01-41 to 01-50 is the effective setting range.

• For one DI/DO module: 01-01 to 01-60 can be displayed. However, if this option is

installed in slot 5, 01-51 to 01-52 is the effective setting range.

• For two alarm modules: 01-01 to 01-60 can be displayed. However, is one module is

installed in slot 3 and an other is installed in slot 5, 01-31 to 01-60 is the effective setting

range. No relay is in the range from 01-41 to 01-50.

• In either case above, if all are to be set to OR or reset, set “NONE.”

• The default setting is NONE.

10-11

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.4 Setting Operation Mode of Relay/Internal Switch

Setting Energizing/Deenergizing (ENERG)

This is a menu which canot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI/DO module is

mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument.

• Relay Setting

Set the object relays from one number relay (first relay) to another number relay (end relay). Set

it under the condition that the first relay number ≤ end relay number.

• First relay number:

• The first character is a unit number.

• For the second and third characters, a number from 01 to 60 can be set but the effective

setting range is as shown in the following examples: (Check which what slot the alarm

module or the DI/DO module is mounted in using the model number of mounted modules

and their mounted positions. Slot numbers are set in the order of slot 0, slot 1, ..... facing

the front.)

Ex. 1: When the alarm module is mounted in slot 3: 31 to 40

Ex. 2: The DI/DO module is mounted in slot4: 41 to 42

• End relay number: The same settings of the second or third characters in the first relay

number.

• The default setting is 001-01.

• Selection of energizing/deenergizing

• ENERG: energizing

• DE EN: deenergizing

• The default setting is ENERG.

Setting Relay Hold (HOLD)

This is a menu which canot be displayed unless the alarm module or the DI/DO module is

mounted and recognized as the system of this instrument. However, the internal switches are set

simultaneously with relays.

• OFF: No relays/internal switches hold.

• ON: all relays/internal switches hold.

• The default setting is OFF.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-24.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-24.

10-12 IM DR232-01E

10.5 Setting Burn-out/Reference Junction

Compensation

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=BURN_OUT

↓D ALARM A/D_INTG FILTER RELAY BURN_OUT↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

ENTER

ESC

BURN OUT

RJC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

001-01:BURN OUT=OFF

>Select Channel No.

001-01:BURN OUT=OFF

>Select Channel No.

001-01:BURN OUT=OFF

OFF DOWN UP

***BURN OUT SET***

001-01:RJC=INT

>Select Channel No.

001-01:RJC=INT

>Select Channel No.

001-01:RJC=INT

INT EXT

***RJC SET***

001-01:RJC=EXT

INT EXT

EXT VALUE=_ _ _ _ _0µV

>Ext Value Limit(– 20000~ 20000µV)

***RJC SET***

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

10-13

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.5 Setting Burn-out/Reference Junction Compensation

Setting Burn-out (BURN OUT)

Set the dot-printing position when burn-out occurs for each channel.

• OFF: the burn-out function is not actuated.

• DOWN: a dot is printed at the end of chart width on the minimum value setting side of the

recording span.

• UP: Dot is printed at the end of chart width on the maximum value setting side of the recording

span.

• The default setting is OFF.

Setting Reference Junction Compensation (RJC)

Set either the internal or the external compensation for each channel.

• INT: internal compensation is performed.

• EXT: external compensation is performed. For external compensation, set the voltage to be

compensated.

Voltage to be externally compensated: set in the range of -20000 to 20000 mV.

• The default setting is INT.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10-14 IM DR232-01E

10.6 Setting Recording Colors

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=COLOR

↓D_INTG FILTER RELAY BURN_OUT RJC COLOR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

ENTER

ESC

COLOR 001-01:COLOR=PURPLE

>Select Channel No.

001-01:COLOR=PURPLE

>Select Channel No.

001-01:COLOR=PURPLE

PURPLE RED GREEN BLUE BROWN

BLACK NAVY YEL_GR RED_PR ORANGE

***COLOR SET***

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

Setting Recording Color

Set the recording colors for each channel. This setting can also be made for optional computation

channels.

• Select a color from the following ten colors:

PURPLE, RED, GREEN, BLUE, BROWN, BLACK, NAVY (navy blue), YEL_GR (yellowish

green), RED_PR (redish purple), and ORANGE

• The default setting is PURPLE for channel 1, RED for channel 2, GREEN for channel

3, BLUE for channel 4, BROWN for channel 5, BLACK for channel 6,

NAVY for channel 7, YEL_GR for channel 8, RED_PR for channel 9, and

ORANGE for channel 0.

Enter a unit number and a slot number in the two boxes .

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10-15

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.7 Setting Key Lock

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=LOCK

↓G FILTER RELAY BURN_OUT RJC COLOR LOCK↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu srtting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

KEY LOCK=NOT

NOT USE

***KEY LOCK SET***

KEY LOCK=USE

NOT USE

RECORD KEY=LOCK

FREE LOCK

FEED KEY=LOCK

FREE LOCK

PRINT KEY=LOCK

FREE LOCK

FUNC KEY=LOCK

FREE LOCK

M.FUNC1 KEY=LOCK

FREE LOCK

M.FUNC2 KEY=LOCK

FREE LOCK

A CODE NUMBER=_ _ _0

(Set the pass word.)

***KEY LOCK SET***

ENTER

LOCK

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

10-16 IM DR232-01E

Selection of Use or Nonuse of Key Lock

Select whether the key lock function is used or not used.

• NOT: the key lock function cannot be used.

• USE: the key lock function can be used. The menu “KEY LOCK ON” is displayed in the

FUNC menu and key lock can be executed. For details, see Section 9.3, “Alarm

Acknowledgment, Alarm Reset, Timer Reset, Keylock, and Message Printout” (page 9-15).

• The default setting is NOT.

Selection of Making Key Lock Ineffective

Even if key lock is executed, the turning on/off of the power switch, DISP/MODE key operation

and cursor key operation are effective. Other than the above, whether operation of the following

keys is made effective or locked can be selected.

• Selectable keys

RECORD, FEED, PRINT, FUNC, M.FUNC1, and M.FUNC2

• Choice

• FREE: made effective.

• LOCK: locked.

• The default setting is LOCK.

Setting Password (A CODE NUMBER)

Set a password for executing/resetting key lock.

• Can be set in the range of 0 to 9999.

• The default setting is 0.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10.7 Setting Key Lock

10-17

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.8 Setting FUNC/FUNC3 Menu

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=FUNC_PARM

↓ELAY BURN_OUT RJC COLOR LOCK FUNC_PARM↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

PANEL:ALARM ACK

ALARM ACK=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:ALARM RESET

ALARM RESET=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:TIMER RESET

TIMER RESET=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MATH START

MATH START=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MATH_CLR_START

MATH_CLR_START=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MATH STOP

MATH STOP=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MATH ACK

MATH ACK=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

ESC

ENTER

To next page

FUNC PARM

ENTER

***FUNC PARM SET***

ENTER

From the following page

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

10-18 IM DR232-01E

PANEL:REPORT_START

REPORT_START=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:REPORT_START

REPORT_START=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:REP_RECALL_START

REP_RECALL_START=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:REP_PRINT_STOP

REP_PRINT_STOP=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:KEY LOCK ON

KEY LOCK ON=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:KEY LOCK OFF

KEY LOCK OFF=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:S/U LIST START

S/U LIST START=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:S/U LIST STOP

S/U LIST STOP=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MSG PRINT

MSG PRINT=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:ALM BUF CLEAR

ALM BUF CLEAR=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MSG BUF CLEAR

MSG BUF CLEAR=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:MODULE INF

MODULE INF=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:COMM INF

COMM INF=FUNC3

FUNC FUN3 OFF

PANEL:RE SYSTEM

RE SYSTEM=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:RAM INT

RAM INT=FUNC3

FUNC FUNC3 OFF

PANEL:ALL ITEM

ALL ITEM=FUNC

FUNC FUNC3 OFF INIT

ENTER

From prevlous page To prevlous page

ENTER

10.8 Setting FUNC/FUNC3 Menu

10-19

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

Setting FUNC/FUNC3 (FUNC PARM)

Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the FUNC key whether in the FUNC menu or the

FUNC3 menu. The FUNC menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key at a touch and the

FUNC3 menu is displayed by pressing the FUNC key for about 3 seconds continuously.

• Select any of the following:

• FUNC: displayed in the FUNC menu.

• FUNC3: displayed in the FUNC3 menu.

• OFF: not displayed in either menu.

• The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10-17 and 10-18.

• The last operation menu, “PANEL:ALL ITEM” is the menu that globally set all menus.

However, the selection of “INIT” selects the default setting.

• The “COMM INF” menu is displayed if the communication module is mounted and recognized

as the system of this instrument (see page 9-16).

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10.8 Setting FUNC/FUNC3 Menu

10-20 IM DR232-01E

10.9 Setting SET/SET3 Menu

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=SET_PARM

↓_OUT RJC COLOR LOCK FUNC_PARM SET_PARM↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

10-21

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

PANEL:SYSTEM

SYSTEM=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:UNIT

UNIT=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:MATH

MATH=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:CONST

CONST=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:MEMORY

MEMORY=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:FLOPPY

FLOPPY=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:CHART2

CHART2=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:ZONE

ZONE=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:PARTIAL

PARTIAL=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:TAG

TAG=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:TREND

TREND=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:DIGITAL PR

DIGITAL PR=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:MANUAL PR

MANUAL PR=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:ALARM PR

ALARM PR=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

ESC

ENTER

SET PARM

ENTER

***SET PARM SET***

ENTER

From the following page

To next page

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

ENTER

10.9 Setting SET/SET3 Menu

10-22 IM DR232-01E

PANEL:SCALE PR

SCALE PR=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:LIST PR

LIST PR=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:LIST FMT

LIST FMT=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:MESSAGE

MESSAGE=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:HEADER

HEADER=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:TITLE

TITLE=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:TIMER

TIMER=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:MATCH TIME

MATCH TIME=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:LOGIC

LOGIC=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:MOVE AVE

MOVE AVE=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:INTERPOL

INTERPOL=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:GROUP

GROUP=SET3

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:COPY

COPY=SET

SET SET3 OFF

PANEL:ALL ITEM

ALL ITEM=SET

SET SET3 OFF INIT

ENTER

From previous page To previous page

ENTER

10.9 Setting SET/SET3 Menu

10-23

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

Setting SET/SET3 (SET PARM)

Select the menu to be displayed by pressing the SET key whether in the SET menu or the SET3

menu. The SET menu is displayed by pressing the SET key at a touch and the SET3 menu is

displayed by pressing the SET key for about 3 seconds continuously.

• Select any of the following:

• SET: displayed in the SET menu.

• SET3: displayed in the SET3 menu.

• OFF: not displayed in either menu.

• The default setting is as shown in the operating procedure diagram on pages 10-20 and 10-21.

• The last operation menu, “PANEL:ALL ITEM,” is the menu that globally set all menus.

However, the selection of “INIT” selects the default setting.

Note

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

10.9 Setting SET/SET3 Menu

10-24 IM DR232-01E

10.10 Selecting Display Update Interval, Registering

Details Set/Selected with SET UP Menu, and

Terminating SET UP Menu

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=DISPLAY

↓ COLOR LOCK FUNC_PARM SET_PARM DISPLAY↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• If exiting the following lower menu setting halfway, press the MODE (ESC) key. The display

returns to the main menu to which the lower menu belongs. However, newly set or selected

contents are canceled.

• When setting proceeds to the display for the setting end, the newly set or selected contents are

established.

AUTO INTERVAL=2

>2 3 4 5

***AUTO INTVL SET***

SETUP=ABORT

ABORT STORE

DISPLAY

END

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(SET UP end)

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

Selection of Display Update Period (DISPLAY)

Select the display update interval when the operation display mode in the display is AUTO.

• Select 2, 3, 4, or 5 seconds.

• The default setting is 2 seconds.

Registration/Abortion of Setting/Selection Details and Termination of SET UP

menu (END)

In order to make the details set/selected in the SET UP menu effective, a registering operation is

necessary. In contrast, the status can also be brought to that before setting/selection (abort)

without registration. Terminate the SET UP menu after registering or aborting operation.

• ABORT: Registration is aborted and the SET UP menu is terminated.

• STORE: After registration, the SET UP menu is terminated.

• The default setting is ABORT.

Select the END menu, then press the ENTER key. The operation display mode is reached about

10 seconds after pressing the ENTER key.

10-25

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.11 Selecting the temperature unit from °C or °F

(option)

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=TEMP

↓R LOCK FUNC_PARM SET_PARM DISPLAY TEMP↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Enter the SET UP menu in the following procedure:

1. When the display presents the operation display mode or a menu other than the SET UP

menu, first turn off the power switch.

2. Turn the switch back on while pressing the DISP key and continue pressing the DISP key

for about 5 seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. The main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be saved when you reach the final display of that setting.

TEMP=°C

C F

***TEMP SET***

TEMP

ENTER ENTER

ESC

(Main menu)

(Lower menu)

SET UP=

10-26 IM DR232-01E

10.11 Selecting the temperature unit from °C or °F (option)

Selecting the temperature unit (TEMP)

The temperature unit can be selected from the following;

•°C which is the initial value, or

•°F

Note

• In the User’s manual all functions and operations are explained using the °C unit. When using the °F

unit, replace the °C unit with the °F unit. For the measurement range/measurement accuracy and

maximum resolution in case of using the °F range, refer to the following table as a replacement of the one

on page 14-2.

• Measurement range: Refer to the following table;

• Measurement accuracy/maximum resolution: Replace the values using the following formula

°F = (°C value × 9/5) + 32

• When changing the temperature unit as descibred above, other settings will be initialized at the same time

and therefore, all settings need to be done again. This initialization will be the same initialization as

described on page 9-17.

• In order to make the set or selected contents effective, the contents must be registered. For details, see

page 10-23.

• To return from the SET UP menu to the operation display mode, select END in the main menu. For

details, see page 10-23.

Measurement ranges for temperature measurements when using the unit °F

Input

(Note that accuracy

of reference junction

compensation is not

considered.)

RTD

High resolution RTD

KPvsAu7Fe

Pt100(1mA)

Pt100(2mA)

JPt100(1mA)

JPt100(2mA)

Pt50(2mA)

Ni100(1mA)

SAMA

Ni100(1mA)DIN

Ni120(1mA)

J263*B

Cu10 GE

Cu10 L&N

Cu10 WEED

Cu10 BAILEY

Pt100(1mA)

Pt100(2mA)

JPt100(1mA)

JPt100(2mA)

32 to 3200°F

32 to 3308°F

–328 to 2498°F

–328.0 to 1472.0°F

–328.0 to 2012.0°F

–328.0 to 752.0°F

–328.0 to 1652.0°F

–328.0 to 752.0°F

32 to 2372°F

32 to 4199°F

0.0 to 300.0K

–328.0 to 1112.0°F

–328.0 to 482.0°F

–328.0 to 1022.0°F

–328.0 to 482.0°F

–328.0 to 1022.0°F

–328.0 to 482.0°F

–76.0 to 356.0°F

–94.0 to 392.0°F

0.0 to 300.0K

–328.0 to 572.0°F

–220.0 to 302.0°F

–94.0 to 158.0°F

–220.0 to 302.0°F

–94.0 to 158.0°F

Type Measurement Range

*1 :R, S, B, K, E, J, T :ANSI, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584, JIS C 1602-1981

*2 :L :Fe-CuNi, DIN43710, U :Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710

*3 :N :Nicrosil-Nisil, IEC 584, DIN IEC 584

*4 :W :W·5%RE-W·26%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co)

*5 :Pt50 :JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1986

Pt100 :JIS C 1604-1989, JIS C 1606-1989, IEC 751, DIN IEC 751

JPt100 :JIS C 1604-1981, JIS C 1606-1989

*6 :SAMA/DIN

*7 :McGRAW EDISON COMPANY

*8 :Ranges to which accuracy applies :

Cu10 GE :–119.9 to 338.0°F, Cu10 L&N :–103.0 to 302.0°F,

Cu10 WEED :–4.0 to 482.0°F, Cu10 BAILEY :–4.0 to 482.0°F

10-27

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

10.12 Working with the Report Function

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=REPORT

↓CORD MATH FLOPPY REPORT ALARM A/D_INTG↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• To enter the SETUP menu, follow the steps below:

1. If the DR recorder is in the OPERATION/DISPLAY mode or shows a menu other than the

SETUP menu, turn off the power switch once.

2. Turn on the power switch while pressing down the DISP key, and then keep holding the key

down for approximately five seconds.

• Using and , select and/or enter a value for each of the shaded fields shown below.

• To exit any of the following menu items during the procedure, press the MODE (ESC) key.

This returns to the first item of the menu. Note however that your new settings and selections

are canceled.

• Reaching the step showing the message “***REPORT SET***” or “***REPORT CH

SET***” confirms the latest settings/selections.

Sending the Instantaneous Value and Average to a Report Output

MODE=SET

SET CH_SET PRINT

HOURLY REPORT=OFF

OFF ON

DAILY REPORT=ON1

OFF ON1 ON2

MONTHLY REPORT=ON1

OFF ON1 ON2

START TIME=01 00 : 00

***REPORT SET***

(configuration complete)

MODE=CH_SET

SET CH_SET PRINT

REPORT CH=R01

R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08 R09 R10↑

R01=ON : 001

OFF ON

R01=ON : 001

CALC MODE=AVE

INST AVE SUM

***REPORT CH SET***

(configuration complete)

SETUP=ABORT

REPORT

END

ENTER ENTER

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

SET UP=

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Completes the configuration

of the SETUP menu)

ENTER

ESC

10-28 IM DR232-01E

Sending the Sum to a Report Output

MODE=SET

SET CH_SET PRINT

HOURLY REPORT=OFF

OFF ON

DAILY REPORT=ON1

OFF ON1 ON2

MONTHLY REPORT=ON1

OFF ON1 ON2

START TIME=01 00 : 00

***REPORT SET***

(configuration complete)

MODE=CH_SET

SET CH_SET PRINT

REPORT CH=R01

R01 R02 R03 R04 R05 R06 R07 R08 R09 R10↑

R01=ON : 001

OFF ON

R01=ON : 001

CALC MODE=SUM

INST AVE SUM

SUM UNIT= / sec

INTVL /sec /min /hour /day

***REPORT CH SET***

(configuration complete)

SETUP=ABORT

ABORT STORE

REPORT

END

ENTER ENTER

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

SET UP=

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Completes the configuration

of the SETUP menu)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

Printing Reports

MODE=PRINT

SET CH_SET PRINT

REPORT PRINT=ON

OFF ON

***REP PRINT SET***

(configuration complete)

SETUP=ABORT

ABORT STORE

REPORT

END

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

(Completes the configuration

of the SETUP menu)

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

SET UP=

ENTER

10.12 Working with the Report Function

10-29

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

The DR recorder calculates and processes an hour's, day's or month's worth of measurement or

computation data into instantaneous values, averages and/or sums to print the results in a

predetermined format at a preset time. The results can be delivered using the communication

function or printed on a recording chart. For more information on output using the

communication function, see the separate DR130/DR231/DR232/DR241/DR242 Communication

Interface User's Manual (IM DR231-11E).

You select from the choices in the FUNC menu, which opens when you press the FUNC key, to

start/stop report making or print reports. You can also start/stop report making using the event/

action functions. Reports come in the following three types.

Type Intervals Between Making Reports Data Item for Computing

Hourly report Every hour (1:00, 2:00 . . ., 23:00, 24:00) An hour's average, maximum and

minimum

An hour's sum and cumulative sum

Instantaneous value at the time of making

the report

Daily report Every other day (preset time) A day's average, maximum and minimum

A day's sum and cumulative sum

Instantaneous value at the time of making

the report

Monthly report Every other month (preset time) A month's average, maximum and

minimum

A month's sum and cumulative sum

Instantaneous value at the time of making

the report

On/Off of Hourly, Daily and Monthly Report Making

Configure the on's and off's of hourly, daily and monthly report making, separately. You can set

hourly, daily and monthly report making all to “on” at the same time. In addition, you can set

daily and monthly reports to either the standard format (ON1) or the enhanced format (ON2) of

output. Note that the enhanced format can only be set for either daily reports or monthly reports.

Output Formats

The format of output is available in either the standard or enhanced format. Hourly reports can

have the standard format only.

Standard format: Prints the results of computing configured on a report-channel basis.

Enhanced format:

Daily reports: the results of computing configured on a report-channel basis plus

information on the result of computing given at each preset time.

Monthly reports: the results of computing configured on a report-channel basis plus

information on given simultaneously with the preset time for making each report

The following shows the format of daily reports:

DAILY REPORT Jan.03.97 00:00 (START=Jan.01.97 00:00)

RCH CH/TAG MODE UNIT Jan.03 00:00 MIN/TOTAL MAX Jan.02 01:00 Jan.02 02:00... Jan.03 00:00

R01 TAG-001CH____ AVE V -1.0000 -2.0000 1.0000 -2.0000 -2.0000 -2.0000

R02 002 INST V 10.000 9.000 9.000 10.000

R03 003 SUM L 2.400000E+01 4.800000E+01 1.000000E+0 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00

R04

R05

R06 TAG-A01CH____ AVE unit06 20000.000 10000.000 30000.000 10000.000 10000.000 10000.000

R07 A02 INST 200000.00 9999.99 9999.99 200000.00

R08 A03 SUM 2.400000E+01 4.800000E+01 1.000000E+0 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00

R09

R10

R60

Starting timeTime to make report

Standard-format section of report

(results of computing on a report-channel basis)

Enhanced-format section of report

(list of the result of computing at

respective preset times)

10.12 Working with the Report Function

10-30 IM DR232-01E

Time to Make Report (START TIME)

Set the time to make a report in the format day of month : time. Define the day of month field

within a 01-28 range and the time field within a 00-23 range.

Hourly reports:

The DR recorder makes reports every hour on the hour (1:00, 2:00, . . ., 23:00, 24:00). For

cumulative summation, it resets the cumulative sum at a preset time.

Daily reports:

The DR recorder makes reports at a preset time or times. For cumulative summation, it resets the

cumulative sum at the preset time of a day.

Monthly reports:

The DR recorder makes reports at a preset time of the day.

Report Channels

There are sixty report channels, from R01 to R60. You can assign channels for measuring objects

being computed or computation channels and the type of computing on a report-channel basis.

When making a report of computed data, let computing start before letting the report making start.

Types of Computing

Menu Item Data Item for Computing

INST Instantaneous value at the time of making report

AVE Average, maximum and minimum over the computing period

SUM Sum and cumulative sum over the computing period

Sum and Cumulative Sum

Sum: The total sum over an hour for hourly reports, the sum over a day for daily

reports or the sum over a month for monthly reports. The DR recorder resets

this value each time it makes any of these reports.

Cumulative sum:The total sum up to the preset time to make a report in the case of hourly

reports or the sum up to a preset time of the day to make a report in the case of

daily reports. The DR recorder resets this value at each preset time or at each

preset time of the day for report making. The DR recorder does not perform

cumulative summation for monthly reports.

As an example, the following illustrates the process of summation and cumulative summation for

hourly reports. The example shows the case where the preset time to make a report is 8:00.

9:00 11:00

Results of

computing

Time to make an hourly report

Time

7:0010:00

8:00 8:00 9:00 10:00

Cumulative summation

Summation

Preset time to make report

Unit of Summation (SUM UNIT)

Such input data items as the flowrate that have a unit in /sec, /min, /hour or /day, when simply

summed, give results of computing different from their actual values. This occurs because the

unit of such a data item differs from that of the measurement interval. In that case, you can take

the output after having converted the unit of summation so it matches that of the input data item

applied.

Unit of Input (Preset Unit) Conversion Formula

INTVL (no conversion) ∑ (measured data values)

/sec ∑ (measured data values) × measurement interval

/min ∑ (measured data values) × measurement interval/60

/hour ∑ (measured data values) × measurement interval/3600

/day ∑ (measured data values) × measurement interval/86400

10.12 Working with the Report Function

10-31

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

Printing Reports on a Recording Chart

You can print created reports on a recording chart. If you set the REPORT PRINT menu item to

on during the configuration of the report function, the DR recorder starts printing automatically at

the same time it finishes making a report. You can also print reports by pressing the FUNC key,

opening the FUNC menu and then selecting the REP RECALL START menu item. In that case,

take note of the following:

• You can print the latest report only, irrespective of whether it is an hourly, daily or monthly

report. Neither daily nor monthly reports are printed if you print immediately after an hourly

report was created.

• Care must be taken when the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to automatic printing. If the

time for automatic printing arrives while printing is enabled from the FUNC menu, the DR

recorder will no longer print reports automatically.

• Even if you have configured the DR recorder so it prints a daily report in the enhanced format,

it prints the report in the standard format if it has been more than an hour since the report was

created.

• Even if you have configured the DR recorder so it prints a monthly report in the enhanced

format, it prints the report in the standard format if it has been more than a day since the report

was created.

To stop printing, press the FUNC key and select REP PRINT STOP from the FUNC menu. The

following are examples of how a daily report prints.

Standard format:

DAILY REPORT Jan.03.97 00:00 (START=Jan.01.97 00:00)

RCH CH/TAG MODE UNIT Jan.03 00:00 MIN/TOTAL MAX

R01 TAG-001CH_______ AVE V -1.0000 -2.0000 1.0000

R02 002 INST V 10.000

R03 003 SUM L 2.400000E+01 4.800000E+01

R04

R05

R06 TAG-A01CH_______ AVE unit06 20000.000 10000.000 30000.000

R07 A02 INST 200000.00

R08 A03 SUM 2.400000E+01 4.800000E+01

R09

R10

R60

Report channels

Channels included in printing

(Axx: computing channel)

Results of

computing Minimum or

cumulative sum Maximum

Starting timeTime to make report

Types of

computing Units

Enhanced format:

DAILY REPORT Jan.03.97 00:00 (START=Jan.01.97 00:00)

RCH CH/TAG MODE UNIT Jan.03 00:00 MIN/TOTAL MAX Jan.02 01:00 Jan.02 02:00... Jan.03 00:00

R01 TAG-001CH____ AVE V -1.0000 -2.0000 1.0000 -2.0000 -2.0000 -2.0000

R02 002 INST V 10.000 9.000 9.000 10.000

R03 003 SUM L 2.400000E+01 4.800000E+01 1.000000E+0 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00

R04

R05

R06 TAG-A01CH____ AVE unit06 20000.000 10000.000 30000.000 10000.000 10000.000 10000.000

R07 A02 INST 200000.00 9999.99 9999.99 200000.00

R08 A03 SUM 2.400000E+01 4.800000E+01 1.000000E+0 1.000000E+00 1.000000E+00

R09

R10

R60

Report channels

Channels included in printing (Axx: computing channel)

Results of

computing Minimum or

cumulative sum Maximum

Starting timeTime to make report

Types of

computing Units Enhanced-format section of report

(list of the result of computing at respective

preset times for daily reports)

Note

• If any of the following conditions is true, you cannot print reports even when the preset time to make a

report arrives. In that case, the DR recorder prints reports when the current printing ends.

• Manual printing is in progress.

• List printing or setup list printing is in progress.

• Header printing is in progress.

• Logging printing is in progress.

• The DR recorder does not print reports either even if the preset time to make a report arrives while

printing is enabled from the FUNC menu.

10.12 Working with the Report Function

10-32 IM DR232-01E

Starting/Stopping Report Making

Report making can be started or stopped in two ways:

• Press the FUNC key and select REPORT_START or REPORT_STOP from the FUNC menu.

• Use the event/action functions to define the start/stop of making a report for the following

events:

Edge action: You can define every event as an edge action to start/stop report making.

Level action:You can use remote, alarm, relay and end-of-chart signals as events to start/stop

report making. Report making starts at the same time that any of these events

occur. Report making stops when the event clears.

Note

• If you start report making, all reports created up to that point are reset.

• When report making is in progress, you cannot make changes to measurement channels, measuring

ranges or dates and times nor can you copy information on the ranges.

• If any computed data are included in your report making, let computing start first and then get report

making started. If you fail to enable computing, the data in your reports will become meaningless

because no change takes place on the computed data.

• If you want the start of computing and report making enabled at the same time, use the event/action

functions to assign both of these instructions to the same event as actions.

Time Relationship Between the Settings of the REPORT_START/STOP Menu Items

and Report Making

The following figure shows the time relationship between the settings of the REPORT_START/

STOP menu items and report making.

Report 1

Report 2 Report 3

Report n

Start of report

making

denotes the point in time a report is created.

Time to make report Time to make report Time to make report

Stop of report making

• Data items included in the first round of report making after the start of report making are fewer

in number than those included in the second and subsequent rounds of report making.

• The DR recorder samples data before stopping report making. The report created when the DR

recorder stops making reports thus includes those data.

• If the time when report making is started coincides with the time the report is created, the start

of report making precedes. Thus, no report is created.

• The data sampled at the same time report making started are included in first round of report

making. The report created when the DR recorder stops making reports thus includes those

data.

• If you have defined timer and match-time signals as events using the event/action functions so

the time report making starts matches the time the report is created, data items included in the

first round of report making are one data item greater in number than those included in the

second or any subsequent round of report making.

Processing Against Absence of Measurement

Measurement may not take place if the DR recorder is loaded beyond its processing capability. If

absence of measurement occurs, the DR recorder compensates for the missing data with the data it

measures immediately after recovering from the absence of measurement (the data for the period

with no measurement thus match those acquired immediately after recovering from the absence of

measurement).

10.12 Working with the Report Function

10-33

IM DR232-01E

Basic Settings (SET UP)

If Power Failure Occurs While Report Function Is Active

The DR recorder takes different actions depending on the length of a power failure.

If the power failure time is longer than 12 hours:

The DR recorder makes a report immediately after it recovers from the power failure and then

stops making reports. It does not execute printing based on the settings for automatic printing.

Print out reports either using the communication function or from the FUNC menu.

Results of computing: The DR recorder computes data measured up to the point immediately

before the power failure.

Time of report making:The time when the power failure occurred.

If the power failure is less than 12 hours:

The DR recorder takes different actions depending on the time it recovers from the power

failure.

Time of Recovery from After the Time of Before the Time of

Power Failure Report Making Report Making

Condition after recovery from Valid report function Valid report function

power failure (start of report making enabled) (start of report making enabled)

Report making Immediately after recovery from Time for report making

power failure

Report printing Immediately after recovery from Time for report making

power failure

Data included in report making Data measured up to the point of Data measured over the given

power failure period except the power failure time

If automatic report printing is turned on:

If the power failure time covers the given period of report making, no report for that period is made.

Handling of Faulty Data

If data being computed contain any faulty data, the DR recorder treats the data as summarized in

the following table, depending on the type of computing and faulty data.

Type of Faulty Data Average Minimum/Maximum Instantaneous Value Sum

Positive overflow Excluded from Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from

computing the result of computing computing

Negative overflow Excluded from Included in computing Takes faulty data as Excluded from

computing the result of computing computing

Channels included in Excluded from

Excluded from computing

Takes faulty data as Excluded from

measurement set to SKIP

computing the result of computing computing

No channel included Excluded from

Excluded from computing

Takes faulty data as Excluded from

in measurement computing the result of computing computing

Error Excluded from

Excluded from computing

Takes faulty data as Excluded from

computing the result of computing computing

Output of data disabled

Excluded from

Excluded from computing

Takes faulty data as Excluded from

computing the result of computing computing

The DR recorder prints the results of computing as shown in the following table if they are special

data.

Type of Data Printout Format

Positive overflow +******

Negative overflow –******

Channels included in measurement set to SKIP Space

No channel included in measurement Space

Error ××××××

Output of data disabled

If data being computed contain faulty data, the DR recorder prints each digital data item,

beginning with an * or × as the status indication.

1. Power failure: ×

In the case of a power failure, the DR recorder prints the time for report making, also beginning

with an ×.

2. Channels included in measurement set to SKIP/no channel included in measurement/error/

output of disabled data: ×

10.12 Working with the Report Function

10-34 IM DR232-01E

3. Positive overflow/negative overflow: *

If more than one faulty data item occurs at the same time, the DR recorder prints them while

giving priority to a data item with a smaller number among the numbers noted above.

Notes on daylight savings time

When the function to shift the time scale between standard time and daylight savings time is

specified, the report for the day to shift from standard time to the daylight savings time seemingly

includes data for only a 23-hour day and, at the same time, the report for the day to shift daylight

savings time to standard time seemingly includes the data for a 25 hour day.

If you specify the time to make a report at the same time as the shift from standard time to

daylight savings time, or vice versa, the report will be generated based on the time scale after the

shift.

10.12 Working with the Report Function

11-1

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data

Procedure for Saving Data

When saving measured/computed data on a floppy disk, save them first on the DR recorder's

built-in RAM disk and then copy them to the floppy disk. You can save the data on the built-in

RAM disk in three ways, as summarized in the following table:

Menu Item Method for Starting Saving Number of Files Saved

DIRECT Immediately starts saving when the setting is complete. One

TRIGGER Starts saving when an event occurs as set using the One

event/action functions.

REPEAT Starts saving when an event occurs as set using the More than one*

event/action functions.

* The DR recorder continues to save an array of files of the specified size until the built-in RAM disk

becomes full.

Flow of Operation

The following paragraphs show the flow operation for a case where a measured data file is saved

using the occurrence of an alarm as a trigger.

1.Setting an Event/Action

Menu Item Setting

LOGIC in SET menu LOGIC BOX No.

EVENT=ALARM

ACT=EDGE/MEMORY : WR_TRIG

2. Selecting a Channel Whose Data Are Saved

Menu Item Setting

MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY=CH SET

001-01: CH SET=ON

(Allowed to set the consecutive numbers of channels)

3. Selecting a Method and Condition for Saving

Menu Item Setting

MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY=WRITE

WRITE=TRIGGER

WRITE file=

(File name: If new, press ENTER leaving the name blank.)

WRITE SAMPLE=

(Interval between file savings)

WRITE LENGTH=

(Size of file being saved)

WRITE PRE TRIG=

(Pre-trigger: not configurable if MEMORY=DIRECT)

4. Copying Files Saved on Built-in RAM Disk to Floppy Disk

Menu Item Setting

MEMORY in SET menu MEMORY=COPY

COPY MODE=TO FDD

COPY TYPE=DATA

COPY FILE=

(Name of file being copied)

COPY CONVERT=OFF

(Saved as binary-data file)

See the following pages for more information on how to configure these menu items.

11-2 IM DR232-01E

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

Selecting the channel to be saved

MEMORY=CH SET

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

001-01:CH SET=ON

>Select Channel No.

001-01:CH SET=ON

>Select Channel No.

001-01:CH SET=ON

ON OFF

***CH SET OK***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Saving immediately

ENTER

MEMORY=WRITE

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

WRITE MODE=DIRECT

DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP

WRITE file=

_____ AAA BBB CCC

WRITE FILE=DDDD

WRITE SAMPLE=INTVL

INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC

WRITE LENGTH=1k

10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k

3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k

***WRITE START***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data

11-3

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data

Saving one file only using the event/action function

ENTER

MEMORY=WRITE

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

WRITE MODE=TRIGER

DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP

WRITE file=

_____ AAA BBB CCC

WRITE FILE=DDDD

WRITE SAMPLE=INTVL

INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC

WRITE LENGTH=1k

10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k

3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k

WRITE PRE TRIG=10%

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

***WRITE START***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Saving files repeatedly using the event/action function

ENTER

MEMORY=WRITE

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

WRITE MODE=REPEAT

DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP

WRITE file=

_____ AAA BBB CCC

WRITE FILE=DDDD

WRITE SAMPLE=INTVL

INTVL 1min 2min 5min 10min LOGIC

WRITE LENGTH=1k

10 20 30 40 50 100 200 300 400 500 1k 2k

3k 4k 5k 10k 20k 30k 40k 50k

WRITE PRE TRIG=10%

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

***WRITE START***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

11-4 IM DR232-01E

Stopping saving

MEMORY=WRITE

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

WRITE MODE=STOP

DIRECT TRIGER REPEAT STOP

WRITE STOP=YES

NO YES

***WRITE STOP***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

LOGIC BOX NO.=01

EVENT=ALARM

ACT=EDGE/ALARM ACK

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:DATA_WR

ACT=EDGE/MEMRY:WR_TRIG

•••SET OK***

(Lower menu)

SET=

LOGIC

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Measured/computed data is saved to the internal RAM disk. The memory size of the RAM disk

is 512 KB.

Saving method (WRITE MODE)

The following three methods are available.

• DIRECT

Measured/computed data is saved immediately after setting has been completed. Saving is

complete when data of the specified length has been saved.

• TRIGGER

The event/action function is used to save only one file of measured/computed data when an

event takes place. This function is useful when you want to save measured/computed data in

case of an alarm.

• REPEAT

Same as TRIGGER, except that measured/computed data is saved each time an event takes

place, until the RAM disk is full or saving is stopped by the operator. Events which occur

during saving will be ineffective.

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data

11-5

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

Event Event Event

Specified

data length

Specified

data length Specified

data length

Start of saving End of saving

Start of saving End of saving Start of saving End of saving

File 001

File 001 File 002 File 003

Event

RAM disk

Event

RAM disk

When TRIGGER is selected as WRITE MODE:

When REPEAT is selected as WRITE MODE:

Event(ineffective)

For TRIGGER or REPEAT, one event must be set for the WR TRIG action during event/action

function setting. For a detailed description of the event/action function, refer to 9.1, “Setting

Event/Action Functions” (page 9-1).

Data write interval (WRITE SAMPLE)

The data write interval at which data is saved can be selected from the following.

INTVL: Same as measurement interval. Every set of measured/computed data is saved.

1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min: Saved at the specified interval.

LOGIC: One piece of data per channel is saved each time the event specified by DATA WR

(event/action function) occurs. For a detailed description of the event/action function,

refer to 9.1, “Setting Event/Action Functions” (page 9-1).

Data length (WRITE LENGTH)

Used to set the number of pieces of data per channel. Select one of the following options.

10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 200, 300,. 400, 500, 1k, 2k, 3k, 4k, 5k, 10k, 20k, 30k, 40k, 50k

Some options cannot be selected depending on the number of channels to be saved or the number

of computation channels.

Pre-trigger (PRE TRIGGER)

If REPEAT or TRIGGER has been selected as WRITE MODE, data which occurs before the

trigger (event) is activated can be saved within the specified data length. Set the trigger timing in

units of percentage (%) of the specified data length in steps of 10%.

Trigger (event)

20%

Data length (100%)

Data which occurs before the trigger

File name

If DIRECT or TRIGGER has been selected as WRITE MODE, the file name must consist of up

to 8 characters. If REPEAT has been selected as WRITE MODE, the file name must be of up to 5

characters in length. The lower 3 digits of the file name indicate the serial number (001 to 208).

AUX, CON, PRN and CLOK cannot be used for a file name. The identifier is .DAT.

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data

11-6 IM DR232-01E

Data format

Measured/computed data is saved in binary format.

Data size

Data size can be calculated using the following equations.

Measured data: 2 bytes / 1 data

Computed data: 4 bytes / 1 data

Header: 576 + 64 x (number of measurement channels + number of computation channels) bytes

Data size = 576 + 64 x (number of measurement channels + number of computation channels) +

(number of measurement channels x 2 + number of computation channels x 4 + 6) x specified

data length

For instance, if the number of channels is 10, number of computation channels is 5 and specified

data length is 5k, the data size can be calculated as follows.

Data size = 576 + 64 x (10 + 5) + ((10 x 2 + 5 x 4) + 6) x 5k = 231,536 bytes

Status display during saving

The following status symbols are displayed in the sub-display 2 (lowest display section).

: Saving is in progress.

: Awaiting a trigger

Restrictions during saving

The following settings can not be made while saving is in progress.

Settings relating to media, except for saving stop setting

Measuring range

Computation equation/constant

Group

11.1 Saving Measured and Computed Data

11-7

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.2 Reading Measured and Computed Data

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

Reading measured/computed data immediately from the RAM disk

MEMORY=READ

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

READ MODE=DIRECT

DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO

READ FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

READ START DATA= 1

>Start Limit ( 1 ~200000)

***READ START***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Reading measured/computed data from the RAM disk using the event/action

function

MEMORY=READ

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

READ MODE=TRIGER

DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO

READ FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

READ START DATA= 1

>Start limit ( 1 ~200000)

***READ START***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

11-8 IM DR232-01E

Stopping reading

MEMORY

READ

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

READ MODE

STOP

DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO

READ STOP

YES

YES NO

***READ STOP***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Displaying the contents of the file

MEMORY

READ

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

READ

INFO

DIRECT TRIGER STOP INFO

INFO FILE

AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

>MODEL=EXPAND

>96/07/07 00:00:00 LENGTH=20000

>SAMPLE= 10(Sec) TRIG DATA No.= 1

>CHANNEL=201-60

>ON 201

>ON 231

***INFO END***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

Assigning the read data to a computation channel to display or record the data

ENTER

A01-30:MODE=ON

>Select Channel No.

A01-01:MODE=ON

>Select Channel No.

A01-01:MODE=ON

OFF ON

CALC=M001

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( ) AM .

LEFT=-3000.000Kg

>Span limit (-9999.999 ~99999.999Kg)

RIGHT= 3000.000Kg

>Span limit (-9999.999 ~99999.999Kg

***SET OK***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET=

MATH

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER

11.2 Reading Measured and Computed Data

11-9

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

Measured/computed data is read from the internal RAM disk.

Reading methods (READ MODE)

The following two methods are available.

• DIRECT

Data is read at the measurement intervals immediately after setting has been completed.

• TRIGGER

The event/action function is used to read data at the measurement intervals when an event takes

place. This function is useful when you want to compare data before an event with data after

an event.

Displaying the contents of the file

The following information of the read file is displayed.

MODEL=EXPANDABLE

>SAMPLE= 10(Sec) TRIG DATA No.= 1

>96/07/07 00:00 LENGTH=20000

CHANNEL=201–60

>ON 201

>ON 231

Model type on which data was saved

Number of pieces of data per channel

Data No. in effect when the trigger (event) took place

Always "1" if saving was carried out without DIRECT

or PRE TRIGGER settings made.

Date/time on which a trigger (event) took place

Saving start date/time in the case where saving was carried out in DIRECT mode

Sample rate (intervals at which data was saved)

Status of channel Nos. 201 to 230 ( : Data available, : No data available)

Status of channel Nos. 231 to 260 ( : Data available, : No data available)

Channel is changed if this digit is changed.

ENTER key

Displaying/recording the read data

To display or record the read data, it is necessary to assign the read data to computation channels

A01 to A60 using the SET menu. This assignment is still possible even if the instrument is not

equipped with the optional computation function.

Assign the following channels to computation channels A01 to A60.

• M001 to M300: Read data for measurement channels

• MA01 to MA60: Read data for computation channels

If the instrument is equipped with the computation function (/M1 model), read data can be

calculated in the same way that measured/computed data is calculated.

Like measurement channels, it is possible to make the unit, alarm, zone, partial compression, tag,

linear interpolation, dot color and recording settings for computation channels A01 to A60.

However, only the upper-limit and lower-limit alarms are available. Specify channel Nos. A01 to

A60 when specifying channel Nos.

Reading data from a floppy disk

To read data which has been copied to a floppy disk from the RAM disk, it is necessary to copy

the data from the floppy disk to the RAM disk. However, data in ASCII format cannot be read.

Status display during reading

The following status symbols are displayed in the sub-display 2 (lowest display section).

It is not possible to make media settings other than reading stop setting while measured/computed

data is being read.

: Reading is in progress.

: Awaiting a trigger

11.2 Reading Measured and Computed Data

11-10 IM DR232-01E

11.3 Saving Set-up Data

Saving set-up data for the SET mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MEMORY=SAVE

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

SAVE file=

_____ AAA BBB CCC

SAVE FILE=AAA

Saving... *

***SAVE OK***

(End of saving)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

FLOPPY FLOPPY=SAVE

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

SAVE file=

_____ AAA BBB CCC

SAVE FILE=AAA

Saving... *

***SAVE OK***

(End of saving)

ESC

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

11-11

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

Saving set-up data for the SETUP mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=FLOPY

↓ PRN_ADJ SCAN_INTV RECORD MATH FLOPPY↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu.

1. If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed, turn the power OFF

2. While holding the DISP key, turn the power ON. Make sure depression of the DISP key is

maintained for approximately another five seconds..

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

SET UP=

(Main menu)

FLOPPY FLOPPY=SAVE

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

SAVE file=

_____ AAA BBB CCC

SAVE FILE=AAA

Saving... *

***SAVE OK***

(End of saving)

ESC

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

Set-up data except for date/time is saved to the internal RAM disk or a floppy disk. Set-up data

for the SETUP mode can be saved to a floppy disk only. Data is always saved in ASCII format.

The file name must consist of up to 8 characters. The following identifier is used.

Set-up data file for SET mode : .PNL

Set-up data file for SETUP mode : .SET

Data size

Set-up data for the SET mode: Up to approximately 250 KB (300 measurement channels

and 60 computation channels) are available for set-up data for the

SET mode.

Set-up data for SET OR mode: Approx. 50 KB (max) (for 300 measurement channels and

60 computation channels)

Note

• “Saving ...*” will be displayed during saving. During this period, key board operations are not possible.

• No saving is allowed during computing.

• The communication function remains disabled during saving.

11.3 Saving Set-up Data

11-12 IM DR232-01E

11.4 Reading Set-up Data

Reading set-up data for the SET mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MEMORY=LOAD

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

LOAD MODE=DIRECT

DIRECT TRIG_1 TRIG_2 TRIG_3

LOAD FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC

Loading... *

Operation status displayed

SET=

MEMORY

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

FLOPPY FLOPPY=LOAD

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

LOAD MODE=DIRECT

DIRECT TRIG_1 TRIG_2 TRIG_3

LOAD FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC

Loading... *

Operation status displayed

ENTER

SET=

MEMORY

(Main menu)

11-13

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

Reading set-up data for the SETUP mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=FLOPPY

PRN_ADJ SCAN_INTV RECORD MATH FLOPPY

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu.

1. If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed, turn the power OFF

2. While holding the DISP key, turn the power ON. Make sure depression of the DISP key is

maintained for approximately another five seconds.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

FLOPPY FLOPPY=LOAD

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

LOAD FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC

Loading... *

Main menu

STORE for confirmation

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

SET UP=

(Main menu)

11.4 Reading Set-up Data

11-14 IM DR232-01E

Set-up data for the SET mode or SETUP mode is read from the internal RAM disk or a floppy

disk.

Loading methods (LOAD MODE in SET mode)

The following two methods are available.

• DIRECT

Setup data is loaded immediately after setting has been completed.

• TRIGGER 1/TRIGGER 2/TRIGGER 3

The event/action function is used to load set-up data when an event takes place. This function

is useful if you want to record data when an event takes place, with different recording spans.

One event must be set for the LD_TRIG1, LD_TRIG2 and LD_TRIG3 actions during event/

action function setting. For a detailed description of the event/action function, refer to 9.1,

“Setting Event/Action Functions” (page 9-1).

Confirming the set-up data

To confirm the read set-up data for the SETUP mode, specify SETUP = STORE in the same way

as the SETUP mode setting.

Note

• If set-up data saved on another instrument (DR series recorder) is loaded and does not match this

instrument’s configuration, settings which do not comply with the configuration cannot be made.

• No reading is allowed during computing.

• The communication function remains disabled during reading.

11.4 Reading Set-up Data

11-15

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.5 Copying a Data File

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MEMORY=COPY

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

COPY MODE=TO FDD

TO FDD FROM FDD

COPY TYPE=DATA

DATA PANEL

COPY FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

COPY CONVERT=OFF

ON OFF

Copying... *

***COPY OK***

(End of copy)

ENTER

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

COPY MODE=FROM FDD

TO FDD FROM FDD

COPY TYPE=DATA

DATA PANEL

COPY FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

Copying... *

***COPY OK***

(End of copy)

COPY TYPE=PANEL

DATA PANEL

COPY FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

Copying... *

***COPY OK***

(End of copy)

ESC

ENTER

11-16 IM DR232-01E

Measured/computed/set-up data is copied from the internal RAM disk to a floppy or vice versa.

Types of files that can be copied (COPY TYPE)

• DATA: copies measured and computed data.

• PANEL: copies set-up data.

Saving measured/computed data to a floppy disk

Data measured or computed using the instrument cannot be saved to a floppy disk directly. It

must be saved to the internal RAM disk first, then copied to a floppy disk.

It is not possible to change the file name when copying the file.

Displaying/recording measured/computed data saved on a floppy disk using the

instrument

To use the instrument to display or record measured/computed data copied to a floppy disk, the

file containing measured/computed data must be copied from the floppy disk to the RAM disk.

However, data in ASCII format cannot be copied.

It is not possible to change the file name when copying the file.

11.5 Copying a Data File

11-17

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.6 Copying in ASCII Format

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

ENTER

MEMORY=COPY

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

COPY MODE=TO FDD

TO FDD FROM FDD

COPY TYPE=DATA

DATA PANEL

COPY FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC DDD

COPY CONVERT=ON

ON OFF

COPY CH=001-A05

>Select Channel No.

COPY CH=001-A05

>Select Channel No.

COPY DAT= 1- 200

>Start limit ( 1~200000 )

COPY DAT= 1- 200

Start limit ( 1~200000 )

Copying... *

***COPY OK***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

11-18 IM DR232-01E

Measured/computed data in the internal RAM disk is converted to ASCII data, then copied to a

floppy disk. The identifier is .CSV.

Conversion channel (COPY CH)

Used to select a channel whose data is to be converted to ASCII data. Measurement channels and

computation channels are arranged in the order of 001, 002, ... 560, A01, A02, ... A60. For

instance, if “559-A02” is specified, data for channels 559, 560, A01 and A02 will be converted.

Conversion data (COPY DATA)

Used to specify the conversion range for the channels specified by COPY CH. Enter the

conversion start data No. and end data No.

Data size

When measured/computed data is converted to ASCII data, 12 bytes will be used for each data

set. Thus, data size can be calculated as follows.

Data size = 178 + 20 x number of conversion channels - 2 + (24 + 12 x number of conversion

channels -1) x number of data sets to be converted

Copying is not possible if destination’s memory size is insufficient.

Note

When a file is copied to a floppy disk, the file creation date will be replaced by the date on which the file is

copied.

11.6 Copying in ASCII Format

11-19

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

Data format

ASCII converted data is saved in the following format.

"Sample by DARWIN"

"Trigger Time","96-02-14 15:05:07"

"Sample Rate(Sec)", 2

"Start Data No.", 1

"Data Length", 20

"Ch.Name","TURBINE1","TURBINE2","TURBINE5","TURBINE7","TURBINE0"

"Unit","mV ","Kg/mm "," C "," C "," C "

"YY-MM-DD HH:MM:SS.S"

"96-02-14 15:05:07.0"," 12.520"," 315.00"," 23.2"," -5.0"," 16.3"

"96-02-14 15:05:09.0"," 12.322"," 315.05"," 23.2"," -4.9"," 15.9"

"96-02-14 15:05:11.0"," 13.724"," 315.20"," 23.3"," -4.8"," 15.9"

"96-02-14 15:05:13.0"," 13.220"," 315.12"," 23.3"," -4.9"," 15.8"

"96-02-14 15:05:15.0"," 13.925"," 315.60"," 23.3"," -4.9"," 15.8"

"96-02-14 15:05:17.0"," 13.227"," 315.55"," 23.3"," -4.9"," 16.0"

"96-02-14 15:05:19.0"," 13.928"," 315.04"," 23.3"," -5.0"," 16.1"

"96-02-14 15:05:21.0"," 12.620"," 315.29"," 23.3"," -5.1"," 16.1"

"96-02-14 15:05:23.0"," 12.643"," 315.01"," 23.2"," -5.1"," 16.2"

"96-02-14 15:05:25.0"," 13.426"," 315.05"," 23.2"," -5.1"," 16.3"

"96-02-14 15:05:27.0"," 12.227"," 315.42"," 23.2"," -5.2"," 15.9"

"96-02-14 15:05:29.0"," 12.233"," 315.81"," 23.2"," -5.2"," 15.8"

"96-02-14 15:05:31.0"," 13.822"," 315.03"," 23.2"," -5.1"," 15.8"

"96-02-14 15:05:33.0"," 12.324"," 315.05"," 23.2"," -5.2"," 15.8"

"96-02-14 15:05:35.0"," 13.220"," 315.07"," 23.2"," -5.1"," 16.0"

"96-02-14 15:05:37.0"," 13.450"," 315.91"," 23.2"," -5.1"," 16.3"

"96-02-14 15:05:39.0"," 13.720"," 315.05"," 23.2"," -5.1"," 16.3"

"96-02-14 15:05:41.0"," 12.670"," 315.02"," 23.2"," -5.2"," 16.2"

"96-02-14 15:05:43.0"," 12.830"," 315.01"," 23.2"," -5.0"," 16.1"

"96-02-14 15:05:45.0"," 12.350"," 315.01"," 23.2"," -5.0"," 16.1"

Saving date/time Data

Trigger date/time

Saving interval

ASCII conversion data No.

Data length (number of data sets)

Channel No. or tag

Unit

Note

• The following special ASCII codes will be converted as follows.

°→ Space (20H)

Ω→ Space (20H)

µ→ u (75H)

ε→ e (65H)

Ω

→ Space (20H)

• No copying is allowed during computing.

• The communication function remains disabled during copying.

• If you save data using a trigger, a T precedes the time attached to the data saved at the time of triggering.

11.6 Copying in ASCII Format

11-20 IM DR232-01E

11.7 Deleting a Data File

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MEMORY=DELETE

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

DELETE TYPE=DATA

DATA PANEL

DELETE FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC

***DELETE OK***

(End of setting)

SET=

MEMORY

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

FLOPPY FLOPPY=DELETE

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

DELETE FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC

***DELETE OK***

(End of setting)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

Deleting a data file for the SETUP mode

A data file for the SETUP mode can be deleted in the same way as a data file for the SET mode is

deleted.

Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu.

SET UP=

(Main menu)

FLOPPY FLOPPY=DELETE

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

DELETE FILE=AAA

AAA BBB CCC

***DELETE OK***

(End of setting)

ESC

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

Note

• The communication function is disabled during deletion.

11-21

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information

Displaying information in the SET mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

FLOPPY=INFO

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

>VOLUME=DARWIN

>MEMORY= 20000 BYTES

***INFO END***(End)

SET=

MEMORY

FLOPPY

(Main menu)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

MEMORY=INFO

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

>MEMORY = 20000BYTES

***INFO END***(End)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

ESC

Displaying information in the SETUP mode

Information can be displayed in the same way as the SET mode.

Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu.

FLOPPY=INFO

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

>VOLUME=DARWIN

>MEMORY= 20000 BYTES

***INFO END***

(End)

SET UP=

FLOPPY

(Main menu)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

11-22 IM DR232-01E

Internal RAM disk and floppy disk information is displayed.

Internal RAM disk

Remaining memory size is displayed.

Floppy disk

Volume name and remaining memory size are displayed.

11.8 Displaying RAM Disk and Floppy Disk Information

11-23

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

11.9 Initializing the RAM Disk

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MEMORY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

MEMORY=INIT

CH_SET WRITE READ SAVE LOAD COPY DELETE

INFO INIT

INIT=YES

NO YES

***INIT OK***

(End of initialization)

SET=

MEMORY

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

The internal RAM disk is initialized. All the data in the RAM disk will be deleted. Thus, copy

necessary data to a floppy disk before carrying out initialization.

Note

• The communication function is disabled during initialization.

11-24 IM DR232-01E

11.10 Formatting a Floppy Disk

Formatting a floppy disk in the SET mode

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=FLOPPY

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST MEMORY FLOPPY TR↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

•To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

•New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

FLOPPY=FORMAT

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

FORMAT MODE=1.44MB

1.2MB 720KB 1.44MB

VOLUME=DARWIN

FORMAT=YES

NO YES

Formatting... *

***FORMAT OK***

(End)

SET=

FLOPPY

(Main menu)

ENTER

ESC

ENTER

Formatting a floppy disk in the SETUP mode

A floppy disk can be formatted in the same way as in the SETUP mode.

Select FLOPPY from the SETUP menu.

SET UP=

(Main menu)

FLOPPY FLOPPY=FORMAT

SAVE LOAD DELETE INFO FORMAT

FORMAT MODE=1.44MB

1.2MB 720KB 1.44MB

VOLUME=DARWIN

FORMAT=YES

NO YES

Formatting... *

***FORMAT OK***

(End)

ESC

ENTER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

11-25

IM DR232-01E

Saving/Reading Measured,

Computed and Set-up Data

A floppy disk is formatted. All the data on the floppy disk will be deleted. Thus, copy necessary

data to another media before carrying out formatting.

Format mode (FORMAT MODE)

Select the format mode from the following.

2HD: 1.44 MB, 1.2 MB

2DD: 720 KB

Volume name

Beginning the volume name with a space is not allowed. If this happens, an error will occur.

Note

• The communication function is disabled during formatting.

11.10 Formatting a Floppy Disk

12-1

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

12.1 Overview of the Computation Function

Type Operator Example Description

Addition + 001+002 Obtain the sum of the measured data of channel 001 and channel 002.

Subtraction - 002-001 Obtain the difference of the measured data of channel 002 and channel 001.

Multiplication * 003*K1 Multiply constant K1 to the measured data of channel 003.

Division / 004/K2 Divide the measured data of channel 004 by constant K2.

Power ** 005**006 Take the power of measured data of channel 005 with the measured data of

channel 006.

Absolute value ABS() ABS(001) Obtain the absolute value of the measured data of channel 001.

Square root SQR() SQR(002) Obtain the square root of the measured data of channel 002.

Common logarithmLOG() LOG(003) Obtain the common logarithm of the measured data of channel 003.

Natural Logarithm LN() LN(004) Obtain the natural logarithm of the measured data of channel 004.

Exponent EXP() EXP(005) Make the measured data of channel 005 to be x and obtain ex.

* +/- can be used as signs as in -(001).

Logical operators

Type Operator Example Description

Logical product AND 001AND002 when channel 001=0 and channel 002=0, “0”.

when channel 001=nonzero and channel 002=0, “0”.

when channel 001=0 and channel 002=nonzero, “0”.

when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero, “1”.

Logical sum OR 001OR002 when channel 001=0 and channel 002=0, “0”.

when channel 001=nonzero and channel 002=0, “1”.

when channel 001=0 and channel 002=nonzero, “1”.

when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero, “1”.

Exclusive OR XOR 001XOR002 when channel 001=0 and channel 002=0, “0”.

when channel 001=nonzero and channel 002=0, “1”.

when channel 001=0 and channel 002=nonzero, “1”.

when both channel 001 and channel 002 are nonzero, “0”.

Logical negation NOT NOT001 when channel 001=0, “1”.

when channel 001=nonzero, “0”.

Relational operators

Type Operator Example Description

Equal .EQ. 001.EQ.002 when channel 001 = channel 002, “1”.

when channel 001 ≠ channel 002, “0”.

Not equal .NE. 002.NE.001 when channel 001 ≠ channel 002, “1”.

when channel 001 = channel 002, “0”.

Greater than .GT. 003.GT.K1 when channel 003 > constant K1, “1”.

when channel 003 ≤ constant K1, “0”.

Less than .LT. 004.LT.K10 when channel 004 < constant K10, “1”.

when channel 004 ≥ constant K10, “0”.

Greater than or .GE. 003.GE.K1 when channel 003 ≥ constant constant K1, “1”.

equal to when channel 003 < constant K1, “0”.

Less than or .LE. 004.LE.K10 when channel 004 ≤ constant K10, “1”.

equal to when channel 004 > constant K10, “0”.

Specified channel statistical operators

Type Operator Example Description

Maximum value TLOG.MAX() TLOG.MAX(001) Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of channel

001.

Minimum value TLOG.MIN() TLOG.MIN(002) Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of channel

002.

Max-min value TLOG.P-P() TLOG.P-P(003) Obtain the P-P value of the measured data of channel 003.

Total value TLOG.SUM() TLOG.SUM(004) Obtain the total value of the measured data of channel 004.

Average value TLOG.AVE() TLOG.AVE(005) Obtain the average value of the measured data of channel 005.

* Statistical computation of the measured data from the start of the statistical computation until it is

stopped. When combining with each of the operators, MAX(), MIN(), P-P(), SUM(), and AVE(), the

value that can be specified inside the () is limited to the input channel number or the computation channel

number (refer to next page) (Example: TLOG.MAX(A01)).

12-2 IM DR232-01E

12.1 Overview of the Computation Function

Statistical operators within the group

Type Operator Example Description

Maximum value CLOG.MAX() CLOG.MAX(G01) Obtain the maximum value of the measured data of group G01.

Minimum value CLOG.MIN() CLOG.MIN(G02) Obtain the minimum value of the measured data of group G02.

Max-min value CLOG.P-P() CLOG.P-P(G03) Obtain the P-P value of the measured data of group G03.

Total value CLOG.SUM() CLOG.SUM(G04) Obtain the total value of the measured data of group G04.

Average value CLOG.AVE() CLOG.AVE(G05) Obtain the average value of the measured data of group G05.

* Statistical computation of the measured data of the input channel within the same group measured at the

same time every specified interval.

Special operators

Type Operator Example Description

Previous value* PRE() PRE(001) Obtain the previous measured data of channel 001

Hold** HOLD(): HOLD(001):TLOG.SUM(002)

When the measured value of channel 001 changes from

0 to a nonzero value, maintain the displaying integrated

value of the measured data of channel 002 while the

measured value of channel 001 is nonzero.

Reset** RESET(): RESET(001):TLOG.SUM(002) When the channel 001 = nonzero, reset the integrated

value of the measured data of channel 002

* Previously measured data or computed data. In the case of computed data, the value is set to 0 when the

computation is reset. At the start of the computation, if the computation was reset, the value is “0”. If it

was not reset, the value is the last value of the previous computation. The value that can be specified

inside the() is limited to the input channel number (001 to 060) or the computation channel number (A01

to A60). Each computing equation can be used once.

** When specifying HOLD(A):B or RESET(A):B, A and B are channel numbers or computing equations.

These can be used once in the beginning of the computing equation.

Limitations in computing equations

Multiple operators can be used in 1 computing equation. But, there are following limitations.

- Number of characters that can be used : 40 characters

- Total number of channel numbers and constants: 16 (Computation erroro ccurs when 16

exceeded, and the computed result becomes +OVER or -OVER)

- Computation channel numbers: Computation channel numbers less than the current

computation channel number can be used as variables within the computing equation.

Example: A02=001+A01 ← Computation channel numbers greater than or equal to A03 can

not be used in this computation.

- Statistical operators (TLOG. or CLOG.) can only be used once in 1 computing equation.

Computation channel

A total of 60 computation channels are available (A01 to A60).

Constant

A total of 60 constants can be set (K01 to K60).

Flag (F01 to F16)

Flags can be set in computing equations as constants (1 or 0). Flags are normally 0, but it is set to

1 when a certain event occurs according to the event/action function. For example, if the

computing equation is set to

NOTF01*TLOG.SUM(001),

and FLAG:F01 is set as an edge action of an event/action, F01 becomes 1 when the event occurs.

This causes NOTF01 to become 0 and the SUM of channel 001 to become 0.

Computation range

If the result exceeds ±10308 during computation, an overflow will occur.

Data applicable for computation

The following data is used for computation.

• Measured data: Specified by channel No. (001 to 560).

• Computed data: Specified by computation channel No. (A01 to A60).

• Constant: Value specified for K01 to K60.

• Group data: Measured data of channels belonging to a group. Specified by group No. (G01 to

G07). This is applicable only for CLOG.

• Communication input data: Data written to the instrument’s memory via communication

interface. Specified by data No. (C01 to C60).

• Data on internal RAM disk: Applicable only for the DR232-1/DR242-1 (equipped with a

floppy disk drive). Measured/computed data saved in the internal RAM disk. Specified by

M001 to M560 (for measured data) or MA01 to MA60 (for computed data).

12-3

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

12.1 Overview of the Computation Function

Handling of data for computation

For computation, measured/computed data is treated as a value having no unit. For instance, if

the measured data for channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data for channel 002 is 20 V, the

computation result of “001 + 002” will be 40.

Priority of Operators

Priority of operators when they are used in an equation is shown below. Operators are listed in

order of priority, from the highest to the lowest.

Type Operator

Function ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), LN(), EXP(), MAX(), MIN(), P-P(), SUM(),

AVE(), PRE(), HOLD():, RESET():

Repeated multiplication **

Sign, logical negation +, -, NOT

Multiplication, division *, /

Addition, subtraction +, -

Greater, smaller .GT., .LT., .GE., .LE.

Equal, not equal .EQ., .NE.

Logical AND AND

Logical OR, exclusive OR OR, XOR

Alarm

Up to 4 alarms can be set for each computation channel. Only two types of alarm are available:

upper-limit alarm (H) and lower-limit alarm (L). Hysteresis is always set to “0”. For a detailed

description of alarm setting, refer to 8.1, “Setting Alarms and Relays (including internal

switches)” (page 8-1).

Event/action function

The event/action function can be used to start/stop computation and clear computation channels in

case an event takes place. refer to 9.1, “Setting Event/Action Functions” (page 9-1).

Actions to be taken in case of overflow and computation error

Actions to be taken in case of an error during computation can be specified.

• Error display: +OVER or -OVER is displayed.

• Error data during TLOG or CLOG: The operator is asked to select whether to display the data

as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation.

• Overflow data during TLOG or CLOG: The operator is asked to select whether to display the

data as a computation error or ignore the error and continue computation. The operator is also

asked to select whether or not the data be used as the upper-/lower-limit value.

Description of the upper-/lower-limit value is given below:

Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied: Specified scaling upper-/lower-

limit

Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied: Upper-/lower-limit of the

measuring range

Computation channels: Specified LEFT/RIGHT value

12-4 IM DR232-01E

12.2 Setting a Computation Equation

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=MATH

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST TREND TIMER LOG ↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

ENTER

A01-01:MODE=ON

>Select Channel No.

A01-01:MODE=ON

>Select Channel No.

A01-30:MODE=ON

OFF ON

CALC=001+002

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( ) C G M A .NE.

CALC=001+002

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( ) C G M A .NE.

CALC=001+002

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ( ) C G M A .NE.

LEFT=-3000.000Kg

>Span limit (–9999.999 ~9999.999Kg)

RIGHT= 3000.000Kg

>Span limit (–9999.999 ~9999.999Kg)

***SET OK***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET=

MATH

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER

12-5

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

A computation equation can be set for up to 60 channels (A01 to A60).

Setting the mode

If “A01-60 MODE=ON” is specified as in the example given on the previous page, the same

equation can be set for channels A01 to A60. To set an equation for one channel only, specify,

for instance, “A01-A01 MODE=ON”.

Computation equation

In addition to operators described on page 12-1, the following symbols can be used in equations.

(/) : Used for ( ) setting.

K : Used if equations contain constants K01 to K60.

M : Used to specify the measurement channel No. for which the data saved on the RAM disk

is to be re-generated. Applicable for the DR232-1/DR242-1 equipped with a floppy disk

drive.

A : Used to specify the computation channel No. for which the data saved on the RAM disk is

to be re-generated. Applicable for the DR232-1/DR242-1 equipped with a floppy disk

drive.

C : Used to specify communication input data (digital data).

G : Used to specify the group No. for which CLOG (computation of data of a group measured

on the same time) is to be used.

Restrictions in equations

Computation channel No

• The specified computation equation for a computation channel No. can contain only

computation channel Nos. as variable which are equal to or smaller than said computation

channel No.

(Example) A02=001+A01

In this example, any computation channel No. which is equal to or greater than A03 cannot be

used.

• Either TLOG or CLOG can be used in an equation.

Note

• Each equation must consist of up to 40 characters.

• The total number of channels and constants to be used for each equation is 16 or smaller.

Setting the recording span

Set the recording span for computation results. The setting range is from -9999999 to 99999999.

The decimal point can be placed in five positions, as represented in x.xxxx, xx.xxx, xxx.xx,

xxxx.x, xxxxx.. The unit specified in 6.1, “Setting Recording Mode/Engineering Unit/Recording

Channel and Recording Interval” (page 6-1) will be used.

LEFT : Sets the left-limit value of the recording span.

RIGHT: Sets the right-limit value of the recording span.

Note

If the computation ON/OFF, computation equation or span setting is changed, the alarm and partial

compression recording settings for the corresponding channel will be reset.

12.2 Setting a Computation Equation

12-6 IM DR232-01E

Example of Settings of CLOG

When computing the maximum, minimum, maximum minus minimum, sum and average of data

measured at the same time on multiple channels, you must configure groups beforehand.

Example of settings where the averages for channels 001, 002, 003, 004, 006 and 008 are

computed:

Configuration of groups:

In the SET menu, assign channels 001, 002, 003, 004, 006 and 008 to group G01, as shown

below:

SET=GROUP

GROUPNo.=G01

G01=001-004, 006, 008

Define the computational expression that computes the average of group 1, as shown below:

CALC=CLOG.AVE (G01)

Computation on Pulse Input Channels

For pulse input channels, you can define the operator TLOG.PSUM (XXXX) where the DR

recorder does not have the optional MATH function (/M1 option). The type of computation is the

integration of the count if the measurement mode is set to RATE (instantaneous count mode) or

the integration of the turn-on time if the measurement mode is set to GATE (instantaneous turn-

on time mode). In either case, the integrated value is the sum of values measured every second.

For this reason, even if you set the measurement interval to 0.5 second, the DR recorder retains

the same value for one second.

Set the maximum count and turn-on time using SPAN. The maximum configurable value is

99999999. Set the interval of summation (integration interval) as a relative or absolute time by

setting the event to TIMER with the event/action functions. Set the action to TIMER RESET.

See Section 9.1, “Setting Event/Action Functions,” (on page 9-1) for details on how to configure

the event/action functions.

If the computational expression is written as TLOG.PSUM (XXX) in the system reconfiguration

where the PULSE INPUT MODULE filed is set to “not installed,” the computational expression,

alarm settings and partial settings are initialized. In addition, if the DR recorder is not a model

with the optional MATH function (/M1 option), groups to which computation channels were

assigned by the group setting and logic boxes to which actions of the MATH function were

assigned by the logic setting are initialized.

Integration interval

Time

State of contact

OFF

You can select whether to treat a result of the computational expression TLOG.PSUM (XXXX)

exceeding 99999999 as an overflow or to continue computing with the value following 99999999

reset to 0. For details on how to make the selection, see Section 12.5, “Setting Action to Be

Carried Out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM.” The

result of computing in this context is that resulting from a separate calculation of TLOG.PSUM

(XXXX). If you set the computational expression as TLOG.PSUM (XXXX)*100, the above

action does not take place even if the result of the calculation TLOG.PSUM (XXXX)*100

exceeds 99999999. If you have made such selection as to continue computing even if the result

exceeds 99999999, the value subsequent to 99999999 is reset to 0. If the next measured value is

4 after the result of computing has proved to be 99999999, that value is not reset to 0 but is

counted in sequence from 0 to 3, giving 3 as the result.

12.2 Setting a Computation Equation

12-7

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

12.3 Setting a Constant

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SET=CONST

SYSTEM UNIT MATH CONST TREND TIMER LOG ↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

• Press the SET key to enter the SET menu.

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

• New settings/selections will be kept when you reach the final display of that setting.

CONST No.=K01

K01 K02 K03 K04 K05 K06 K07 K08 K09 K10 ↑

K01=-9.9999E+29

. – + 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 E

***SET OK***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET=

CONST

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER

Up to 60 constants (K01 to K60) can be set.

The number of significant digits is 5 excluding the decimal point. If exponent is used, the

mantissa and exponent must consist of 5 digits and 2 digits, respectively.

Configurable ranges:

-1.0000E+35 to -1.0000E-35

1.0000E-35 to -1.0000E35

12-8 IM DR232-01E

12.4 Starting/Stopping Computation

Computation can be started and stopped from the FUNC menu or using the event/action function.

Starting/stopping computation from the FUNC menu

Press the FUNC key and select the desired operation from the FUNC menu.

• MATH START

Starts computation. This is displayed while computation is not in progress.

• MATH CLR START

Clears computation results then re-starts computation.

Start

Computed data

Start

Stop Clear/start

• MATH STOP

Stops computation. Computation results are not cleared. This is displayed while computation

is in progress.

• MACH ACK

Clears status indication which is displayed in case of incomplete measurement during

computation.

For a detailed description of the FUNC menu, refer to 9.3, “Alarm Acknowledgment, Alarm Rest,

Timer Reset, Keylock, and Message Printout” (page 9-14).

Starting/stopping computation using the event/action function

The event/action function can be used to carry out the following operations.

• MATH START

Starts computation.

• MATH STOP

Stops computation.

• MATH CLEAR

Clears data before the first computation is carried out.

Start Clear Measurement interval

Computed data

• MATH RESET

Clears data after the first computation is carried out.

Start Reset Measurement interval

Computed data

12-9

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

Event/action function

An example of setting the event/action function is given below.

Set the event/action function if you want to reset the results after computation is carried out for a

certain period of time, then resume computation.

1. Set TIMER RST for the MFUNC KEY:1 event.

2. Set MATH:START for the same MFUNC KEY:1 event.

3. Set MATH:RESET for TIMER:1 event.

4. Set the mode for TIMER No.1 to RELATIVE and TIME to “00 01:00”.

After the above settings have been made, press the MFUNC1 key. Timer 1 will be reset

according to the above steps 1 and 2, then computation starts. After elapse of one hour,

computation results will be reset according to step 3, but computation will still continue. When a

further hour elapses, computation results will be reset. The above operations will be carried out

repeatedly until computation is stopped.

For a detailed description of the event/action function, refer to 9.1, “Setting Event/Action

Functions” (page 9-1). Refer to pages 2-9, 6-2 and 6-3 for a description of timers.

Status display during computation

The following status symbols are displayed in the sub-display 2 (lowest display section).

: Computation is in progress.

: Incomplete measurement has occurred. If this status occurs frequently, reduce the number

of equations or reduce the measurement period. The number of equations may be too large

for computation to be carried out within the specified measurement period.

Restrictions during computation

The following settings cannot be made while computation is in progress.

• Measuring range

• Computation equation/constant

• Group

• Copying with RANGE COPY set to on

12.4 Starting/Stopping Computation

12-10 IM DR232-01E

Examples of Setting Using the Event/Action Functions

• Sum the values measured on channel 001 from 8:00 to 9:00 every day.

Setting the MATCH TIME field:

Configure the DR recorder so events occur at 8:00 and 9:00 every day.

MATCH TIME No.=1

1 2 3

1:TIME=00 08:00

>Set Day & Time DD HH:MM:00

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

MATCH TIME No.=2

1 2 3

1:TIME=00 09:00

>Set Day & Time DD HH:MM:00

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

MATCH TIME

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

ENTER

Selects match timer no. 1.

Sets the date to 00 and time to

8:00.

Selects match timer no. 2.

Sets the date to 00 and time to

9:00.

Setting the EVENT/ACTION fields:

Configure the DR recorder so it uses the match time as the event to clear computed values and

then start computing at 8:00 and ends computing at 9:00.

LOGIC BOX No.=1

(01 to 30)

EVT=MATCH TIME:1

ACT=EDGE / MATH : CLEAR

***SET OK***(configuration complete)

LOGIC BOX No.=2

(01 to 30)

EVT=MATCH TIME:1

ACT=EDGE / MATH : START

***SET OK***(configuration complete)

LOGIC BOX No.=3

(01 to 30)

EVT=MATCH TIME:2

ACT=EDGE / MATH : STOP

***SET OK***(configuration complete)

LOGIC

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

ENTER

Selects match time 1.

Selects match time 2.

Provides the setting

for clearing computed

values.

Provides the setting

for starting computing.

Provides the setting

for ending computing.

Computation equation:

CALC=TLOG.SUM (001)

If, in the event/action functions, you have assigned the same event to more than one LOGIC BOX

number at the same time, the DR recorder executes computing, beginning with the smallest

LOGIC BOX number. In the above configuration, the DR recorder clears computed values at

8:00 and starts computing. The values and behaviors of the event/action functions when

computing is done with the above configuration are as follows:

12.4 Starting/Stopping Computation

12-11

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

8:00 9:00 8:00 of the

next day 9:00 of the next day

Results of

computing

Resetting of computed value

Start of computing Resetting of computed value

Start of computing

End of

computing End of

computing

Time

Logic box 1

Logic box 2

Logic box 3

• Sum the values measured on channel 001 every hour.

Setting the TIMER field:

Configure the DR recorder so an event occurs every hour with reference to the hour 00:00.

TIMER No.=1

1 2 3 4 5 6

1: TIMER MODE=ABSOLUTE

1: TIME=1h

1: REF TIME=00:00

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

TIMER

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

ENTER

Absolute time

ENTER

One-hour interval

Sets the

reference time.

Setting the EVENT/ACTION fields:

Configure the DR recorder so it clears computed values at the time set on the timer.

LOGIC BOX No.=1

(01 to 30)

EVT=TIMER:1

ACT=EDGE / MATH : CLEAR

***SET OK***

(configuration complete)

LOGIC

ENTER ENTER

ENTER

SET=

(Main menu item)

(Submenu items)

ENTER

Selects timer 1.

Resets the

computed value.

Computation equation:

CALC=TLOG.SUM (001)

To start computing, press the FUNC key and select MATH START from the FUNC menu.

The values and the behaviors of the event/action functions when computing is done with the

above configuration are as follows:

9:00 11:00

Results

of computing

Resetting of computed value

Time

End of setting

Start of computing

00:00

10:00

8:00 13:00 14:00 15:00 16:00 17:00

Reference time

12.4 Starting/Stopping Computation

12-12 IM DR232-01E

12.5 Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of

Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for

TLOG SUM

D I S P M O D E

P R I N TF U N C

I N S D E L

R A N G E A L A R M

S E TC H A R T E N T E R

F E E D

M. F U N C 1

M. F U N C 2

RECORD

ALARM

CHART

KEYLOCK

R E C O R D

SETUP=MATH

PRN ADJ SCAN INTVL RECORD MATH ALARM A↑

>Select Setting Parameter

E S C

Carry out the following steps to enter the SET UP menu.

1. If the SET UP menu is not currently displayed, turn the power OFF

2. While holding the DISP key, turn the power ON. Make sure you still continue to hold down

the DISP key for approximately another five seconds..

• Select/set using the keys.

• To escape from a lower menu, press the MODE (ESC) key. Its main menu will appear,

although new settings/selections will not be kept.

ENTER

MATH ERROR=+OVER

+OVER –OVER

TLOG TIME SCALE=/SEC

OFF /SEC /MIN /HOUR

TLOG CH ERROR=SKIP

ERROR SKIP

TLOG CH OVER=ERROR

ERROR SKIP LIMIT

TLOG PSUM OVER=OVER

OVER ROTATE

***MATH SET***

(End of setting)

ENTER

SET UP=

MATH

ESC

(Main menu)

ENTER

12-13

IM DR232-01E

Executing Computation

(Available with the /M1 Model)

Displaying/recording in case of computation error (MATH ERROR)

Used to determine whether +OVER or -OVER be displayed/recording in case of computation

error.

Time axis scale for TLOG SUM (TLOG TIME SCALE)

For TLOG.SUM of time series, data is added at each measurement interval. However, in the case

of an input having unit of /s, /min or /h like flow rate, the computation result will differ from the

actual value, if addition of data is carried out. In this case, setting TLOG TIME SCALE

according to the unit of the input will cause the data measured at measurement intervals to be

processed according to the unit of the input.

For instance, if the measurement interval is 2s and input value is 100 m3/min, the computation

result will be 30000 after the elapse of one minute, since 100 is added every 2 seconds. Setting

TLOG TIME SCALE to /min will cause the measured data to be multiplied by 2s/60s at each

measurement interval, thus making the result close to the actual input value.

If this function is set to OFF, simple addition of data will be carried out.

Process of abnormal data during TLOG or CLOG (TLOG CH ERROR)

Used to select the process method for abnormal data obtained during TLOG or CLOG.

• ERROR : Abnormal data is processed as a computation error.

• SKIP : Abnormal data is ignored and computation is continued.

Process of overflow data during TLOG or CLOG (TLOG CH OVER, SUM or AVE)

Used to select the process method for overflow data obtained during TLOG or CLOG.

• ERROR : Overflow data is processed as a computation error.

• SKIP : Overflow data is ignored and computation is continued.

• LIMIT : Overflow data is treated as the next data for computation.

Measurement channels to which linear scaling is applied: Specified scaling upper-/lower-limit

Measurement channels to which no linear scaling is applied: Upper-/lower-limit of the

measuring range

Computation channels: Specified LEFT/RIGHT value

Processing of the results of TLOG.PSUM computation

• OVER: If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG.PSUM (XXXX) exceeds 99999999, the

DR recorder goes into an overflow.

• ROTATE: If the result of a separate calculation of TLOG.PSUM (XXXX) exceeds 99999999,

the DR recorder resets the value subsequent to 99999999 to 0 and continues computing.

The process is effective only when a pulse input module is installed.

12.5

Setting Actions to be Carried out in Case of Computation Error and Setting the Time Axis for TLOG SUM

13-1

IM DR232-01E

Trouble-shooting

and Maintenance

13.1 Periodic Maintenance and Recommended Parts

Replacement Period

Periodic maintenance

Check the recorder’s operation periodically to keep it in good operating condition. Especially

check the following items and replace consumable parts as needed. Do not use a lubricant for

periodic maintenance.

• Are display and recording functioning properly?

• Are there blurred or broken sections of the recording or printout characters?

When replacing the ribbon cassette, refer to Section 3.4, “Installing the Chart and Ribbon

Cassette.”

• Is the chart paper feeding properly? When replacing the ribbon cassette, see Section 3.4,

“Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette.”

• Is there enough chart paper left?

• The remaining chart paper length is printed in the left margin of the chart at 20-cm intervals.

• When replacing the chart paper, see Section 3.4, “Installing the Chart and Ribbon Cassette.”

If problems develop with the recorder, see Section 13.3, “Troubleshooting.”

Recommended parts replacement period

It is necessary that recorder parts be replaced periodically for use of the recorder over an extended

period of time. The table below shows the recommended parts replacement periods for specific

parts that wear out. These replacement periods indicate where the recorders have been used under

normal operating conditions. When replacing parts, refer to these replacement periods taking the

actual operating conditions into consideration. When replacing parts other than the chart paper,

ribbon cassette, or fuse, please contact your nearest Sales representative. Addresses may be found

on the back cover of this manual.

Part Part number Replacement Description

period (in years)

Display B9233KJ 3.4 30,000 hours

Fuse A1350EF 2 For AC power supply (2.5A, time-lag fuse)

Fuse B9573TZ 10 For printer board (500 mA)

Motor B9233EA 5 For chart paper

Motor (DR232) B9232CM 5 For carriage (with a screw shaft)

Motor (DR242) B9233EF 5 For carriage (with a screw shaft)

Motor B9233GR 3 For ribbon cassette

Lithium battery B9234XZ 10 For backup of information that has been set

Fluorescent lamp B9628ZN 3,4 Internal assembly lighting (30,000 hours)

Printer head B9233HZ 3 1.5 × 108 dots (depend on the set conditions)

Carriage B9233GA 5 Depends on the set conditions.

13-2 IM DR232-01E

13.2 Replacing the Fuse

WARNING

• The fuse must be of the specified rating (current, voltage, type) to

prevent a fire hazard.

• Be sure to turn off the power switch and to unplug the power cord

before replacing the fuse.

• Never short-circuit the fuse holder.

Fuse Rating:

The fuse must have the following specifications:

Maximum rated voltage: 250 V Maximum rated current: 2.5 A Type:

time-lag

Standard: IEC/VDE certified Part number: A1350EF

Replacement procedure:

To replace the fuse, proceed as follows:

DR232

1. Turn off the power switch.

2. Unplug the power cord from the power outlet.

3. Remove the fuse holder at the side of the power connector on the rear panel.

4. Remove the blown fuse from the holder.

5. Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place.

DR242

1. Turn off the power switch.

2. Disconnect the power connections.

3. Open the front and display doors to gain access to the fuse holder. Use a standard screwdriver

to turn the fuse-holder screw counterclockwise. Then remove the fuse holder.

4. Remove the blown fuse from the holder.

5. Insert a new fuse into the holder and then install the holder in place.

Note

The fuse is located in the subunit. This fuse may not be replaced by the customer. For replacement, contact

your nearest representative. For AC power supply model, the fuse ratings are 250V2A time lag fuse

certified by IEC/VDE. For DC power supply model, the fuse ratings are 250V6.3A time lag fuse certified

by UL/CSA.

13-3

IM DR232-01E

Trouble-shooting

and Maintenance

13.3 Troubleshooting

If an error code appears on the display, see Section 13.4, “Error Codes.”

If servicing is necessary, or if the instrument is not operating correctly though the following

corrective actions have been taken, please contact Yokogawa Engineering Service Corporation.

Addresses may be found on the back cover of this manual.

Problem Probable Cause Corrective Action

Recorder does not operate. Power switch is off. Turn on the power.

(The recorder carriage and chart do Power supply is not Connect properly.

not move.) connected properly.

Supplied power does not Use power meeting its requirements.

meet powerrequirements.

Fuse blown. Replace fuse. (If the fuse blows immediately after turning on the

power, servicing will be required.)

Output beyond its limits Input specifications are not Correct input specifications.

Fluctuating indication correct.

Carriage swung over.

Incorrect measuring range or Change measuring range or recording span.

recording span

Noise superimposed. Connect input wiring far away from noise source.

Ground recorder.

Ground measurement object.

Isolate thermocouple from measurement object.

Use shielded wiring for input line.

Change A/D integral times.

Use moving average.

Use input filter.

No countermeasure taken Install input terminal cover properly.

against ambient temperature Protect recorder from blowing air of fan.

changes.

Keep temperature changes near input terminals small.

Input connected improperly. Connect input properly.

Connect module properly.

Tighten screws properly.

Isolate RTD from ground.

Replace disconnected thermocouples.

Recorder connected in parallel Do not use burnout functions in other instruments.

with other instruments.

Ground recorder and other instruments in the same ground line.

Do not connect recorder in parallel with other instruments

(for use with dual-element TC).

RJC set improperly Set RJC properly.

(for TC input)

Dot-printing position Calibrate correctly.

not calibrated correctly.

Other cause. Contact Yokogawa Engineering Service.

Defective display Noise superimposed. Lay input wiring far away from noise source.

Ground recorder.

Ground measurement object.

Isolate TC from measurement object.

Use shielded wires for input line.

Change A/D integration times.

Use input filter.

Data indicates “xxxxxx” Input module connected Connect input properly.

improperly

Recorder does not work even with Key-lock not released. Disable key-lock functions in setup mode.

operation key pressed. Recorder set in remote mode. Set recorder in local mode.

Other cause. Contact Yokogawa Engineering Service.

13-4 IM DR232-01E

13.4 Error Codes

If servicing is necessary, or if the recorder does not operate correctly even though the following

corrective actions have been taken, contact your nearest Sales representative. Addresses may be

found on the back cover of this manual.

Error Code Error Corrective Action

001 System error. Contact your nearest representaive.

002 Set data out of range. Set numeric data correctly.

003 Time set incorrectly. Set time correctly.

004 Channels set incorrectly. Set channels correctly.

005 Invalid setting function parameter. Set parameter correctly.

006 Invalid character string. Set character string correctly.

007 Invalid type of input for input module. Set the type of input correctly.

008 Invalid range setting for input module. Set range correctly.

009 Numeric values out of range. Set numeric values correctly.

011 Attempted to do manual, header, list or Install new chart paper.

setup list printout at the end of chart paper.

030 There may be a module that cannot be set Re-set ranges or channels with

in channels with continuous ranges. continuous ranges.

031 There may be an invalid module in channels Change channels in which

with continuous ranges. continuous ranges are set.

040 Reference channel number greater than Change the reference channel number.

that of the channel for interchannel

differential computations.

041 Skipped range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel.

interchannel differential computations.

042 RPJC range in the reference channel for Change the range in the reference channel.

interchannel differential computations.

043 SCALE in range setting in the reference Change the range in the reference channel.

channel for interchannel differential

computations.

044 The reference channel for interchannel Change the reference channel number.

differential computations does not exist.

045 The left and right spans are identical. Change the scale setpoint.

046 The left and right scale values are identical. Change the scale setpoint value.

060 The alarm setting was made in the channel Change ranges.

where SKIP was set.

061 The alarm was set to a channel with ranges Change ranges.

where alarm setting cannot be set.

062 The alarm setpoint is out of range in a Set correct alarm setpoint.

channel with continuous ranges.

063 Relay number set incorrectly. Set relay number correctly.

080 Invalid character strings for group setting. Set character strings correctly.

081 Invalid channel in character string for group Set channel correctly.

setting.

083 Partial compaction set to a channel where Change ranges.

SKIP was set.

084 Partial compaction set to a channel in Change ranges.

which ranges cannot be partially compacted.

085 Partial compaction out of range in a channel Set correct partial compaction range.

with continuous ranges.

086 The left and right zones have the same values. Change zone set values.

087 The left zone is wider than the right zone. Change zone set values.

088 The left and right zones are less than 5 mm Change zone set values.

apart wide.

089 Copy channel setting error. Sets the correct channel.

090 Attempted to copy a message with the same Change copy source or destination.

source and destination number.

091 Illegal protocol for logic setting. Set correct protocol.

100 No equation option Not possible to make any computation

settings.

101 Invalid code in the equation Set the equation correctly.

102 Incorrect number of ( ) in the equation Set the correct number of ( ).

103 Syntax error Set the equation correctly.

13-5

IM DR232-01E

Trouble-shooting

and Maintenance

13.4 Error Codes

104 Illegal character(s) or code(s) is used before Set the equation correctly.

or after an operator.

105 The right and left spans are the same. Change the span.

106 Attempted to make range setting during Stop making range setting.

computation.

110 Syntax error for computation constant Set the constant correctly.

111 Out of constant setting range Set the constant within the range.

120 Floppy disk not inserted or not formatted. Insert a formatted floppy disk into the

drive.

121 Insufficient memory Delete unnecessary files.

122 Incorrect file name or volume name Set the correct file name or volume name.

123 Attempted to make settings which are not Stop making the settings.

allowed to be made during saving or reading

of measured data.

124 Too many files in the media Delete unnecessary files.

125 Attempted to read data which was saved Select data which has been saved

by another instrument model. by DR/DA.

127 Attempted to save data in a write-protected file. Cancel write-protection.

128 No event/action has been set. Set the desired action .

130 Incorrect channel found during saving Set the correct channel.

or reading of measured data.

131 RAM disk error or floppy disk is ejected while Clear the error and attemt the same operation

bein accessed. or contact your nearest sales represantative.

132 Attempted to format the disk while a file is open. Close the file.

134 Set-up data saving error

135 Internal data error

136 Incorrect copy channel Set the correct copy channel.

137 Computation is started while set-up data is Stop Computation.

being saved or read.

138 Floppy disk error Use another floppy disk.

139 Other media related error

140 Sub-units selected which are not connected, Specify correct sub-units.

or the power is not supplied.

141 Disconnected modules were selected. Specify correct modules.

143 Modules selected which cannot be calibrated. Specify correct modules.

144 Calibration done improperly. Check electrical connections.

Calibrate again.

If the same error occurs again, contact

your nearest Sales representative.

145 Hardware becomes faulty during calibration. Turn off the power and then on.

Calibrate again.

If the same error occurs again, contact

your nearest Sales representative.

170 The IP address does not belong to any of the Set the correct IP address.

classes, A, B, or C.

171 There is a hole in the mask or the host Set the correct subnet mask.

address section is not released.

172 The net address section including the subnet Set the correct net address.

does not match the subnet section of the IP

address.

173 The host address section of the IP address is Set the correct IP address.

either all zeroes or all ones.

ROM ERROR System ROM error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

ROM ERROR* System ROM error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

RAM ERROR Main memory error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

RAM-DISK ERROR RAM disk error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

FLOPPY ERROR Floppy disk error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

MAIN NV READ ERROR Internal nonvolatile memory read error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

MAIN NV WRITE ERROR Internal nonvolatile memory write error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

CARRIAGE CANNOT MOVE Printer error Contct your nearest sales

representative.

SYSTEM ERROR System error ( : number) Check whether each unit or

( : number) power code is connected

properly after turning off the

power switch. If the same

error occurs again even though

you turn on the power switch,

contact your nearest sales

representative.

RESET ERROR An error occurs between the main unit Same as abeve.

and communication module.

13-6 IM DR232-01E

13.5 Calibration

Overview

We recommend that you calibrate the DR232 at least once a year to assure its measurement

accuracy. When calibrating, please contact your nearest Sales representative at its address on the

back cover of this manual.

Press and hold the MODE key and then turn on the power switch to place the recorder in the

calibration mode. Select the subunit and module to calibrate the recorder on a module basis.

After completing the calibration, turn off the power and then turn it back on when resuming the

measurements.

CAUTION

You can use the DISPLAY mode only for a calibration adjustment. If it is

maladjusted, the recorder may become faulty. For details, please

contact your nearest Sales representative.

Calibration needs selection of:

• a subunit and module and;

• the calibration mode.

Once the subunit and module have been selected, they are no longer selected again as long as the

calibration END mode is not executed.

Calibration mode

• CAL/EXEC mode: This mode enables specified ranges to be calibrated.

• DISPLAY mode: This mode enables current calibrated values to be displayed.

• END mode: This mode enables calibrated values to be stored in the internal nonvolatile

memory and terminates the calibration mode. (If ABORT is selected, the calibrated values are

not stored in memory.)

Subunit/module selection error

The following error messages are displayed:

• The specified subunit remains disconnected. Or the power supply is not turned on.

• The specified module remains disconnected (ERROR141).

• The specified module is such that it cannot be calibrated (ERROR143).

Calibrated data error

The following error messages are displayed:

• Attempted to remove the module during calibration. Or hardware error: ERROR145

• Invalid calibrated data: ERROR144

• Attempted to set invalid numeric values in the DISPLAY mode: ERROR145

Note

When a calibrated data error appears, the error data are stored in memory.

13-7

IM DR232-01E

Trouble-shooting

and Maintenance

Required Equipment

Name Measurement Accuracy Recommended

Range

DC Voltage Generator 0V to 50V 0.005% of setting+1µV Yokogawa 9000*, 4808

DMM 0V to 50V 0.005% of setting+1µV HP3458A

Decade Resistance Box 0.1Ω to 1000Ω0.01% Yokogawa 2793

DC Current Generator 0 to 20mA 0.05% of setting Yokogawa 7651

* For 0V input, it is necessary to either short the input terminals, or to monitor the output voltage using the

DMM.

Calibrating Conditions

Ambient temperature : 23°C±2°C

Ambient humidity : 55 ±10%RH

AC power supply voltage: 100 to 240 VAC (AC power supply model)

DC power supply voltage: 12 to 28 VDC (the subunit of DC power supply model omly)

Power supply frequency : 50/60 Hz ±1%

Warm-up time : at least 30 minutes for this recorder, and necessary warm-up time for

the used equipment

Connection (terminal screw connections)

• DC Voltage Measurement

• Apply a rated voltage in the voltage range that is to be calibrated to channel 3.

+–

DC Voltage Generator

Input terminal

(CH3)

• Short-circuit between “+” and “–” terminals in channel 2.

+–

Input terminal

(CH2)

• Temperature Measurement Using RTD

• apply the 100Ω resistance to channel 5.

BbA

Decade Resistance Box

Input terminal

(CH5)

• Short-circuit the resistance input terminals A, B, and b in channel 4.

BbA

Input terminal

(CH4)

13.5 Calibration

13-8 IM DR232-01E

• DC Current Measurement

Apply the 20mA to channel 3

+–

Input terminal

(CH3)

DC Current Generator

Short circuit between “+” and “–” terminal in channel 2

+–

Input terminal

(CH2)

• Strain measurement

Perform calibrations using 4-gauge method.

Use a 319300 bridge box for the Du500-14’s bridge box.

Wire the strain gauge or the bridge box to the channel 2.

Jumper setting switch

OFF

No.1

No.2

No.3

No.4

No.5

A(+)

B(L)

C(-V)

D(H)

DU500-12/DU500-13 DU500-14

No.1

OFF No.2

OFF No.3

OFF No.4

OFF No.5

12 3 4

5678

R3R1

To R1 to R4, connect resistors with the specifications described below.

Calibration Resistors R1, R2&R3 Resistor R4 Accuracy

ZERO 120.000 120.000 ±0.005%, ±0.3ppm/°C

2k SPAN 120.000 119.521 ±0.005%, ±0.3ppm/°C

20k SPAN 120.000 115.294 ±0.005%, ±0.3ppm/°C

200k SPAN 120.000 80.000 ±0.005%, ±0.3ppm/°C

13.5 Calibration

13-9

IM DR232-01E

Trouble-shooting

and Maintenance

Entering the calibration mode

1. While pressing and holding the MODE key, turn on the power.

Selecting the subunit and module numbers

2. With , select the subunit number.

S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

0 1 2 3 4 5

3. With , move the cursor.

4. With , select the module number.

S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

0 1 2 3 4 5

5. Press the ENTER key.

Calibrating in CAL/EXEC mode

6. With , select the CAL/EXEC mode.

ADJUST MODE=CAL/EXEC

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

DISPLAY CAL/EXEC END

7. Press the ENTER key.

8. With , select the calibration range.

ADJUST RANGE=20mV

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt : 1mA P ↑

9. Enter the rated value in the selected range.

10.Press the ENTER key to execute calibration. During the calibration, the following display

appears.

A/D Adjusting

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V 50V Pt : 1mA P ↑

11.After calibration is completed, the following display appears.

* * * CALC END * * *

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

>ADJUST RANGE=20mV

12.Press the ENTER key.

13.5 Calibration

13-10 IM DR232-01E

Checking calibrated values in the DISPLAY mode

Use this mode only for checking calibrated values. In this mode, you can adjust a calibrated value,

but, if this value is invalid, the instrument may be inoperative. For details, contact your nearest

Sales representative.

13.With , select the DISPLAY mode.

ADJUST MODE=DISPLAY

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

DISPLAY CAL/EXEC END

14.Press the ENTER key to display the calibrated value display items.

The following shows where the universal input modules are calibrated.

The calibrating procedures for DC V/TC/DI input modules are those except RTD in universal

input modules.

15.The calibrated values are displayed as follows:

20mV ZERO=– 1

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

16.Press the ENTER key.

17.Display the calibrated-value display items in the following order:

Repeat steps 15 and 16 above.

20 mV SPAN → 60 mV ZERO → 60 mV SPAN → 200 mV ZERO → 200 mV SPAN → 2 V

ZERO → 2 V SPAN → 6 V ZERO → 6 V SPAN → 20 V ZERO → 20 V SPAN → 50 V

ZERO → 50 V SPAN → Pt: 1 mA ZERO → Pt: 1 mA SPAN → Pt: 2 mA ZERO → Pt: 2 mA

SPAN → Pt: 1 mA-H SPAN → Pt: 2 mA-H SPAN → Cu: 2 mA ZERO → Cu: 2 mA SPAN

For a mA-input module, show the calibrated values in the order, 20 mA ZERO and 20 mA

SPAN. For a strain input module, show the calibrated values in the following order:

2k ZERO, 2k SPAN, 20k ZERO, 20k SPAN, 200k ZERO and 200k SPAN.

For a digital input module, show the calibrated value in the following order;

60mV ZERO, 60mV SPAN, 6V ZERO, 6V SPAN.

18.After checking the [Cu: 2 mA SPAN] calibrated value in the above calibrated-value display

items, press the ENTER key.

* * * DISPLAY END * * *

>S_UNIT : MODULE No=0

19.Press the ENTER key.

13.5 Calibration

13-11

IM DR232-01E

Trouble-shooting

and Maintenance

13.5 Calibration

Completing the selected module calibration with the END mode

20.With , select the END mode.

ADJUST MODE=END

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

DISPLAY CAL/EXEC END

21.PRESS the ENTER key.

22.With , select STORE or ABORT.

A/D ADJUST END=ABORT

>S_UNIT0 : MODULE No=0

ABORT STORE

23.Press the ENTER key. Return to operation 2.

Terminating the calibration mode

24.When you return to normal measurement after completing calibration, turn off the power and

then back on.

CAL/EXEC mode (for calibration of a specified range)

• Items for calibration range

• Items for the calibration range vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated.

• For use with universal input modules, select the items for the calibration range from among

the following:

20 mV/60 mV/200 mV/2 V/6 V/20 V/50 V/Pt: 1 mA/Pt: 2 mA/Pt: 1 mA-H/Pt: 2 mA-H/Cu:

2 mA

• When the DC V/TC/DI input module is selected, RTD in the universal input module is not

displayed.

• The choice is 20 mA only for mA-input modules.

• For strain input modules, select from 2k, 20k, 200k and INIT.

INIT: Set defaults in the A/D Adjustment section. Calibration is necessary, however, after

execution.

• For digital input modules, select from 60mV and 6V.

• Displaying error messages

The following error messages are displayed.

• Attempted to remove the module during calibration. Or, hardware error: ERROR145

• Invalid calibrated data: ERROR144

Note

• When calibrating a high-precision RTD (Pt: [ ]-H), do so after calibrating the voltages to maintain

accuracy.

• When a calibrated data error appears, the error data are stored in memory.

• If ERROR145 appears, turn off the power and then back on to restart operation. If the same error occurs

again, the recorder may be defective.

• If ERROR144 appears, check the electrical connections and input data. If the same error occurs again,

the module to be calibrated may be defective.

• When calibrating a strain input module, first calibrate zero (ZERO) and then the span (SPAN).

13-12 IM DR232-01E

DISPLAY mode (to display and adjust the calibrated value)

Use this mode only for checking the calibrated value. In this mode, you can adjust the calibrated

value, but, if it is invalid, the instrument may be inoperative. For details, contact your nearest

Sales representative.

• Calibrated-value display items

• Calibrated-value display items vary depending on the type of module to be calibrated.

• For use with universal input modules, display calibrated-value display items in the following

order:

20 mV ZERO → 20 mV SPAN → 60 mV ZERO → 60 mV SPAN → 200 mV ZERO →

200 mV SPAN → 2 V ZERO → 2 V SPAN → 6 V ZERO → 6 V SPAN → 20 V ZERO →

20 V SPAN → 50 V ZERO → 50 V SPAN → Pt: 1 mA ZERO → Pt: 1 mA SPAN → Pt: 2

mA ZERO → Pt: 2 mA SPAN → Pt: 1 mA-H SPAN → Pt: 2 mA-H SPAN → Cu: 2 mA

ZERO → Cu: 2 mA SPAN

For a mA-input module, show the calibrated values in the order, 20 mA ZERO and 20 mA

SPAN. For a strain input module, show the calibrated values in the following order:

2k ZERO, 2k SPAN, 20k ZERO, 20k SPAN, 200k ZERO and 200k SPAN.

For a digital input module, show the calibrated value in the following order;

60mV ZERO, 60mV SPAN, 6V ZERO, 6V SPAN.

• When the DC V/TC/DI input module is selected, the displayed values for RTD in the

universal input module can be modified without influencing operation of the recorder.

• The calibrated values appear in the above order each time the ENTER key is pressed. If the

MODE key is pressed while displaying calibrated values, the display returns to “A/D

calibration mode selection,” and the calibrated value already adjusted before pressing the

MODE key is canceled. Calibrated values are effective immediately after terminating the

DISPLAY mode.

• Adjustable range and error display

• Adjustable ranges are -32768 to 32767 (excepting 16384, -16384, 16385 and -16383).

• If the following numeric values are set, errors appear.

Outside the range from -32768 to 32767: ERROR002

16384 or -16384: ERROR145

16385 or -16383: ERROR144

Note

• In the adjustable ranges, if the following are not satisfied, the adjusted module is recognized as an error

module.

• Calibrated value (ZERO) : -3277 to 3277 (ideal value = 0)

• Calibrated value (SPAN) : 29491 to -29491 (ideal value = -32768)

–29491(21000) 29491(19000)

–32768(20000)

ZERO calibration

SPAN calibration

–3277 0 3277

19000 to 21000 for strain input modules (ideal value: 20000)

Values in ( ) are for strain input modules.

• When calibrating the DC, TC, or DI input module, you need not calibrate an RTD.

END mode (storing a calibrated value in the internal nonvolatile memory)

Select one of the following two:

• STORE : Stores data in the internal nonvolatile memory.

• ABORT : Cancels the storage of data in the internal nonvolatile memory.

13.5 Calibration

14-1

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/

DS600

Style Numbers DR232/DR242: S8

DS400/DS600: S8

Connecting Subunits to the DR232/DR242

Types of Subunits

Subunit DS400: four modules

Subunit DS600: six modules

Number of Subunits which can be connected

Up to six units can be connected (either DS400 or DS600)

Connection method

Using dedicated cables

Available Modules Main Unit

Communication interface modules : Selectable from GP-IB and RS-232-C

DI/DO modules : Alarm 2-ch output (transfer contact), fail output module,

chart-end output and input signal for remote control (12

points)

Alarm modules : 4-ch output(transfer contact) or 10-ch output (make contact)

• Number of modules which can be connected: 1

Communication module + DI/DO module + alarm module: not more than one

Subunit (DS400/DS600)

Input modules : universal (DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, contact), DCV/TC/DI

Alarm modules : 4-ch output (transfer contact) or 10-ch output (make contact)

DI/DO modules : Alarm 2-ch output (transfer contact), fail output module, chart-end output and

input signal for remote control

• Number of modules which can be connected to one DS400: 4

Input module + alarm module + DI/DO module: max. four

• Number of modules which can be connected to one DS600: 6

Input module + alarm module + DI/DO module: max. six

* Only one DI/DO module can be connected to one system.

Input Measurement range

Refer to 14.2 on page 14-7.

Measurement interval

Selectable from 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20, 30, 60s; max. 500ms/300ch

(with sub-unit connected, filter: OFF, A/D integration period of 20ms or 16.7ms)

A/D integration time

Selectable from 20ms (50Hz), 16.7ms (60Hz), 100ms (10Hz) selectable, or automatically

switched between 50/60Hz. (Except, auto switch does not function on the subunit (DS400/

DS600) of a DC power supply model. Selecting “AUTO” will set the A/D integration time to 20

ms (50 Hz).)

Recording Recording method

Raster scan method, 10-color wire dot recording

Number of recording points

Measurement results: Max.300 points

Recording paper

Ordinary recording chart, Z-fold chart (total width 342.5mm, length 30m)

Effective recording width: 250mm (for dot recording)

Recording colors

Analog trend mode

Dot recording: purple, red, green, blue, brown, black, navy blue, yellowish green, redish purple,

orange (can be specified for each channel)

Digital printout: black

Alarm printout: red (however, alarm release mark: blue

14-2 IM DR232-01E

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

Logging mode

purple

Recording accuracy

Dot recording: ±(0.1% of recording span + measurement accuracy)

Max. recording resolution

Dot recording: ±0.1mm

Recording interval

Dot recording interval for analog trend recording:

FIX:Min. 2s, and same as measurement interval (skipped recording in case of 0.5/1s scans)

AUTO:Min. 2s and linked to measurement interval and chart speed

Digital printout interval for analog trend recording:

MULTIPLE: Specify for each channel from 6 kinds of intervals

SINGLE : Determined automatically from the chart speed and the number of channels used

to print digital values.

Digital value printing interval in the logging mode:

MULTIPLE:Specify for each channel from 6 kinds of intervals

SINGLE:Common to all points

Recording interval change: 2 kinds; changes by event/action function

Recording modes

Analog trend mode and logging mode

Chart paper feed

Chart speed:1 to 1500 mm/hour

Chart speed change:2 kinds; changes by event/action function

Chart feed method:by pulse motor

Chart feed accuracy:±0.1% of length (when recording is performed continuously for at least

1000mm; does not include elongation or shrinkage of paper)

Recording start/stop

Usually starting and stopping of recording is done by means of key operation. However, this can

also be done by the event/action function.

Normal recording

Trend recording on alarm occurrence: trigger/level

Group trend recording

Auxiliary printing functions

During analog trend recording and logging, setting information and comments and such will be

printed. Chart speed (mm/hour) × analog trend recording interval must not exceed 3000.

Printout items: Engineering unit, channel number/TAG, alarm, scale, title, message

Event/Action function

Recording can be started, or the chart speed changed by alarm output status/remote control signal/

chart end signal/timer or key operation.

Relation between the chart speed and recording interval (analog trend mode)

however, chart speed (mm/hour) × analog trend recording interval must not exceed 3000.

Chanel No.

TAG

Alarm scale

message

Digital print

Record disabled

Record enabled

1~9mm/h

10~1500mm/h

Chart speed

Record enabled

Recording interval for digital printout and chart speed

When the logging interval is SINGLE:

however, chart speed (mm/hour) × analog trend recording interval must not exceed 3000.

10~24mm/h

25~49mm/h

50~99mm/h

100~1500mm/h

Chart speed Number of digital print rows

1 row

2 row

3 row

4 row

Unit : hour

When the logging interval is MULTIPLE:

Set by timer.

14-3

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

Other functions

Manual printout: One scan’s worth of data can be digitally printed by a key operation or

eventlaction function.

Zone recording: Recording width and recording positions (0% and 100% positions) can be set in

mm units for each channel in case of dot recording.

Partial compression: A part of the amplitude can be compressed in case of dot recording (only one

boundary).

Display

Display method

VFD (5 × 7 dot matrix, 3 rows)

Number of characters

Main display: 22 large characters (1 row); Sub-display 1 and 2: 40 small characters (2 rows)

Displayed contents

Digital value display: data for freely selected channels can be displayed on each row (1 channel

per line, max. 5 rows); channel No. or tag (up to 7 characters); alarm search; measurement values;

engineering unit

Bargraph display: measurement data of the main display are displayed as a bargraph

Auxiliary data: clock, alarm status, alarm relay status, logging ON/OFF, recorder operation

Alarms (when equipped with Alarm module)

Number of settings

Up to four alarms can be set for each channel.

Kind of alarms: selection from higher limit, lower limit, difference higher limit, difference lower

limit, higher limit on rate of change, lower limit on rate of change.

Rate of change alarm time interval: Can be set to measurement interval × 1 to 15 (common to

both rising and falling limits).

Output mode

Energize/de-energize setting, AND/OR mode setting, and output hold/non-hold setting can be

made (common to all channels).

A maximum number of 6 reflash alarm output points can be specified.

Number of alarm output points

Max. 300 at sub-units (up to 300 can be achieved by increasing the number of alarm modules)

Max. number of alarm modules

Up to 6 modules can be connected to a sub-unit (4 in case of DS400); by increasing the number of

sub-units, up to 30 modules can be connected.

Alarm recording

Analog trend mode:The occurrence/release mark, channel number or tag, kind of alarm, and alarm

item number are printed in the right margin.

Logging mode: The kind of alarm is printed when the measurement data are recorded.

Alarm display

Alarm status indication: Lights or flashes when an alarm is detected.

Alarm acknowledge indication: Indicator stops flashing by key operation.

Standard Computation Functions

Kinds of computation

Difference between channels, linear scaling (scaling) and moving average.

Scaling

Scalable range: DC voltage, TC, RTD, contact

Scaling range: –30000 to +30000

Measurement accuracy for scaling: measurement accuracy for scaling (digits) = measurement

accuracy (digits) × scaling span (digits) / measurement span (digits) + 2 digits. Numbers below

the decimal point are discarded.

(Example)

Measurement accuracy when the following settings are made:

Measuring range: 6 VDC, Measurement span: 1.000 to 5.000 V, Scaling span: 0.000 to 2.000,

Measured value: 5 V

Measurement accuracy = +/-4 digits = +/-0.004 V

Moving average

Moving average results for between 2 to 64 scans are computed.

14-4 IM DR232-01E

Data Save/Load Function

Media for data save/load

Buffer memory (internal SRAM)

Capacity: 512 KB

Data backup: Around 10 years (backup with lithium battery, at room temperature while power is

off)

Specified data length: 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 1k, 2k, 3k, 4k, 5k, 10k, 20k,

30k, 40k, and 50k data/ch (Total memory lengt must be within the free memory size.)

3.5-inch floppy disk

Number of drives: 1

Disk types: 2HD, 2DD

Supported formats: 1.2 MB, 1.44 MB, and 720 KB

Applicable data

Setting values, measured values, and computed values (only possible whe optional math function

is specified)

Method to save to the floppy disk

Copies data stored in the buffer memory to the floppy disk, except for setting values which can

be directly saved to the floppy disk.

Method to load from floppy disk

Copies data from the floppy disk to the buffer memory except for settin values which can be

directly loaded from the floppy disk.

Printing and outputing loaded data

Able to print captured data saved in the buffer memory or output to a communication interface.

Data save format

Setting values: ASCII

Measured/computed values: binary (except ASCII (CSV Format) is also possible when saving to

floppy disk.)

Data capacity

Setting values

Maximum about 250 kB (in case when saving the setting values of an operation mode with 300ch

inputs and 60ch computations.)

Measured values

Binary data: 2 bytes / 1 data

ASCII data: 12bytes / 1 data

Computed values

Binary data: 4 bytes / 1 data

ASCII data: 12 bytes / 1 data

Equation to calculate the total data capacity

576 + 64 × (number of measured ch + number of computation ch) + (number of measured ch ×

2 + number of computation ch × 4 + 6) × specified data length

Save interval of measured/computed values

Measurement interval of the recorder, or select from 1 min/2 min/5 min/10 min (By combining

with the event/action function, it can also sample 1 data at a time e.g. at each M.FUNC key or

remote control signal input.)

Selection of the saving method of measured/computed values (WRITE MODE)

Direct: Start saving the data when key operation occurs. After saving specified length of data,

stop the saving process.

Trigger single: Start saving the data when the trigger condition is met.

After saving a specified length of data, stop the saving process.

Trigger repeat: Start saving the data when the trigger condition is met. Repeat the process of

saving a specified length of data to 1 file, until there is no more area in the memory.

Trigger condition

All Trigger conditions are configured with the event/action function.

Trigger condition when saving the measured/computed values: Event/actio function (such as key

operation, remote control signal, alarm status, and chartend)

Trigger condition when loading the measured/computed values (from buffe memory): Event/

action function (such as key operation, remote control signal, and alarm status)

Pretrigger: 0 to 100% (can be specified in 10% intervals)

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

14-5

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

Filename when saving data

8 ASCII characters input. However, when saving the measured/computed values using trigger

repeat, 5 ASCII characters input (last 3 letters are set automatically from 001 to 208.)

Optional Math Function

Computation types

Types: Four arithmetical operations, SQR(square root), ABS(absolute value), LOG(common

logarithm), LN(natural logarithm), EXP(exponent), statistical computation*, logical computation

(AND, OR, NOT, and XOR), relational computation, exponentiation, previously-measured value

reference, hold**, and reset

* Statistical computation

CLOG: Computation process of simultaneously measured values within a group (total,

maximum, minimum, average, and maximum - minimum)

TLOG: Computation process of a specific channel over time axis (total, maximum, minimum,

average, and maximum - minimum)

Statistical computation interval: Set by the event/action function

**Hold

Temporary suspending of computation and temporary hold of the computed result

During statistical computation, resume the computation from the hold point after the hold is

released.

Number of channels for computing (Number of channels that can be allocated for

computational purposes.)

: 60ch maximum

Computation interval

Every measurement interval (except when the computation becomes too difficult to be processed

every measured interval, in which case an alarm is generated)

Significant digits during computation

±10308

Significant digits of the computed result

-9,999,999 to +99,999,999 (Decimal point can be set to have 1 to 4 digits on the right of the

decimal point)

Input from communication interface

Digital value (ASCII numerical array) input from the communication interface can be handled as

computational data

Computation start/stop

Can be controlled by communication commands, M.FUNC key operation, and event/action

function (such as M.FUNC key operation, remote control signal, timespecified, and alarm status)

Other functions included in the math function: Remote RJC

Input type: Thermocouple (TC)

Accuracy: (Twice the measurement accuracy of the standard thermocouple input) + (temperature

difference between the terminal of the remote terminal section and thermocouple section for

measuring the remote terminal temperature)

Thermocouple burnout: not selectable

14-6 IM DR232-01E

Report Function (feature of the suffix code /M3; available with models with style number

5 or higher)

Report Channels

60 channels, from R01 to R60

Types of Reports

Hourly report: Hourly (every hour) statistical information

Daily report: Statistical information for a day (starting at a specified time)

Monthly report: Statistical information for a month (starting at a specified date and time)

These types of report making can be turned on or off separately.

Output of the Results of Computing for Reports

The DR recorder prints the results on a recording chart or send them to a report output.

Output Formats of the Results of Computing for Reports

Hourly report: Standard format

Daily report: Standard format or enhanced format

Standard format: results of computing daily reports

Enhanced format: results of computing daily reports plus results of computing hourly reports*

Monthly report: Standard format or enhanced format

Standard format: results of computing monthly reports

Enhanced format: results of computing monthly reports plus results of computing daily reports*

The enhanced format applies to either daily reports or monthly reports only.

*: Either the average, instantaneous value or sum in each computing of a report.

Types of Computing for Reports

AVE: Average, maximum and minimum over a preset interval

INST: Instantaneous value at the time of report making

SUM: Sum and cumulative sum over a preset interval

Sum Cumulative Sum

Hourly report Hourly sum Sum over 24 hours (resets at the time to make up a daily report)

Daily report Daily sum Sum over a month (resets at the time to make up a monthly report)

Monthly report Monthly sum Not applicable

Unit Conversion (SUM only)

When inputs over a unit of time are integrated, the unit conversion compensates for any

discrepancy in the unit of value arising between computed values depending on the measurement

interval applied.

INTVL: no conversion; S (results of computing)

/sec: converted to the sum of input in seconds; Σ (results of computing) × measurement interval

/min: converted to the sum of input in minutes; Σ (results of computing) × measurement interval/60

/hour: converted to the sum of input in hours; Σ (results of computing) × measurement interval/3600

/day: converted to the sum of input in days; Σ (results of computing) × measurement interval/

86400

Time to Make Report

Reference dates: 1st to 28th days of a month

Reference times: 00:00 to 23:00

Output Ranges of the Results of Computing for Reports

AVE: -9999999 to 99999999 (with the position of the decimal point dependent on the

measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels)

INST: -9999999 to 99999999 (with the position of the decimal point dependent on the

measurement and computing channels assigned as report channels)

SUM: seven digits for the mantissa and two digits for the exponent

Processing of Faulty Data

AVE: Faulty data are excluded from computing. Data of positive and negative overflows,

however, are included in the computing of the maximum and minimum.

INST: Faulty data are included in computing.

SUM: Faulty data are excluded from computing.

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

14-7

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Information on and Process in Case of Power Failure

• The DR recorder adds ¥ to the time on a printout provided upon recovery from a power failure.

It does not print the character, however, if it has been more than 12 hours since the power

failure occurred.

• The DR recorder excludes data occurring during a power failure from its reports.

• If the DR recorder recovers from a power failure after the time to make a report, it makes a

report immediately after the recovery.

• In an application where the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to on for automatic printing, the

DR recorder prints a report only immediately after it recovers from a power failure if the power

failure time is less than 12 hours and the recorder has recovered after the preset time for report

printing.

• In an application where the REPORT PRINT menu item is set to on for automatic printing, the

DR recorder prints a report at the scheduled time for report printing if a power failure time is

less than 12 hours and the recorder has recovered before the preset time for report printing.

• If a power failure time is longer than 12 hours, the DR recorder stops report making even if the

power is restored.

The recorder prints a report (for data acquired up to the power failure), however, immediately

after it recovers from the power failure.

• If a power failure time is longer than 12 hours, the DR recorder does not print a report even if

the menu item for automatic printing is set to on. In that case, you can print a report from the

FUNC menu or send data to a communication output.

Time Intervals for Printing

Type of Report Printing Format Number of Columns Chart Length Printing Time

Hourly report Standard 77 20 cm approximately 4 minutes

Daily report Standard 77 20 cm approximately 4 minutes

Enhanced 437 114 cm approximately 22 minutes

Monthly report Standard 77 20 cm approximately 4 minutes

Enhanced 542 141 cm approximately 27 minutes

The printing time is maximum when you print an hourly report and a daily report each in the

standard format and a monthly report in the enhanced format, all at the same time.

Required printing time: 4 + 4 + 27 = 35 (minutes)

Format of Output via Communication

Binary

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

14-8 IM DR232-01E

Communication Function

Communication interface is possible by GP-IB, RS-232-C, RS422-A/RS-485, or ethernet.

Power Supply Rated supply voltage

AC power supply : 100 to 240 VAC (freely selected)

DC power supply : 12 to 28 VDC (only for the subunit (DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply

model)

Operating supply voltage

AC power supply : 90 to 250 VAC

DC power supply : 10 to 32 VDC (only for the subunit (DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply

model)

Rated supply frequency

50/60 Hz

Power consumption

Main unit: max. approx. 130 VA

Sub-unit DS400: max. approx. 55 VA (AC power supply), max. approx. 25 VA (DC power

supply)

Sub-unit DS600: max. approx. 70 VA (AC power supply), max. approx. 25 VA (DC power

supply)

Fuse Ratings

• Main unit

Maximum rated voltage/current: 250 V/2.5 A, Type: Time-lag, Standard: IEC/VDE

• Subunit (The fuse may not be replaced by the customer.)

AC power supply

Maximum rated voltage/current: 250 V/2 A, Type: Time-lag, Standard: IEC/VDE

DC power supply

Maximum rated voltage/current: 250 V/6.3 A, Type: Time-lag, Standard: UL/CSA

Normal Operating Conditions

Supply voltage

AC power supply : 90 to 250 VAC

DC power supply : 10 to 32 VDC (only for the subunit (DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply

model)

Supply frequency

50Hz ±2%, 60Hz ±2%

Ambient temperature

Main unit : 0 to 50°C

DS400/DS600 Subunit :

when floor-mounted : 0 to 50°C , when panel-mounted : –10 to 60°C

However, if the subunit DS400/DS600 is a DC power supply model, it can be used in the range

from 0°C to 50°C regardless of the mounting method.

Ambient humidity

20 to 80%RH for –10 to 40°C, 10 to 50%RH for 40 to 50°C, 5 to 30%RH for 50 to 60°C (no condensation)

Vibration

10 to 60 Hz, 0.2m/s2

Shock

Not allowed

Magnetic field

400 A/m max. (50/60Hz)

Position

Unit should be positioned left-right horizontally

Installation location

Room

Installation height

Altitude up to 2,000 m

Installation category based on IEC 1010-1

II*1

Pollution degree based on IEC 1010-1

2*2

Warm-up time

At least 30 minutes after power switch-on.

*1 Installation category is the specification of the inpuls withstanding voltage which is also called as

overvoltage category.

*2 Polution degree is the level of foreign body adhesion such as the solid, liquid, and gas which decrease

the wuthstanding voltage, 2 means general indoor atmosphere.

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

14-9

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Effect of Operating Conditions

Ambient temperature: Variation for a temperature change of 10°C: within ±(0.1% of rdg + 1

digit); ±(0.2% of span + 1 digit) for Cu10Ω

Voltage variation: within ±1 digit over the range of 90 to 132, or 180 to 250 VAC (for AC power

supply, frequency 50/60Hz)/10 to 32 VDC (for the subunit of a DC power supply model)

External magnetic field: variation with respect to AC (50/60Hz) and DC magnetic fields of 400

A/m: within ± (0.1% of rdg + 10 digits) Except for power monitor module: within ±15% of range

Signal source resistance: variation with respect to signal source resistance 1 kΩ change

(1) voltage

2 V range or below: within ±10µV

6 V range or above: within 0.1% of rdg

(2) thermocouple

within ±10µV; however it must be within 100µV when burnout is specified.

(3) RTD

Variation with respect to change of 10Ω per wire (when all wires have the same resistance

value)

Indication: within ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit)

Variation in indication with respect to a difference of 40mΩ in the resistance between

conductors (max. difference between 3 wires): approx. 0.1°C (in case of Pt100)

Mounting position

Variation when the unit is mounted horizontally on a panel: within ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit)

Vibration

Variation when sinusoidal vibration of acceleration 0.2m/s2 is applied for two hours in each of

the 3 axial directions over a frequency range of 10 to 60Hz: within ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit)

Transportation and Storage Conditions

These refer to the environmental conditions existing during transportation and storage from the

time of shipment from the factory until commencement of use, and also during transportation and

storage in the case of a temporary period of non-use.

If the environmental conditions are specified within the specified range, the unit will not incur

permanent damage, and can be returned to a normal working condition (although re-adjustment

may be required in some cases).

Ambient temperature

–25 to 60°C

Humidity

5 to 95% RH

Vibration

10 to 60Hz 4.9m/s2 max

Shock

392 m/s2 max (in packed condition)

General Specifications

EMC Conformity Standard

• Emission EN55011:Class A

• Immunity EN50082-2

IEC1000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Performance Criteria A*

8kV(Air), 4kV(Contact)

IEC1000-4-3 Radiated fields Performance Criteria A*

80~1000MHz, 10V/m

IEC1000-4-4 Fast Transients Performance Criteria B

Power line 2kV, The others 1kV

IEC1000-4-6 Conducted Disturbance Performance Criteria A*

0.15~80MHz, 10V

*Universal input module and DCV/TC/DI input module:

±10% of range (except for 50V range)

±20% of range (50V range)

When the extension module is used:

±20% of range (except for 50 V range)

±40% of range (50V range)

Strain input module (DU 500):

±10% of range (except for 2000µε range)

±50% of range (2000µε range)

Other input modules:

±10% of range

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

14-10 IM DR232-01E

Main Unit Installation

Desk-top type: DR232

Panel-mount type: DR242

Regardless of which installation method you use, be sure to install the units in an upright

position.

Sub-Unit Installation

Floor mounting :Use the feet at the bottom of each unit.

Direct panel mounting :Screw the unit directly to the panel at the specified points.

DIN rail mounting :Use the dedicated mounting brackets.

Rack mounting :Use the dedicated mounting brackets.

Regardless of which installation method you use, be sure to install the units in an upright

position.

Materials

Steel plate, aluminium plate, plastic moldings

Color

Main unit

Display: Slate Gray light (equivalent to Munsell 0.1 PB 4.6/0.2)

DR232 main unit: Ice White (equivalent to Munsell 6.6 Y 7.9/0.5)

DR242 main unit: Lamp Black (equivalent to Munsell 0.8 Y 2.5/0.4)

Subunit

Slate Gray light (equivalent to Munsell 0.1 PB 4.6/0.2)

Lamp Black (equivalent to Munsell 0.8 Y 2.5/0.4)

External dimensions

DR232: approx. 438 (W) × 291 (H) × 301 (D) mm

DR242: approx. 444 (W) × 288 (H) × 308 (D) mm

Sub-unit DS400: approx. 336 (W) × 165 (H) × 100 (D) mm

Sub-unit D‚00: approx. 422 (W) × 176(H) × 100 (D) mm

Weight

DR232: approx. 9kg*

DR242: approx. 12kg*

* with no modules installed

Sub-unit DS400: approx. 0.9kg* (with 4 input modules installed: approx. 2.5kg)

Sub-unit DS600: approx. 1.1kg* (with 6 input modules installed: approx. 3.5kg)

* with no modules installed

Clock

with calendar function

Clock accuracy

±100ppm. However, this does not include the delay (less than 1 second) caused when the power is

switched ON and OFF once.

Fail/Chart-end output

Contact output (at rear of main unit, one transfer contact)

Refer to 12.4 for functions/specifications.

Set value backup

Lithium battery backup (approx. 10 years, at ambient temperature of 23°C)

Insulation resistance

At least 20MΩ between the power supply and ground, between each terminal and ground, and

between each input terminal (measured with 500 VDC)

Dielectric strength

Between power supply terminal and ground of DR232/242 main unit: 1500 VAC (50/60Hz) for

one minute , Between input terminal and ground of DR232/242 main unit: 1500 VAC (50/60Hz)

for one minute , Between output terminal and ground of DR232/242 main unit: 2300 VAC (50/

60Hz) for one minute

14.1 Specifications of DR232/DR242 and DS400/DS600

14-11

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.2 Universal Input Module and DCV/TC/DI Input

Module

Style Number: S2

Type, Number of Channels, Terminal Type and Minimum Measurement Interval

0.5s

screw

clamp

screw

clamp

screw

clamp

screw

clamp

screw

clamp

screw

clamp

10ch

20ch

30ch

10ch

20ch

30ch

DU100-11

DU100-12

DU100-21

DU100-22

DU100-31

DU100-32

DU200-11

DU200-12

DU200-21

DU200-22

DU200-31

DU200-32

Kind

Universal

input

module

mV/TC

input

module

Type Number of

channels Terminal

type Minimum measurement

interval

Input method

floating unbalanced input, each channel mutually isolated (channel independent)

The RTD range (DU100 only) has a common potential (terminal b)

A/D resolution

±20000

A/D integration time

20ms (50Hz), 16.7ms (60Hz), 100ms (10Hz) or auto

(Except, auto switch does not function on the subunit (DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply

model. Selecting “AUTO” will set the A/D integration time to 20 ms (50 Hz).)

Minimum measurement interval

number

of channels 20ms/16.7ms

(50Hz/60Hz)

12s

15s

20s

Low-pass filter OFF Low-pass filter ON

Filter ON/OFF

A/D

integration

time

0.5s*

100ms

(10Hz) 20ms/16.7ms

(50Hz/60Hz) 100ms

(10Hz)

*2s if the power monitor module is installed.

Normal operating temperature/humidity

20 to 80%RH for –10 to 40°C, 10 to 50%RH for 40 to 50°C, 5 to 30%RH for 50 to 60°C (no condensation)

Compensation for the reference junction

Switchable internally or externally for each channel.

Compensation accuracy for the reference junction

(measured at 0°C, where the input terminals are balanced)

Type R, S, B, W : ±1°C

Type K, J, E, T, N, L, U : ±0.5°C

Maximum allowable input voltage

2V DC or lower range, TC, RTD, DI (CONT) : ±10V DC

6V DC or greater range, DI (LEVEL) : ±60V DC

Normal mode voltage

voltage, TC : 1.2 times the rated range or less (at peak value, including 50 or 60Hz signal

component)

RTD : 50 mV or lower (at peak value)

Normal mode rejection ratio

40dB or greater (50/60Hz ±0.1%)

Common mode noise voltage

250VAC rms (50/60Hz)

Common mode rejection ratio

120dB or greater (50/60Hz ±0.1%, 500Ω unbalanced, between the negative measurement terminal

and ground)

Maximum noise between channels

150VAC rms (50/60Hz)

14-12 IM DR232-01E

Measurement range, accuracy and resolution

As described below, under the following operating conditions:

Ambient temperature: 23 ±2°C; ambient humidity: 55 ±10% RH; power supply voltage: 90 to 250

VAC (AC power supply)/10 to 32 VDC (the subunit of a DC power supply model only); power

supply frequency: 50/60Hz within ±1% (AC power supply); warm-up time 30 minutes or more;

vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation. However, RTD input is not possible for

the DCV/TC/DI input module.

Input Measurement (digital display)

DC Voltage

(Note that Accuracy

of reference junction

compensation is not

considered).

RTD

High resolution RTD

Contact

20mV

60mV

200mV

20V

50V

KPvsAu7Fe

Pt100(1mA)

Pt100(2mA)

JPt100(1mA)

JPt100(2mA)

Pt50(2mA)

Ni100(1mA)

SAMA

Ni100(1mA)DIN

Ni120(1mA)

J263*B

Cu10 GE

Cu10 L&N

Cu10 WEED

Cu10 BAILEY

Pt100(1mA)

Pt100(2mA)

JPt100(1mA)

JPt100(2mA)

Voltage input

Contact input

–20.000 to 20.000mV

–60.00 to 60.00mV

–200.00 to 200.00mV

–2.0000 to 2.0000V

–6.000 to 6.000V

–20.000 to 20.000V

–50.00 to 50.00V

0.0 to 1760.0°C

0.0 to 1820.0°C

–200.0 to 1370.0°C

–200.0 to 800.0°C

–200.0 to 1100.0°C

–200.0 to 400.0°C

–200.0 to 900.0°C

–200.0 to 400.0°C

0.0 to 1300.0°C

0.0 to 2315.0°C

0.0 to 300.0K

–200.0 to 600.0°C

–200.0 to 250.0°C

–200.0 to 550.0°C

–200.0 to 250.0°C

–200.0 to 550.0°C

–200.0 to 250.0°C

–60.0 to 180.0°C

–70.0 to 200.0°C

0.0 to 300.0K

–200.0 to 300.0°C

–140.00 to 150.00°C

–70.00 to 70.00°C

–140.00 to 150.00°C

–70.00 to 70.00°C

Off for a voltage of less

than 2.4V.

On for a voltage of 2.4V

or more.(TTL)

On/Off of contact

Type Measurement accuracy Maximum

resolution

±(0.05% of rdg + 5digits)

±(0.05% of rdg + 2digits)

±(0.05% of rdg + 1°C)

However,R,S:0 to 100°C,±3.7°C

100 to 300°C,±1.5°C

B:400 to 600°C,±2°C accuracy

less than 400°C is not specified.

±(0.05% of rdg +0.7°C)

However,K attains an accuracy of

±(0.05% of rdg. +1°C) within the

range between –200 to –100°C.

±(0.05% of rdg +0.5°C)

However,J and L attain an accuracy of

±(0.05% of rdg. +0.7°C) within the

range between –200 to –100°C.

±(0.05% of rdg. +0.7°C)

±(0.05% of rdg. +1°C)

±(0.05% of rdg. +0.7K)

±(0.05% of rdg. +0.3°C)

±(0.05% of rdg. +0.3K)

±(0.2% of rdg. +0.7°C)

±(0.05% of rdg. +0.3°C)

Off for a voltage of less than 2.4V.

On for a voltage of 2.4V or more.

(TTL)

On/Off of contact

Measurement range

1µV

10µV

100µV

1mV

10mV

0.1°C

0.1K

0.1°C

0.1K

0.1°C

0.01°C

*1 : R,S,B,K,E,J,T:ANSI,IEC 584,DIN IEC 584,JIS C 1602-1981

*2 : L:Fe-CuNi,DIN43710,U:Cu-CuNi,DIN 43710

*3 : N:Nicrosil-Nisil,IEC 584,DIN IEC 584

*4 : W:W·5%RE-W·26%Re (Hoskins Mfg Co)

*5 : Pt50:JIS C 1604-1981,JIS C 1606-1986

Pt100:JIS C 1604-1989,JIS C 1606-1989,IEC 751,DIN IEC 751

JPt100:JIS C 1604-1981,JIS C 1606-1989

*6 : SAMA/DIN

*7 : McGRAW EDISON COMPANY

*8 : ranges to which accuracy applies:

Cu10 GE:–84.4 to 170.0°C,

Cu10 L&N:–75.0 to 150.0°C,

Cu10 WEED:–200.0 to 250.0°C,

Cu10 BAILEY:–200.0 to 250.0°C

Noise rejection

rejection by integration type A/D, lowpass filter, or moving averaging.

Input resistance

Min. 10MΩ at 2V DC or lower, thermocouple range

Approx. 1MΩ at 6V DC or higher.

Insulation resistance

Min. 20MΩ at 500V DC between the input terminal and ground.

14.2 Universal Input Module and DCV/TC/DI Input Module

14-13

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Input bias current

max. 10nA

Dielectric strength

Between input terminals : 1000V AC (50/60Hz) for one minute

Between an input terminal and ground : 1500V AC (50/60Hz) for one minute

Input source resistance

DCV, TC : 2kΩ or lower

RTD : 10Ω or lower per line (Pt100Ω)

5Ω or lower per line (Pt50Ω)

1Ω or lower per line (Cu10Ω)

Temperature coefficient

zero : 0.01% of range/°C

full span : 0.01% of range/°C (0.02% of span/°C for Cu10Ω)

Thermocouple burnout

Detected in a thermocouple range (On/Off) enabled, current of 4µA, detectable pulse width of

approx. 5ms

2 kΩ or lower is considered “normal”

100 kΩ or greater is considered “disconnected”

Detection interval for thermocouple burnout

2.5 sec. for a measurement period of 0.5 sec; in all other cases: each measurement interval

Detection timing for thermocouple burnout

The burnout condition is detected at each measurement interval. However, with a 10ch universal

input module connected and a measurement interval of 0.5sec, the minimum interval of the

burnout detection becomes 2.5 sec.

Power consumption

Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed.

External dimensions and weight

Weight (kg)

0.5

1.0

1.5

0.5

1.0

1.5

External dimensions(W)×(H)×(D)mm

apporox. 57×137×88

apporox. 114×137×88

apporox. 172×137×88

apporox. 57×137×88

apporox. 114×137×88

apporox. 172×137×88

Type

DU100-11

DU100-12

DU100-21

DU100-22

DU100-31

DU100-32

DU200-11

DU200-12

DU200-21

DU200-22

DU200-31

DU200-32

14.2 Universal Input Module and DCV/TC/DI Input Module

14-14 IM DR232-01E

14.3 Specifications of mA-input Module

Style Number: S5

Model Code, Number of Input Channels, Terminal Configuration and Shortest

Measurement Interval

Model Code Number of Channels Terminal Configuration Shortest Measurement Interval

DU300-11 10 Screw 0.5 s

DU300-12 10 Clamp 0.5 s

Method of Input

Non-balanced floating input with isolation between channels (separated channels)

Resolution of A/D Conversion

±20000

Integral Time of A/D Conversion

Manual or automatic selection between 20 ms (50 Hz), 16.7 ms (60 Hz) and 100 ms (10 Hz)

(Except, auto switch does not function on the subunit (DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply

model. Selecting "AUTO" will set the A/D integration time to 20 ms (50 Hz).)

Shortest Measurement Interval and Cutoff Frequency

When the lowpass filter is turned off:

Cutoff frequency: 50/60 Hz 10 Hz

Shortest measurement interval: 0.5 s 4 s

When the lowpass filter is turned on:

Cutoff frequency: 50/60 Hz 10 Hz

Shortest measurement interval: 3 s 12 s

Normal Operating Temperature/Humidity Range

-10˚ to 60˚C

20 to 80% RH for an ambient temperature range of -10˚ to 50˚C; 10 to 50% RH for 40˚ to 50˚C; 5

to 30% RH for 50˚ to 60˚C (non-condensing)

Maximum Input Voltage

5 V DC

Maximum Normal-mode Noise Current

24 mA (peak value, including 50- and 60-Hz signal components)

Equivalent voltage of 2.4 V

Normal Mode Rejection Ratio (Equivalent Voltage)

40 dB minimum (50/60 Hz ±0.1%)

Maximum Common Mode Noise Voltage

250 V ACrms (50/60 Hz)

Common Mode Rejection Ratio (Equivalent Voltage)

120 dB minimum (50/60 Hz ±0.1%)

Maximum Noise Across Channels

150 V ACrms (50/60 Hz)

Measuring Range/Accuracy

As described below, under the following operating conditions:

Ambient temperature: 23 ±2°C; ambient humidity: 55 ±10% RH; power supply voltage: 90 to 250

VAC (AC power supply)/10 to 32 VDC (the subunit of a DC power supply model only); power

supply frequency: 50/60Hz within ±1% (AC power supply); warm-up time 30 minutes or more;

vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation.

Measuring Range Measuring Accuracy Maximum Resolution

-20.000 to 20.000 mA ±(0.25% of rdg. + 5 digits) 1 µA

14-15

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Filter

Lowpass filter or use of moving average

Cutoff frequencies of lowpass filter: 50/60 Hz and 10 Hz and frequencies of their respective

integral multiples

Input Resistance

100 Ω

Insulation Resistance

Across channels: 50 V DC

Across input terminals and ground: 20 MΩ minimum (500 V DC)

Withstanding Voltage

Across channels: 1,000 V AC, 1 min (50/60 Hz)

Across input terminals and ground: 1,500 V AC, 1 min (50/60 Hz, excluding DU500-14)

Temperature Coefficient

Zero: 0.0125% of range/˚C

Span: 0.0125% of range/˚C

Power Consumption

Included in the value of a system's installed main unit or sub-unit

Dimensions

Approximately 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 88 (D) (mm)

Weight

Approximately 0.5 kg

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category)

CAT II (IEC1010)

14.3 Specifications of mA-input Module

14-16 IM DR232-01E

14.4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module

Model Code, Use (Input Channels), Terminal Configuration and Shortest

Measurement Interval

Model Code Use (Input Channels) Terminal Shortest

Configuration Measurement Interval

DU400-12 Single-phase Clamp* 2 s

(one channel each for voltage and current)

DU400-22 Three-phase Clamp*, ** 2 s

(three channels each for voltage and current)

*: Two-terminal pressure clamping

**: Not usable as an equivalent to three modules of single-phase use

Method of Input

Transformer-isolated input, with isolation between channels (separated channels)

Method of Measurement and Computing

Digital multiplication

Measuring Ranges

Voltage: 25 or 250 Vrms

Current: 0.5 or 5 A

In three-phase measurement or single-phase three-wire measurement, the current/voltage ranges

are identical between the respective phases or lines (the current/voltage ranges are set in common

between the respective channels).

Measured Frequency Range

45 to 65 Hz

Wiring Methods

DU400-12: Single-phase two-wire

DU400-22: Single-phase two-wire, single-phase three-wire, three-phase three-wire (dual-voltage,

dual-current), three-phase three-wire (triple-voltage, triple-current) and three-phase four-wire

Measured Data Items

For each module, a maximum of six data items can be selected from the effective voltage,

effective current, active power, apparent power, reactive power, frequency, power factor and

phase angle. The selected data items can then be assigned to channel numbers xx1 to xx6 to show

them on the display as well as record them. Restrictions apply to the combination of selectable

data items, however, depending on the method of input wiring.

Conditions of Measurement

• Measuring range for current and voltage inputs

10% of the measuring range < current and voltage inputs ≤ 100% of the measuring range

• V1 range is monitored in frequency measurement

• All measurements are done relative to the frequency on a channel for V1 and, therefore, the

results of measurements are not guaranteed if the V1 input is out of the range noted above.

• If the input apparent power falls below 10% of the span, the DR recorder cannot measure the

phase and power factor (negative overflow).

• A maximum of two scans' worth of data become invalid immediately after a change has been

made to the measuring range and/or wiring.

14-17

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Measuring Accuracy and Resolution

As described below, under the following operating conditions:

Ambient temperature: 23 ±2°C; ambient humidity: 55 ±10% RH; power supply voltage: 90 to 250

VAC (AC power supply)/10 to 32 VDC (the subunit of a DC power supply model only); power

supply frequency: 50/60Hz within ±1% (AC power supply); warm-up time 30 minutes or more;

vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation.

Measured Data Item Measuring Accuracy Resolution

Effective voltage ± (0.5% of SPAN) 0.01 Vrms (for 25-V range), 0.1 Vrms (for 250-V range)

Effective current ± (0.5% of SPAN) 0.0001 Arms (for 0.5-A range), 0.001 Arms (for 5-A range)

Active power ± (1% of SPAN) φ = 0 0.01 W (for 12.5-W, 25-W and 37.5-W spans)

± (2.5% of SPAN) 0 <| φ |≤ 30 0.1 W (for 125-W, 250-W and 375-W spans)

± (5% of SPAN) 30 <| φ |≤ 80 1 W (for 1,250-W, 2,500-W and 3,750-W spans)

Apparent power ± (1% of SPAN) 0 ≤| φ |≤ 80 0.01 VA (for 12.5-VA, 25-VA and 37.5-VA spans)

0.1 VA (for 125-VA, 250-VA and 375-VA spans)

1 VA (for 1,250-VA, 2,500-VA and 3,750-VA spans)

Reactive power ± (5% of SPAN) 0 ≤| φ |< 60 0.01 Var (for 12.5-Var, 25-Var and 37.5-Var spans)

± (2.5% of SPAN) 60 ≤| φ |≤ 80 0.1 Var (for 125-Var, 250-Var and 375-Var spans)

1 Var (for 1,250-Var, 2,500-Var and 3,750-Var spans)

Frequency ±0.1Hz 0.01Hz

Power factor ± (2% of SPAN) 0 ≤| φ |≤ 80 0.01

Phase angle ±5deg 0 ≤| φ |≤ 80 0.1deg

Measuring Ranges

Measured Data Item 25 V-0.5A 25 V-5 A 250 V-0.5 A 250 V-5 A

Effective voltage 0.00 to 25.00 V rms 0.00 to 25.00 V rms 0.0 to 250.0 V rms 0.0 to 250.0 V rms

Vi (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Effective current

0.0000 to 0.50000A rms

0.000 to 5.000 A rms

0.0000 to 0.5000 A rms

0.000 to 5.000 A rms

Ii (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Active power

–12.50 to 12.50 W –125.0 to 125.0 W –125.0 to 125.0 W –1250 to 1250 W

P1, P2, P3

Active power

–25.00 to 25.00 W –250.0 to 250.0 W –250.0 to 250.0 W –2500 to 2500 W

P13

Active power

–37.50 to 37.50 W –375.0 to 375.0 W –375.0 to 375.0 W –3750 to 3750 W

Apparent power 0.00 to 12.50 VA 0.0 to 125.0 VA 0.0 to 125.0 VA 0 to 1250 VA

VA1, VA2, VA3

Apparent power 0.00 to 25.00 VA 0.0 to 250.0 VA 0.0 to 250.0 VA 0 to 2500 VA

VA13

Apparent power 0.00 to 37.50 VA 0.0 to 375.0 VA 0.0 to 375.0 VA 0 to 3750 VA

VA0

Reactive power 0.00 to 12.50 Var 0.0 to 125.0 Var 0.0 to 125.0 Var 0 to 1250 Var

Var1, Var2, Var3

Reactive power 0.00 to 25.00 Var 0.0 to 250.0 Var 0.0 to 250.0 Var 0 to 2500 Var

Var13

Reactive power 0.00 to 37.50 Var 0.0 to 375.0 Var 0.0 to 375.0 Var 0 to 3750 Var

Var0

Power factor –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00

PFi (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Phase

–80.0 to 80.0 deg –80.0 to 80.0 deg –80.0 to 80.0 deg –80.0 to 80.0 deg

PHi (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Frequency

45.00 to 65.00 Hz 45.00 to 65.00 Hz 45.00 to 65.00 Hz 45.00 to 65.00 Hz

FREQ

14.4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module

14-18 IM DR232-01E

Ranges of Indication

Measured Data Item 25 V-0.5A 25 V-5 A 250 V-0.5 A 250 V-5 A

Effective voltage 0.00 to 26.25 V rms 0.00 to 26.25 V rms 0.0 to 262.5 V rms 0.0 to 262.5 V rms

Vi (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Effective current

0.0000 to 0.5250 V rms 0.000 to 5.250 V rms 0.0000 to 0.5250 V rms 0.000 to 5.250 V rms

Ii (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Active power

–13.75 to 13.75 W –137.5 to 137.5 W –137.5 to 137.5 W –1375 to 1375 W

P1, P2, P3

Active power

–27.50 to 27.50 W –275.0 to 275.0 W –275.0 to 275.0 W –2750 to 2750 W

P13

Active power

–41.25 to 41.25 W –412.5 to 412.5 W –412.5 to 412.5 W –4125 to 4125 W

Apparent power 0.00 to 13.75 VA 0.0 to 137.5 VA 0.0 to 137.5 VA 0 to 1375 VA

VA1, VA2, VA3

Apparent power 0.00 to 27.50 VA 0.0 to 275.0 VA 0.0 to 275.0 VA 0 to 2750 VA

VA13

Apparent power 0.00 to 41.25 VA 0.0 to 412.5 VA 0.0 to 412.5 VA 0 to 4125 VA

VA0

Reactive power 0.00 to 13.75 Var 0.0 to 137.5 Var 0.0 to 137.5 Var 0 to 1375 Var

Var1, Var2, Var3

Reactive power 0.00 to 27.50 Var 0.0 to 275.0 Var 0.0 to 275.0 Var 0 to 2750 Var

Var13

Reactive power 0.00 to 41.25 Var 0.0 to 412.5 Var 0.0 to 412.5 Var 0 to 4125 Var

Var0

Power factor –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00 –1.00 to 1.00

PFi (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Phase

–89.0 to 89.0 deg –89.0 to 89.0 deg –89.0 to 89.0 deg –89.0 to 89.0 deg

PHi (i = 1, 2, 3, 13, 0)

Frequency

41.00 to 69.00 Hz 41.00 to 69.00 Hz 41.00 to 69.00 Hz 41.00 to 69.00 Hz

FREQ

Output Data Items of Each Wiring Method

Output Data Item Single-phase Single-phase Three-phase Three-phase Three-phase

Two-wire Three-wire Three-wire Three-wire Four-wire

(Dual-voltage, (Triple-voltage,

Dual-current) Triple-current)

Effective voltage V V1 V1, V3 V1, V3 V1, V2, V3 V1, V2, V3

V13: (V1+V3)/2 V13: (V1+V3)/2 V13: (V1+V3)/2 V0: (V1+V2+V3)/3

V0: (V1+V2+V3)/3

Effective current I I1 I1, I3 I1, I3 I1, I2, I3 I1, I2, I3

I13: (I1+I3)/2 I13: (I1+I3)/2 I13: (I1+I3)/2 I0: (I1+I2+I3)/3

I0: (I1+I2+I3)/3

Active power W P1 P1, P3 P1, P3 P1, P2, P3 P1, P2, P3

P13: P1+P3 P13: P1+P3 P13: P1+P3 P0: P1+I2+P3

Apparent power VA VA1 VA1, VA3 VA1, VA3 VA1, VA2, VA3 VA1, VA2, VA3

VA13: VA1+VA3 VA13: VA1+VA3 VA13: VA1+VA3 VA0: VA1+VA2+VA3

Reactive power Var Var1 Var1, Var3 Var1, Var3 Var1, Var2, Var3 Var1, Var2, Var3

Var13: Var1+Var3 Var13: Var1+Var3 Var13: Var1+VA3 Var0: Var1+Var2+Var3

Frequency FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ FREQ

Power factor PF PF1 PF1, PF3 PF1, PF3 PF1, PF2, PF3 PF1, PF2, PF3

PF13 PF13 PF13 PF0

Phase angle PH PH1 PH1, PH3 PH1, PH3 PH1, PH2, PH3 PH1, PH2, PH3

PH13 PH13 PH13 PH0

14.4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module

14-19

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Continuously Applicable Maximum Voltage and Current

Voltage: 250 Vrms

Current: 5 Arms

Crest Factor

3 maximum (600 Vpeak)

Maximum Common Mode Voltage

250 Vrms

Common Mode Voltage Rejection Ratio (Voltage and Current Ranges)

0.02% of span (when 250 V, 45 to 65 Hz is imposed)

Input Resistance

Voltage input: 300 kΩ minimum for AC voltages

Current input: 1 Ω maximum for AC currents

Filter

Moving average

Wattage Calculation

Use of /M1 computing function

Insulation Resistance

Across output terminals and ground: 20 MΩ minimum

Withstanding Voltage

Across output terminals and ground: 2,300 V AC (50/60 Hz), 1 min

Normal Operating Temperature/Humidity Ranges

0˚ to 50˚C

20 to 80% RH for an ambient temperature range of 0˚ to 40˚C; 10 to 50% RH for 40˚ to 50˚C

(non-condensing)

Power Consumption

Included in the value of a system's installed main unit or sub-unit

Dimensions

Approximately 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 99 (D) (mm)

Weight

Approximately 0.5 kg

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category)

CAT II (IEC1010)

14.4 Specifications of Power Monitor Module

14-20 IM DR232-01E

14.5 Specifications of Strain Input Module

Model Code, Number of Input Channels, Terminal Configuration, Shortest

Measurement Interval and Values of Built-in Resistors

Model Code Number of Input Terminal Shortest Measurement Built-in

Channels Configuration Interval Resistor

DU500-12 10* Clamp 0.5 s 120 Ω

DU500-13 10* Clamp 0.5 s 350 Ω

DU500-14 10* NDI** 0.5 s External

*: Requires the space of two slots.

**: Recommended by the Japanese Nondestructive Inspection Association

Method of Input

Non-balanced floating input, with isolation between channels (separated channels)

Resolution of A/D Conversion

Equivalent to reading on 20000 full scale

Integral Time of A/D Conversion

Manual or automatic selection between 20 ms (50 Hz), 16.7 ms (60 Hz) and 100 ms (10 Hz)

(Except, auto switch does not function on the subunit (DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply

model. Selecting "AUTO" will set the A/D integration time to 20 ms (50 Hz).)

Types of Input

Signals from strain gauge or strain-gauge sensor

Connection Methods

Single-gauge, opposed-side two-gauge, adjacent-side two-gauge or four-gauge configuration

(Configured with built-in DIP switches for DU500-12 and DU500-13)

Applicable Gauge Resistance

100 to 1,000 Ω

The DU500-12 and DU500-13 modules contain 120-Ω and 350-Ω resistors, respectively.

Bridge Voltage

Fixed to 2 V DC (±5% accuracy with a correction function)

Gauges

2.00 (with scaling capability)

Balancing

Automatic

Range of Balancing

Equivalent to ±10,000 µe (for single-gauge method)

Measuring Ranges and Accuracies

As described below, under the following operating conditions:

Ambient temperature: 23 ±2°C; ambient humidity: 55 ±10% RH; power supply voltage: 90 to 250

VAC (AC power supply)/10 to 32 VDC (the subunit of a DC power supply model only); power

supply frequency: 50/60Hz within ±1% (AC power supply); warm-up time 30 minutes or more;

vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation.

Gauge Method Measuring Range Accuracy Resolution

Single-gauge –2000 to 2000 µε 0.5% of Range 0.1 µε

–20000 to 20000 µε 0.3% of Range µε

–200000 to 200000 µε 0.3% of Range 10 µε

Two-gauge –1000 to 1000 µε 0.5% of Range 0.1 µε

10000 to 10000 µε 0.3% of Range 1 µε

–100000 to 100000 µε 0.3% of Range 10 µε

Four-gauge –500 to 500 µε 0.5% of Range 0.1 µε

–5000 to 5000 µε 0.3% of Range 1 µε

–50000 to 50000 µε 0.3% of Range 10 µε

The Accuracies and Resolutions of the DU500-12 and DU500-13 models, do not include the influence of

the internal- and contact-resistance of the jumper setup switch.

14-21

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Accuracy of Bridge Resistors

±0.01%, ±5 ppm/˚C (excludes contact resistance of the jumper setup switch)

Contact Resistance of the Jumper Setup Switch

100 mΩ maximum

Input Resistance

10 MΩ minimum

Filter

Third-order sinc filter, moving-average

Withstanding Voltage

Across channels: 50 V DC (except for DU500-14)

Across output terminals and ground: 1,500 V AC, 1 min (excluding DU500-14)

Normal Operating Temperature/Humidity Range

0˚ to 50˚C

20 to 80% RH for an ambient temperature range of 0˚ to 40˚C; 10 to 50% RH for 40˚ to 50˚C

(non-condensing)

Power Consumption

Included in the value of a system's installed main unit or sub-unit

Dimensions

DU500-12/DU500-13: Approximately 114.3 (W) × 137 (H) × 88 (D) (mm)

DU500-14: Approximately 114.3 (W) × 137 (H) × 77 (D) (mm)

Weight

DV 500 -12, -13 0.6kg

DV 500 -14 0.8kg

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category)

CAT II (IEC1010)

Accessory

Bridge box: 319300 (120 Ω)

14.5 Specifications of Strain Input Module

14-22 IM DR232-01E

14.6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module

Model Code, Number of Input Channels, Terminal Configuration and Shortest

Measurement Interval

Model Code Number of Channels Terminal Configuration Shortest Measurement

Interval

DU600-11 10 Screw 0.5 s*

*: The interval between data updates is fixed to one second.

Method of Input

Potential with reference to the shared voltage of the COMMON line within the same module

Types of Input

Voltage-free contact or open collector (TTL or transistor)

Measurement Modes

RATE (instantaneous count mode): Outputs the prescaled value of the count of pulses imposed

over the last one-second interval of measurement.

GATE (instantaneous turn-on time mode): Outputs the prescaled values of the contact's turn-on

(make) and turn-off (break) times (on = 1; off = 0) over the last one-second interval of

measurement.

Note

The computing function (computational expression: TLOG.PSUM (XXX)) should be used when

integrating an every-second count or turn-on time (maximum count/turn-on time: 99999999).

Input Range

0 to 6,000 pulses, or 0 to 10 pulses (if the filter is on) for voltage-free input.

Ratio of make at input: 35 to 65% at the maximum frequency (ratio of make = closed-contact

time/(closed-contact time + open-contact time) × 100)

Minimum input pulse width: 60 µs (whether the contact is closed or open)

Measuring Accuracies

As described below, under the following operating conditions:

Ambient temperature: 23 ±2°C; ambient humidity: 55 ±10% RH; power supply voltage: 90 to 250

VAC (AC power supply)/10 to 32 VDC (the subunit of a DC power supply model only); power

supply frequency: 50/60Hz within ±1% (AC power supply); warm-up time 30 minutes or more;

vibrations and others not affecting instrument operation.

Count: ±1 pulse (for integration, ±(1 scan + 1 second) at the start of measurement and ±(1 scan +

1.5 seconds) at the end of measurement)

Turn-on time: ±100-ppm accuracy for judgment of one-second-interval sampling; for integration,

±(1 second + 1 scan) at the start of measurement and ±(100 ppm of rdg. + 1.5 seconds + 1 scan) at

the end of measurement

Module-to-module error: ±(3 seconds + 1 pulse) for count and ±(200 ppm + 3 seconds) for turn-

on time

Note

It takes a maximum of 2 seconds for normal measured values to be output when the power is turned on,

when the measurement mode is changed or when the setting for turning on/off the filter is changed. The

DR recorder indicates a value representative of “no data” ( on the display, or 8005H for the

binary format or a faulty data value for the ASCII format in the case of output to the communication line)

until the normal measured values are output.

Filter

Removes chatter of up to 5 ms (can be turned on or off on a channel basis).

Input Signal Levels

Open contact: 200 Ω maximum

Closed contact: 100 kΩ minimum

Normal Operating Temperature/Humidity Range

0˚ to 50˚C

20 to 80% RH for an ambient temperature range of 0˚ to 40˚C or 10 to 50% RH for 40˚ to 50˚C

(non-condensing)

Normal Operating Magnetic-field Strength

400 A/m maximum

14-23

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Maximum Input Voltage

5 V DC

Signal Source Ratings

15 V DC, 30 mA minimum

Insulation Resistance

Across input terminals and ground: 20 MΩ minimum (500 V DC)

Withstanding Voltage

Across output terminals and ground: 500 V DC, 1 min (no channel-to-channel isolation)

Power Consumption

Included in the value of a system's installed main unit or sub-unit

Dimensions

Approximately 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 68 (D) (mm)

Weight

Approximately 0.3 kg

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category)

CAT II (IEC1010)

14.6 Specifications of Pulse Input Module

14-24 IM DR232-01E

14.7 Specifications of Digital Input Module

Style Number: S8

Model, Number of Channels, Terminal Type and Minimum Measurement Interval

Model Number of Channels Terminal Type Minimum Measurement Interval

DU700-11 10 Screw 0.5s

Input method

Floating unbalanced input, each channel mutually isolated (channel independent)

A/D resolution

±20000

A/D integration time

20 ms (50 Hz), 16.7 ms (60 Hz), 100 ms (10 Hz) or auto

(Except, auto switch does not function on the stand-alone DC power supply model or the subunit

(DS400/DS600) of a DC power supply model.)

Minimum measurement interval

Low-pass filter OFF

Cut-off frequency 50/60Hz 10Hz

Minimum measurement interval 0.5 s 4 s

Low-pass filter ON

Cut-off frequency 50/60Hz 10Hz

Minimum measurement interval 3 s 12 s

Normal operating temperature/humidity

20 to 80% RH for –10 to 40°C, 10 to 50% RH for 40 to 50°C, 5 to 30% RH for 50 to 60°C (no

condensation)

Magnetic field

400A/m max (50/60Hz)

Maximum allowable input voltage

CONT (Contact input) : ±10 V DC

LEVEL (Voltage input) : ±60 V DC

Common mode noise voltage

250 V AC rms (50/60 Hz)

Maximum noise between channels

150 V AC rms (50/60 Hz)

Action

At normal operating temperature/humidity

Voltage input (LEVEL) : Off for a voltage of less than 24V.

ON for a voltage 2.4 V or more.

Contact input (CONT) : On/Off of contact.*

*: Contact resistance ON ; 2 kΩ or less, OFF ; 100 kΩ or more

Noise rejection

Rejection by integration type A/D, lowpass filter

Cut-off frequency

50/60/10Hz

Input resistance

CONT : Min. 10 MΩ

LEVEL : Approx. 1 MΩ

Insulation resistance

Min. 20 MΩ at 500 V DC between the input terminal and ground.

Dielectric strength

Between input terminals : 1000 V AC (50/60 Hz) for one minute

Between an input terminal and ground : 1500 V AC (50/60 Hz) for one minute

Input source resistance

LEVEL : 2 kΩ or lower

Power consumption

Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed.

14-25

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Dimensions

Approximately 57(W) × 137(H) × 68(D) (mm)

Weight

0.5 kg

Installation Category (Overvoltage Category)

CAT II (IEC 1010)

14.7 Specifications of Digital Input Module

14-26 IM DR232-01E

14.8 Alarm Module

Style Number: S2

Type, Number of outputs, Contact mode, Terminal type

Contact mode

Transfer contact (NO-C-NC)

Make contact(NO-C)

Terminal type

screw

Number of

output

Type

DT200-11

DT200-21

Normal operating temperature/humidity

20 to 80%RH for 0 to 40°C, 10 to 50%RH for 40 to 50°C (no condensation)

Output updating rate

every measurement interval

Contact mode

Make contact : normal open/common contact type

Transfer contact: normal open/common/normal close type

Energize/de-energize

switchable

Hold/non-hold

switchable

Reflash alarm

up to 6 contacts can be specified.

Contact capacity

250V DC/0.1A (with a resistor load)

250V AC/2A (with a resistor load)

30V DC/2A (with a resistor load)

Dielectric strength

Between the output terminal and ground: 2300V AC (50/60Hz) for one minute.

Power consumption

Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed.

External dimensions and weight

Weight (kg)

0.3

0.4

External dimensions(W)×(H)×(D)mm

apporox. 57×137×68

Type

DT200-11

DT200-21

14-27

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.9 DI/DO Module

Style Number: S2

General Specifications

Terminal type

screw

Normal operating temperature/humidity

20 to 80%RH for 0 to 40°C, 10 to 50%RH for 40 to 50°C (no condensation)

Power consumption

Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed.

Dielectric strength

Between input terminal and ground: 1500V AC (50/60Hz) for one minute.

Between output terminal and ground: 2300V AC (50/60Hz) for one minute.

External dimensions

Approx. 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 68 (D) mm

Weight

0.35kg

DO: Alarm output

Output update rate

every measurement interval

Contact mode

Transfer contact (NO-C-NC)

Energize/de-energize

switchable

hold/non-hold

switchable

Reflash alarm

can be set

Contact rating

250V DC/0.1A (resistive load)

250V AC/2A (resistive load)

30V DC/2A (resistive load)

DO: Failure output

Function

The output relay for a failure becomes de-energized when an error is detected in the system of the

DA100 main unit or the DA/DR subunit which is connected to the module.

Contact mode

Transfer contact (NO-C-NC)

Energize/de-energize

not switchable

Contact rating

250V DC/0.1A (resistive load)

250V AC/2A (resistive load)

30V DC/2A (resistive load)

DO: Chart-end Output

Function

The output relay for chart-end becomes energized when the recorder runs out of chart paper.

Contact mode

Transfer contact: normal open/common/normal close type

Energize/de-energize

not switchable

Contact rating

250V DC/0.1A (resistive load)

250V AC/2A (resistive load)

30V DC/2A (resistive load)

14-28 IM DR232-01E

DI: Remote control of recorder functions

Function

The following functions can be controlled by contact input:

- alarm acknowledge;

- alarm reset;

- timer reset;

- starting/stopping recording;

- manual printout;

- digital printout;

- message printout;

- message display;

- changing chart speed/recording interval;

- group trend recording;

- Starting/stopping/clearing/resetting computation;

- Saving/reading measured/computed data, reading set-up data.

Input signal

No voltage contact, open-collector driven by a TTL or transistor

Rated voltage:0 to 5 V DC (input impedance:4.7kΩ, 5 V DC pull up)

Maximum input voltage (allowable range)

–2 to 7 V DC

Input conditions

• ON voltage:0.5V max. (30mA DC)

• Leakage current at OFF state:0.25mA max.

Duration of input signal

one second or longer (input signal detection internal:approx. 0.5 seconds)

14.9 DI/DO Module

14-29

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.10 Communication Interface Module

Type

Description

GP-IB

RS-232-C

RS-422-A/RS-485

Ethernet

Type

DT300-11

DT300-21

DT300-31

DT300-41

General Specifications

Power consumption

Included in the main unit or the subunit to which the module is to be installed.

Normal operating temperature/humidity

20 to 80%RH for 0 to 40°C, 10 to 50%RH for 40 to 50°C(no condensation)

GP-IB Module Style Number: S4

Electrical and mechanical specifications

conform to IEEE Standard 488-1978

Code

ISO (ASCII) code

Address

0 to 15

Functions

· Talker functions

Output of measurement values (ASCII, binary); output of setting parameters (ASCII)

· Listener functions

Setting of measurement conditions, control sof starting and stopping measurement, specifying

causes of interrupts (excluding setting and control of power ON/OFF)

Causes of interrupts

Syntax error, chart-end, completion of A/D conversion, operations of internal timer, end of data

saving/reading, incomplete measurement during computation

External dimensions

Approx. 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 54 (D) mm

Weight

0.3kg

RS-232-C Module Style Number: S8

Electrical and mechanical specifications

conform to standard EIA RS-232-C

Connection method

point-to-point

Communication method

half-duplex

Synchronization mode

Start-stop synchronization (synchronized by a start and a stop bit)

Baud rate

150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 bps

Start bit

Fixed at 1 bit

Data length

7 or 8 bits, selectable

Parity

Selectable from even, odd, or none

Stop bit

1 or 2, selectable

Transmission distance

max. 15 m

Connector

D-sub 25pin

14-30 IM DR232-01E

Handshaking

hardware: transmission and reception control by ‘DTR’ ‘RTS’, ‘CTS’ signal enabled.

Software : transmission control by ‘XON’ and ‘XOFF’ enabled.

Capacity of receiving buffer

200 bytes

Escape sequence

for reception only

Functions

• Talker functions

Output of measurement data (ASCII, binary) and setting parameters (ASCII)

• Listener functions

Setting of measurement conditions, control of measurement start and stop (excluding the setting

and control of power on/off), specifying causes of ‘ESC S’ (output of a status byte)

Contents of ‘status’

Syntax error, chart-end, completion of A/D conversion, operations of internal timer, end of data

saving/reading, incomplete measurement during computation

External dimensions

Approx. 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 54 (D) mm

Weight

0.3kg

RS-422-A/RS-485 Style Number: S8

Electrical & mechanical specs

Conform to the EIA RS-422-A and EIA RS-485 Standard

Connection format

Multi-drop 1:n (n=16 for RS-422-A, n=31 for RS-485)

Communication format

Half duplex

Synchronizing format

Start-stop asynchronous transmission (synchronized by start/stop bit)

Baud rate (bps)

150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600 or 19200 (selectable)

START bit

1 bit (fixed)

Data length

Either 7 or 8 bits (selectable)

Parity

Even, Odd, or None (selectable)

STOP bit

Either 1 or 2 bits (selectable)

Connector

6 point screw type terminal (uses M4 screws)

Minimum response time

0, 10, 20, 50 or 100 ms (selectable)

Reception buffer length

250 bytes

Escape sequence

Trigger, Status call, Open and Close

Electrical characteristics

SDA, SDB, RDA, RDB, SG. Between the signal terminal and the main internal circuit is

insulated functionally.

Communication distance

1.2 km maximum

Terminator

Internal resistor (120 ohm, 1W) switch with the slide switch

14.10 Communication Interface Module

14-31

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Ethernet Style number: S8

Electrical and Mechanical specifications

Conforms to IEEE802.3 (Frames are not supported.)

Communication method

Ethernet

Transmission specifications

10BASE-T (CSMA/CD, 10Mbps, Baseband)

Transmission speed

10 Mbps

Protocols

TCP, IP, UDP, ARP, ICMP

Maximum number of connections

Input data

ASCII

Supporting RS-232-C commands

Output data

ASCII, Binary

External dimensions

Approx 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 57 (D)

Weight

0.3 kg

14.10 Communication Interface Module

14-32 IM DR232-01E

14.11 Specifications of Extension Module and

Extension Base

Model Codes

Extension module: DV100-011

Extension base: DV100-012

Units to Which Extension Modules Are Connected

DS400/DS600

Input Modules Connectable to an Extension Base

Universal input modules: DU100-11 or DU100-12, 10 channels

DCV/TC/DI input modules: DU200-11 or DU200-12, 10 channels

Maximum Mountable Number of Extension Modules

One each on a sub-unit

Maximum Connectable Number of Extension Bases

Up to three to each extension module. It is not possible, however, to wire extension bases in such

a manner that the total number of modules already mounted on the sub-unit and the extension

bases being wired exceeds the maximum number of modules allowed for mounting on the sub-

unit.

Overall Length of Wiring

30 m maximum

(The maximum overall length of cable measured from the extension module to the farthest

extension base)

Normal Operating Temperature/Humidity Range

-10˚ to 60˚C

20 to 80% RH for an ambient temperature range of -10˚ to 40˚C; 10 to 50% RH for 40˚ to 50˚C; 5

to 30% RH for 50˚ to 60˚C (non-condensing)

Insulation Resistance

Depends on the input module installed.

Withstanding Voltage

Depends on the input module installed.

Power Consumption

Included in the value of a system's installed main unit or sub-unit

Dimensions

Extension module: Approximately 57 (W) × 137 (H) × 49.5 (D) (mm) (The dimensions do not

include the support feet.)

Extension base: Approximately 114.8 (W) × 152.7 (H) × 43.7 (D) mm (The dimensions do not

include the support feet.)

Approximately 114.8 (W) × 171.5 (H) × 143.3 (D) mm (The dimensions include

the support feet.)

Weight

Extension module: Approximately 176 kg

Extension base: Approximately 345 kg

14-33

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

DR232 Main Unit

438 30 207 63.6

26625

424

Rear Panel

unit : mm

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is ±0.3mm.

14-34 IM DR232-01E

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

DR242 Main Unit

444

288

424

40 203 64.8

280

Rear Panel

unit : mm

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is ±0.3mm.

14-35

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

Sub-unit DS600

156

168

100

422

145

16255

176

115

369

unit : mm

Sub-unit DS400

165

100

336

145

320

50 50

115

290

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is

±0.3mm.

14-36 IM DR232-01E

10ch universal input module/10chDCV/TC/DI input module

unit : mm

137

20ch universal input module/20chDCV/TC/DI input module

114.3

137

30ch universal input module/30chDCV/TC/DI input module

171.6

137

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is

±0.3mm.

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

14-37

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

mA-input Module

unit : mm

137

Power Monitor Module

137

Unless otherwise specified, the dimensional tolerance is ±3% (though ±0.3% for fractions smaller

than 10 mm).

Strain Input Module (with built-in bridge resistors)

114.3 68

137

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

14-38 IM DR232-01E

Strain Input Module (with NDI terminals)

unit : mm

114.3 57

137

Pulse Input Module

137

Unless otherwise specified, the dimensional tolerance is ±3% (though ±0.3% for fractions smaller

than 10 mm).

Digital Input Module

137

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

14-39

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

DI/DO module/Alarm module

unit : mm

137

GP-IB module

137

RS-232-C module

137

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is

±0.3mm.

14-40 IM DR232-01E

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

RS-422-A/RS-485 module

unit : mm

137

Ethernet module

137.4

14-41

IM DR232-01E

Specifications

Extension module

unit : mm

57 49.5

28.5

137

EXTENDER I/F

I/F

Extension Base

89.812.5

114.8

84 43.7

4833.4 φ5-4

φ5-4

15.4

171.58.1

10.7 152.7

113.3

143.3

If not specified, the tolerance is ±3%. However, in cases of less than 10mm, the tolerance is

±0.3mm.

14.12 Dimensional Drawings

Index-1

IM DR232-01E

Index

Main Menu

Pressing the relevant key, a menu (the main menu) appears in the main display. With the

instrument equipped with a floppy disk drive, pressing the relevant key will cause a menu (the

main menu) to appear in the main display.

When the alarm output and communications modules are installed and system-recognized, the

main menu, indicating that alarm display hold and the relay hold functions are turned on, is

displayed.

SET=

CHART2→

ZONE→

PARTIAL→

TAG→

DIGITAL PR→

MANUAL PR→

ALARM PR→

SCALE PR→

LIST PR→

LIST FMT→

MESSAGE→

HEADER→

TITLE→

MATCH TIME→

MOVE AVE→

INTERPOL→

GROUP→

SET3 menu

001-01:VOLT/2V→

RANGE menu

SET=

CHART→

CLOCK→

Setting the chart speed (page 6-4)

Setting the date and time (page 3-32)

CHART menu

MAN PR START→

LIST START→

HEADER START→

Starting manual printing (page 7-2)

Printing list (page 7-2)

Printing header (page 7-2)

PRINT menu

001-01:1/OFF→

ALARM menu

SET=

SYSTEM→

UNIT→

TREND→

TIMER→

MATH→

CONST→

MEMORY→

FCOPY→

LOGIC→

COPY→

Setting the recording mode (page 6-1)

Setting the engineering unit (page 6-1)

Setting the recording channel (page 6-1)

Setting the recording interval (timer) (page 6-1)

Setting computation (chapter 12)

Setting constant (page 12-7)

Saving/reading data (chapter 11)

Saving/reading set-up data (chapter 11)

Setting event/action functions (page 9-1)

Copying (page 9-11)

SET menu

Selecting the type of input/setting

the recording span/setting linear

scaling (pages 5-1 and 5-4)

Setting alarms and relays (including

internal switches) (page 8-1)

Setting the chart speed (page 6-4)

Setting recording zones (page 6-6)

Setting partially expanded recording (page 6-6)

Setting tags (page 6-8)

Setting digital printout (page 6-8)

Setting manual printout (page 6-8)

Setting alarm printout (page 6-10)

Setting scale printout (page 6-12)

Setting list printout (page 6-12)

Setting list format (page 6-12)

Entering messages (page 6-14)

Entering headers (page 6-14)

Entering title (page 6-14)

Setting match time (page 6-16)

Setting moving average (page 6-16)

Setting interpolation (page 6-16)

Setting groups (page 6-16)

IM DR232-01E

Index-2

FUNC menu

FUNC3 menu

SET UP menu

Alarm acknowledgment (page 9-14)

Alarm reset (page 9-14)

Executing initial balancing (page5-10)

Timer reset (page 9-14)

Starting computation (page 12-8)

Re-starting computation after

clearing computed data (page

12-8)

Stopping computation (page 12-8)

Clearing incomplete measurement status

indication (page 12-8)

Starting report making (page 10-32)

Stopping report making (page 10-32)

Starting report printing

(page 10-31)

Stopping report printing (page 10-

31)

Keylock (page 9-14)

Starting message printing (page 7-3)

Printing set-up lists (page 7-4)

Clearing alarm buffer

(page 9-16)

Clearing message buffer (page 9-

16)

Displaying module information (page 9-

16)

Displaying communications information

(page 9-16)

Structuring system modules

(page 9-16)

Initializing RAM (page 9-16)

Selecting adjustment of dot-printing (page 10-1)

Selecting scan interval (page 10-1)

Setting recording format (page 10-3)

Setting action to be carried out in case of computation

error and setting the units for TLOG.SUM (page 12-12)

Saving/reading set-up data (chapter 11)

Setting report format (page 10-27)

Selecting alarm interval/hysteresis/hold (page 10-7)

Selecting A/D converter integration time

(page 10-7)

Selecting filter (page 10-7)

Setting operation mode of relay/internal switch

(page 10-9)

Setting burn-out (page 10-12)

Setting reference junction compensation (page 10-12)

Setting recording colors (page 10-14)

Setting keylock (page 10-15)

Setting FUNC/FUNC3 menu (page 10-17)

Setting SET/SET3 menu (page 10-20)

Selecting display update interval (page 10-24)

Registering details set/selected with set up menu, and

terminating set up menu (page 10-24)

SET UP=

PRN ADJ→

SCAN INTVL→

RECORD→

MATH→

FLOPPY→

REPORT→

ALARM→

A/D INTG→

FILTER→

RELAY→

BURN OUT→

RJC→

COLOR→

LOCK→

FUNC PARM→

SET PARM→

DISPLAY→

END→

ALARM ACK→

ALARM RST→

INIT BRANCE→

TIMER RESET→

MATH START→

MATH CLR START→

MATH STOP→

MATH ACK→

REPORT START→

REPORT STOP→

REP RECALL START→

REP PRINT STOP→

KEY LOCK ON→

MSG PRINT→

S/U LIST START→

ALM BUF CLEAR→

MSG BUF CLEAR→

MODULE INF→

COMM INF→

RE SYSTEM→

RAM INIT→

Main Menu

Index-3

IM DR232-01E

Index

INDEX

[A]

ABSOLUTE, Absolute time....................................................2-8, 6-3

AC adapter ................................................................................ 6, 3-32

Accessories .................................................................................... 5, 6

AC input module ........................................................... 1-2, 3-22, 5-6

Action ........................................................................................... 2-17

edge ........................................................................................ 9-9

level ........................................................................................ 9-9

setting, selection............................................................9-9, 9-10

Additional printouts ...................................................................... 2-12

A/D (converter) integration time ........................................... 2-4, 10-8

Alarm

acknowledgment of .....................................................2-15, 9-15

Search Display ........................................................ 2-1, 4-7, 4-8

Status Display ............................................................... 2-1, 4-10

copy ........................................................ See also Copying, 9-13

clearing buffer ...................................................................... 9-17

Difference high/low limit..............................................2-13, 8-2

high limit, upper-limit ...................................................2-13, 8-2

low limit, lower-limit ....................................................2-13, 8-2

occurrence of, occurrence mark ..................................................

. See also Trend ecording upon occurrence, 2-6, 2-13 to 2-15

output, output relays....................................................................

See also Alarm module, 2-13 to 2-15, 2-18, 3-26, 4-11, 4-12, 8-

3, 9-9, 10-9 to 10-11

printing, recording......................................................... 2-6, 2-15

rate-of-change, high/low limit of .................................. 2-13, 8-2

REFLASH, Reflashing ............................................. 2-14, 10-10

release ..................................................................... 2-13 to 2-15

reset ..................................................................... 2-15, 8-4, 9-15

setting ............................................................................6-11, 8-4

trend recording upon occurrence .................................. 2-9, 10-4

type ................................................................................2-13, 8-2

upper-limit, high limit ...................................................2-13, 8-2

ALARM key ................................................................................... 8-1

Alarm module ......................................................................................

................... See also Alarm output, 2, 3, 1-5, 3-26, 4-12, 8-3, 9-17

ALL SKIP................................................................................ 4-2, 4-3

Ambient temperature and humidity ................................................ 3-2

for specifications, effect of .................................................. 14-8

for reference conditions ....................................................... 14-2

Analog Trend Mode ........................................2-5, 2-7, 2-15, 6-2, 6-3

AND/OR ............................................................................2-14, 10-10

ASCII conversion ........................................................ 11-17 to 11-19

Asterisk, for the meaning of excess of alarm or message records ......

........................................................................................... 6-11, 7-3

Attenuation ..................................................................................... 2-4

AUTO, for recording interval ..................... See also Display, 2-8, 6-2

Averaging ............................................................See Moving average

[B]

Backup, of set values ........................................................ 3-34, 14-10

Bargraph Display .....................................................................2-1, 4-9

Basic Setting (SET-UP)......................................................Chapter 10

Baud rate......................................................... 3-11, 3-15, 3-17, 14-10

Boundary value, for partial expanded recording ................... 2-10, 6-7

Buffer

Alarm .......................................................................... 6-11, 9-17

Message ................................................................ 7-3, 9-17

Alarm printout...................................................................... 6-11

clearing ........................................................................ 9-17

Digital ........................................ 2-5 to 2-7, 6-9, 7-1, 10-5, 10-6

number of columns for ......................................... 2-7, 10-5

Engineering unit ............................................................ 2-12, 6-2

Header ................................................................. 2-12, 6-15, 7-2

List ...................................................................... 2-11, 6-13, 7-2

Manual ................................................................ 2-12, 7-2, 9-10

Message...................................................... 2-12, 6-15, 7-3, 9-10

Message printout .................................................................... 7-3

clearing ........................................................................ 9-17

Tag ...................................................................... 2-12, 6-9, 10-4

Title .............................................................. 2-6, 2-7, 2-12, 6-15

Scale(d) ................................................................................ 2-12

Burnout ................................................................................2-3, 10-13

[C]

Carriage ................................................................................. 3-7, 13-1

Carrying handle ........................................................................ 2, 2-19

Chart, chart cassette, chart paper ..................................... 4, 3-5 to 3-9

Chart end output .................................................................. 2-18, 3-26

CHART key .................................................................................... 6-4

Chart speed ......................................................2-5, 2-8, 6-4, 6-5, 14-6

setting/change of ................................................... 2-5, 6-5, 9-10

Clamp terminal .......................................................... 2 to 4, 1-4, 3-26

Clock ..................................................................................... 2-1, 4-13

CODE NUMBER .......................................................... See Password

Component type ......................................................................1-1, 1-3

Computation ................................................................................. 2-16

Condition ........................................................................................ 2-1

Computation

Computation error .....................................................12-9, 12-10

Operator ............................................................................... 12-1

Equation .................................................................. 12-1 to 12-5

Constant ............................................................................... 12-6

Starting/stopping/clearing/resetting ............................12-7, 12-8

Computed data

Saving ..................................................................... 11-1 to 11-4

Reading ................................................................... 11-5 to 11-7

Deleting

Copying ............................................................... 11-13 to 11-17

Copying, alarm, other items, range ......................................9-12 9-13

Crimp-on lugs ............................................................................... 3-13

[D]

Data format ................................................................................. 11-19

Data length .......................................................................... 3-15, 3-17

Data size ............................................................................ 11-5, 11-11

DC power terminal connector .................................................. 5, 3-31

DC voltage ...............................................................................2-3, 5-3

DCV/TC/DI input module .................................................4, 1-4, 3-20

IM DR232-01E

Index-4

Deleting a character or numerical .......................................................

............................... See Inserting/deleting a character or numerical

Destination channel, for difference between channels ..........2-16, 5-3

DI, digital input .......................................................................2-3, 5-3

DI/DO module ...................................................................4, 1-5, 3-20

Difference between channels.................................. 2-16, 5-3, 4-2, 5-3

Difference high/low limit ................................................... See Alarm

Digital printout (printing) ................... 2-5 to 2-7, 6-9, 7-1, 10-5, 10-6

number of columns for ......................................................2-7, 10-5

Display...................................... See also Functions, 1-2, 1-3, 4-2, 4-3

Alarm .............................................................................. 4-2, 4-3

hold function.......................................................2-15, 10-8

information .........................................................2-15, 8-14

Alarm Search .......................................................... 2-1, 4-7, 4-8

Alarm Status.................................................................. 2-1, 4-10

AUTO .................................................................. 2-1, 4-1 to 4-3

channel ............................................................................4-2, 4-3

Clock .............................................................................2-1, 4-13

Condition................................................................................ 2-1

difference between channels ...........................................4-2, 5-3

Main ...................................................... 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 4-1 to 4-3

MANUAL .............................................................................. 4-4

measurement values ........................................................4-2, 4-3

Page, PAGE .................................................................... 2-1, 4-6

remote/local control status ..................................................... 2-1

Relay status ......................................................... 2-1, 4-11, 4-12

DISP key..............................................................................................

...Chapter 4, 7-2, 7-3, 9-14, 9-16, Chapter 10, 11-11, 11-13, 12-12

Display mode ........................................................................ See mode

Display update interval ..................................................... See interval

Dot-printing shift .......................................................................... 10-2

Dot-printing recording system................ See also dot recording, 10-4

Dot recording ............................................................ 2-5, 2-6, 2-9, 6-2

method of .......................................................................... 2-9, 10-4

Dot recording ................................................................ See Recording

[E]

Engineering unit

display .............................................................................4-2, 4-3

Printout of ..................................................................... 2-12, 6-2

Enhanced data logging software........................................................ 6

Edge action ..................................................................................... 9-9

Event, event/action functions ................................... 2-17, 9-1 to 9-10

Extender base ............................................................................... 3-27

Extender module........................................................................... 3-27

External in/output ......................................................................... 2-18

External RJC (EXT) ............................................................... See RJC

[F]

Fail (failure) output ............................................................. 2-18, 3-26

FEED key ........................................................... 3-10, 3-12, 3-13, 7-1

Feed, recording paper ..................................................................... 7-1

Ferrite core ................................................................ 3-10, 3-12, 3-42

Filter

Input .............................................................................. 2-4, 10-8

Noise .................................................................................... 3-39

First channel ................................................................................... 5-2

FIX, recording interval ............................................................2-8, 6-2

INDEX

Floppy disk

Handling ............................................................................... 1-11

Formatting .......................................................................... 11-14

Front door ................................................................................1-2, 1-3

FUNC key............................................................................................

.......... 5-12, 7-3, 7-4, 9-14, 9-16, 10-29, 10-31, 10-32, 12-8, 12-11

Functions

Action................................................................................... 2-17

Alarm ...................................................................... 2-13 to 2-15

Alarm display hold ......................................................2-15, 10-8

Computation......................................................................... 2-16

Display ................................................................................... 2-1

Event/action ..................................................... 2-17, 9-1 to 9-10

External in/output................................................................. 2-18

Interpolation ................................................................2-10, 6-17

Key-lock, keylock ................................ 2-17, 9-15, 10-15, 10-16

Match Time function........................................... 2-12, 6-17, 9-9

Measurement input.......................................................... 2-3, 2-4

Recording .................................................................. 2-5 to 2-12

Relay hold ............... See also HOLD/NON-HOLD, 2-15, 10-11

Function Grounding Terminal, function-ground terminal, .................

........................................................................... 4, 3-10, 3-12, 3-44

Full scale position ......................................................................... 10-2

Fuse .......................................................................................... 5, 3-31

holder ................................................................................... 13-2

replacement of...................................................................... 13-2

[G]

GP-IB interface................................................................ 2, 2-19, 3-10

GP-IB module.................................................................... 4, 1-5, 3-10

Graph ................................................................. See Bargraph display

Grounding, protective grounding ........................................................

.............................................. 7, 3-20, 3-29, 3-30, 3-38, 3-43, 3- 44

Group setting ............................................................. 2-11, 6-17, 10-4

Group trend recording ................................................. 2-9, 9-10, 10-4

[H]

Handshake ......................................................................... 3-15, 14-30

Handle for carrying ............................................. See Carrying handle

Header printout (printing) ........................................... 2-12, 6-15, 7-2

Heat sink fins ........................................................................... 1-2, 1-3

High limit alarm ...................................................................See alarm

High resolution RTD .................................................................... 14-2

HOLD/NON-HOLD ..........................................................2-14, 10-11

Horizontal or vertical printing ....................... See Recording direction

Hysteresis ............................................................................2-13, 10-8

[I]

Initialization.................................................................................. 9-17

Input

channel ........................................................................2, 1-2, 1-3

filter ............................................................................... See filter

terminals........................................................... 1-4, 3-20 to 3-26

type ................................................................... 2, 2-3, 5-1 to 5-3

Inserting/deleting a character or numerical .................................. 6-15

Installation method .............................................................. 3-2 to 3-4

Instrument number ............................................................................ 3

Index-5

IM DR232-01E

Index

Integration time ......................... See A/D (converter) integration time

Internal illumination ..................................................................... 2-19

Internal RJC ............................................................................ See RJC

Internal switches ............................................ 2-13, 8-3, 10-9 to 10-11

Interpolation ........................................................................2-10, 6-17

Interval

Display update ............................................................ 2-1, 10-23

for recording.......................................... 2-8, 6-3, 6-5, 10-6, 14-6

for scan (measurement) ......................................... 2-4, 2-8, 10-2

for rate-of-change alarms ............................................2-13, 10-8

INTVL .......................................................................................... 11-5

[J]

[K]

Key-lock (keylock) function ............................................... 2-17, 9-15

setting of.................................................................. 10-15, 10-16

KEY LOCK, KEYLOCK ................................ See Key-lock function

[L]

Last channel .................................................................................... 5-2

Level action .................................................................................... 9-9

Life of lithium battery .......................................................3-13, 14-10

Linear scaling ........................................................................ 2-16, 5-5

List printout, printing .................................................. 2-11, 6-13, 7-2

Logging, LOGGING ........................................................... See Mode

LOGIC .......................................................................................... 11-5

Logic (LOGIC) box ........................................................................ 9-9

Low limit alarm, lower-limit alarm .................................... See Alarm

[M]

mA input module ................................................................... 1-2, 3-23

MANUAL ........................................................................ See Display

Manual printout, printing ............................................ 2-12, 7-2, 9-10

Margin ............................................................................................ 2-6

Match Time function .................................................................... 2-12

setting of........................................................................ 6-17, 9-9

Measured data

Saving ..................................................................... 11-1 to 11-5

Reading ................................................................... 11-7 to 11-9

Deleting

Copying ............................................................... 11-15 to 11-19

Measurement input functions .................................................. 2-3, 2-4

Measurement interval ....................................................... See interval

Measurement range ...................................................................... 14-2

Memory ............................................................................................. 3

Message printout, printing .................................. 2-12, 6-15, 7-3, 9-10

M. FUNC 1 key .............................................................................. 9-9

M. FUNC 2 key .............................................................................. 9-9

Mode

Analog Trend .......................................... 2-5, 2-7, 2-15, 6-2, 6-3

Display ............................................................... 2-1, 4-1 to 4-13

Logging, LOGGING ....................................................... 2-5, 6-2

Monitor Display ..................................................................... 2-1

Operation...................................................... 2-14, 10-9 to 10-11

Recording ........................................................................2-5, 6-2

TIME mode ............................................................................ 6-3

MODE key .................................................... Chapter 4 to Chapter 12

Model and Suffix Codes ............................................................. 3 to 5

Module information ...................................................................... 9-17

Monitor Display Mode ................................................................... 2-1

Mounting brackets ...................................................................... 6, 3-4

Moving average functions ...................................................2-16, 6-17

number of samples for ................................................ 2-16, 6-17

MULTIPLE ........................................................................... 2-8, 10-6

[N]

Names of parts ....................................................1-2 to 1-5, 3-5 to 3-8

Name plate ......................................................................................... 4

NO ALARM ........................................................................ 4-7 to 4-9

Noise, countermeasures ................................................... 3-35 to 3-44

[O]

Operating conditions (reference) .................................................. 14-2

Operation panel .......................................................................1-2, 1-3

Operation mode .................................................................... See mode

Optional modules ....................................................................... 4, 1-5

alarm module ....................................................................... 2-18

communication interface modules ....................................... 2-19

DI/DO module ..................................................................... 2-18

[P]

Parity ....................................................................... 3-15, 3-17, 14-10

Partially expanded display................................................ See Display

Parts replacement ......................................................................... 13-1

Password ..............................................................................9-15, 2-17

Periodic maintenance ................................................................... 13-1

Pitch ......................................................................... See printing pitch

Platen .............................................................................................. 3-5

Position marks, when installing the chart and ribbon cassette ....... 3-6

Power

connector ............................................................. 1-2, 3-29, 3-32

cable (code) ........................................ 2, 3, 3-1, 3-29, 3-31, 3-32

switch .................................................................... 1-2, 1-3, 3-33

terminals.............................................................. 1-3, 3-30, 3-31

Power supply voltage .............................................. 2, 4, 3-29 to 3-35

Pre trigger ..................................................................................... 11-5

PRINT key ...................................................................................... 7-2

Printing pitch ......................................................................... 2-7, 10-5

Printout, printing

Additional ............................................................................ 2-12

Priority, for recording colors ........................................................ 2-10

Protective grounding .................................................... See grounding

Pulse input module ...................................................... 1-2, 3-26, 5-14

[Q]

[R]

Rack mount kit, rack mounting .................................................. 6, 3-3

RANGE key .........................................................................Chapter 5

RATE, for partially expanded recording ............................... 2-10, 6-7

INDEX

IM DR232-01E

Index-6

Recording

colors .............................................. See also priority, 2-8, 10-14

direction (, horizontal or vertical printing) ................... 2-7, 10-5

example ................................................................. 2-6, 2-7, 2-11

functions ............................................................... 2-5 to 2-12

interval ..................................................................... See Interval

mode ................................................................................2-5, 6-2

Normal (NORMAL) ..................................................... 2-9, 10-4

Partially expanded.........................................................2-10, 6-7

span ................................................................................. 2-9, 5-3

starting/stopping of (to start/stop) ............... 2-9, 7-1 to 7-4, 9-10

starting/stopping time of ....................................... 2-6, 2-7, 10-5

zones ...................................................... See also Zone, 2-9, 6-7

RECORD key ................................................................................. 7-1

Re-failure or re-alarm ........................................ See Alarm reflashing

Reference channel, for difference between channels ............ 2-16, 5-3

Reference junction compensation .......................................... See RJC

REFLASH, Reflashing alarm ............................................ 2-14, 10-10

Registration, of details set/selected with SET UP menu ............ 10-23

RELATIVE, relative time .......................................................2-8, 6-3

Relay

for alarm output.......................................................... See Alarm

energizing/de-energizing setting ...............................2-14, 10-11

Remote control, REMOTE .......................................... 2-18, 3-26, 9-9

Replacement period, for parts ...................................................... 13-1

Report

ON/OFF ............................................................................. 10-27

PRINT ................................................................................ 10-32

START ............................................................................... 10-32

STOP .................................................................................. 10-31

Reset

Alarm ......................................................................... See Alarm

Timer .................................................................. See Timer reset

Resistance temperature detector ............................................ See RTD

Ribbon cassette ................................................................ 3, 3-7 to 3-9

RJC ...................................................................................... 2-3, 10-13

RRJC ..................................................................................... 2-19, 5-3

RS-232C Interface ...............................................................2-19, 3-16

RS-232C module ............................................................... 5, 1-5, 3-15

RS-422-A/RS-485 Interface ................................................2-19, 3-18

RS-422-A/RS-485 module ................................................ 5, 1-6, 3-17

RTD .........................................................................................2-3, 5-3

[S]

Scan interval ..................................................................... See Interval

Scale check mark ............................................... See also Values, 10-5

Scale value ............................................................................ See value

Screw shaft ............................................................................ 3-7, 13-1

Screw terminals ............................................ 2, 3, 1-4, 1-5, 3-19, 3-30

Set-up data

Saving ................................................................. 11-10 to 11-11

Reading ............................................................... 11-12 to 11-14

Deleting

Copying ............................................................... 11-15 to 11-19

SET key ............... Chapter 6, 9-1, 9-12, 9-19, Chapter 11, 12-4, 12-7

Set-up list, printing ......................................................................... 7-4

Shunt resistor (resistance) ........................................................ 6, 3-19

SINGLE ................................................................................. 2-8, 10-6

SKIP, skipping................................. 2-3, 4-2, 4-3, 4-5 to 4-7, 4-9, 5-3

Slots .................................1-2, 1-3, 4-2, 4-3, 4-10, 4-12, 10-10, 10-11

Software............................................................................................. 3

Span

for recording.................................................................... 2-9, 5-3

calibrated values of ............................................................ 13-11

Spares ................................................................................................ 4

Sprocket .......................................................................................... 3-6

Stop bit .................................................................... 3-15, 3-17, 14-10

Strain balance ............................................................................... 5-10

Strain input module ......................................... 1-2, 3-40, 5-10 to 5-12

Style number...................................................................................... 2

Style S1..................................................................................... 1, 14-1

Sub-display 1, 2 ........................................................ 1-2, 1-3, 2-1, 4-3

Suffix codes ........................................... See Model and Suffix Codes

Symbols

for conventions.......................................................................... 8

for safety ................................................ See also WARNING, 7

System module, recognition of ..................................................... 9-17

[T]

Tag

printout ................................................................ 2-12, 6-9, 10-4

selection ......................................................... 2-7, 6-9, 7-1, 10-4

Number of character of ......................................... 2-7, 7-1, 10-4

Temporary stop............................................................................... 7-1

Terminal cover ............................................................................. 3-19

Thermocouple ..........................................................................2-3, 5-3

TIME mode .................................................................................... 6-3

Time-up .......................................................................................... 2-8

Timer No. ................................................................................ 2-8, 6-3

Timer reset ................................................................... 2-8, 9-14, 9-15

Title, title printouts ............................................... 2-6, 2-7, 2-12, 6-15

Trigger .................................................................................11-4, 11-9

Trigger recording .................................................................................

................... See also Alarm (trend recording upon occurence), 2-9

Troubleshooting............................................................................ 13-3

[U]

Unit No. ................................................................ 4-2, 4-3, 4-10, 4-12

Universal input module .............................................................. 3, 1-2

Upper-limit alarm ............................................................... See Alarm

[V]

Value

Scale (scaled) ........................................................ 2-6, 2-9, 6-13

printout ........................................................................ 2-12

Reference point for .............................................................

................................ See also scale check mark, 2-6, 2-7

Vertical printing ............................................ See Recording direction

Voltage level................................................................................... 5-3

[W]

Warm up ....................................................................................... 3-38

WARNING, for safety precautions ................................................... 7

Wiring ........................................................................................... 3-19

INDEX

Index-7

IM DR232-01E

Index

[X]

[Y]

[Z]

Zero position................................................................................. 10-2

calibrated values of ............................................................ 13-11

Zone ......................................................... See also recording, 2-9, 6-7

Left position of ................................................................2-9, 6-7

Right position of ............................................................. 2-9, 6-7

INDEX

DR232/DR242 Hybrid Recorder (Expandable Type) YOKOGAWA/YOKOGAWA DR232 And DR242 Instruction YOKOGAWA

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation